JP2022001279A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably performing management of a game machine.SOLUTION: A main-side CPU 63 stores information on a detection result of each ball entry detection sensor in each kind of counter area of a main-side RAM 65 as history information. In reception of an instruction signal for starting checking from a hall computer of a game hall, each kind of parameter is calculated by utilizing history information of each kind of counter area, and the calculation result is reported by utilizing a special pattern display part 37a and a normal pattern display part 38a. In calculation of each kind parameter by utilizing the history information, shooting of game balls is prohibited and execution of a game round or the like is suspended. More specifically, progress of a game is restricted. Execution of a performance in a pattern display device 41 is continued even in a state in which progress of the game is restricted. After that, at a lapse of a display period of a check result, a state in which progress of a game is restricted is canceled.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 50

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine is provided with a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player on the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage unit and a lower plate storage unit as a plate storage unit is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the game balls surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-261415

Here, it is necessary to play games favorably in a gaming machine such as the above example, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preferably performing a game.

The invention according to claim 1 in order to solve the above problems includes a predetermined detection means for detecting a game ball and a predetermined detection means.
A game value-adding means that is electrically connected to the predetermined detection means and executes a process for adding a game value to the game.
A processing execution means that is electrically connected to the game value-adding means and executes a predetermined process,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game value-adding means is
A first reference information storage means for storing reference information, which is information used in the process for imparting the game value and is information referred to for the detection of the predetermined detection means.
The reference stored in the first reference information storage means after the predetermined supply of power to the game machine is started and before the execution of the predetermined process for advancing the game is started. A first transmission means for transmitting a reference information signal corresponding to the information to the processing execution means, and
A second transmission means for transmitting a predetermined information signal based on the ball entry information, which is information acquired based on the detection by the predetermined detection means, to the processing execution means.
It is characterized by having.

According to the present invention, it is possible to make the game suitable.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main structure of a pachinko machine by disassembling. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the composition concerning the discharge of the game ball which flowed down the game area. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure which makes the detection result of the ball entry detection sensor input to the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry detection process executed by the main CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric composition of the payout control device and various devices communicating with the payout control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the payout side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric structure of the management IC. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the configuration of the input port of the management side I / F. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the configuration of the correspondence memory. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the history memory. It is a flowchart which shows the recognition process which is executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process which is executed by the management side CPU. (A) to (d) It is a time chart which shows how the information of the correspondence relation between the 1st to 15th buffer and a signal type is stored in the correspondence relation memory. It is a flowchart which shows the management output processing executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the history setting process executed by the management side CPU. (A) to (e) are time charts showing how history information is stored in the history memory. It is a flowchart which shows the data output processing executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output executed by the management side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the configuration of the input port of the management side I / F in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the recognition process which is executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process which is executed by the management side CPU. (A) to (h) It is a time chart which shows how the information of the correspondence relation between the 1st to 12th buffers and a signal type is stored in the correspondence relation memory. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric structure of the management IC in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the configuration of the input port of the management side I / F. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure information storage process executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure correspondence processing executed by the management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output executed by the management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure correspondence processing which is executed by the management side CPU in 4th Embodiment. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the trigger specifying process which is executed by the main CPU in 5th Embodiment, and (b) is the flowchart which shows the arithmetic process which is executed by the management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the opportunity specifying process which is executed by the main CPU in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing executed by the management side CPU in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the history setting process which is executed by the management side CPU in 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the history memory in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the history setting process executed by the management side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric structure of the MPU of the main control apparatus in tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry detection process executed by the main CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric structure of the main control device in eleventh embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the configuration of the input port of the management side I / F. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the history memory. It is a flowchart which shows the history setting process executed by the management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output executed by the management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the parameter management process which is executed by the main CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the signal path which transmits the detection result of each ball entry detection sensor in a twelfth embodiment to a main CPU and a management IC. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric structure of the main control device and the voice emission control device in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control process which is executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process which is executed by the sound light side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation start processing executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power start processing executed by the main CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the normal counter area, the open / close execution mode counter area, and the high frequency support mode counter area provided in the main RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry detection process executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal ball entry detection process executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the check process executed by the main CPU. (A) It is a front view of a special figure display part, (A) it is an explanatory view for explaining the display content of a special figure display part, (b) it is a front view of a general figure display part, and (B) it is normal. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating display contents of a figure display part. It is a flowchart which shows the check waiting process executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during display of the check result executed by the main CPU. (A) to (g) are time charts showing how the check waiting period and the check result display period progress. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the main CPU. (A)-(j) It is a figure which individually shows the symbol which is variable-displayed by the symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) It is a figure which shows the display surface of the symbol display device. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the symbol display apparatus in the check waiting period or the check result display period. It is a flowchart which shows the check process which is executed by the main CPU in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during display of the check result executed by the main CPU. (A) to (g) are time charts showing how the check waiting period and the check result display period progress. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the configuration of the input port provided in the MPU of the voice light emission control apparatus in 15th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the corresponding relation area provided in the sound light side ROM. It is a flowchart which shows the management output processing executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process which is executed by the sound light side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the normal counter area, the open / close execution mode counter area, and the high frequency support mode counter area provided in the sound light side RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the history setting process executed by the sound light side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the check process which is executed in the sound light side CPU. It is a front view of the main control device in 16th Embodiment. FIG. 78 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 78. It is a front view of the slot machine in 17th Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door open. It is a front view of a housing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is a front view of the display window part. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the correspondence relationship between the combination of the symbol which becomes a prize, and the privilege given when it becomes a prize. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a normal mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of reels and the winning mode established when the lottery table for a normal mode is selected. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for the 1st RT mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of reels, and the winning mode established when the lottery table for 1st RT mode is selected. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for the 2nd RT mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of reels, and the winning mode which holds when the lottery table for 2nd RT mode is selected. It is a flowchart which shows the correspondence process at the end of a game executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the transition chance management process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ART state processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the game management process which is executed in the main MPU. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the management process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lighting process which is executed in the main MPU. (A), (b) is a time chart showing the relationship between the opening angle of the front door and the control state of the lighting device. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state of the lighting apparatus in the case where the front door is an open state and the opening angle is not more than a predetermined opening angle, and (b) the opening angle of a front door is the maximum opening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state of a lighting apparatus in the case of an angle. (A) An explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various areas provided in the main RAM in the eighteenth embodiment, and (b) for explaining the contents of various counters provided in the total accumulation buffer. It is an explanatory diagram, (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters provided in the 1st accumulation buffer, and (d) the contents of various counters provided in a 2nd accumulation buffer will be described. It is explanatory drawing for. (A) to (h) are time charts showing how the history of games is managed. It is a flowchart which shows the game management process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the target switching process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric structure of the management IC in 19th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the 1st history memory and the 2nd history memory. It is a flowchart which shows the history setting process executed by the management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the target switching process executed by the management side CPU.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a kind of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10 in an exploded manner. In FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration in the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. Have. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. The outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration for the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in the island equipment of the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip portion thereof, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so as not to be openable. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the guiding means is provided by the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26. As a guide rail is configured. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

By the way, the game ball launch mechanism 27 has a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying the game ball stored in the precision plate 55a described later on the launch rail 27a, and the launch rail 27a. It is equipped with a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. The solenoid 27c is driven and controlled by the rotation operation of the launch operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14, and the game ball is launched.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a normal drawing unit 38, and the like. ing. A total of four general winning openings 31 are provided, and one each is provided for the others.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, when one game ball enters the first operating port 33 or when one game ball enters the second operating port 34. Is executed to pay out one prize ball, and when one game ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, 10 prize balls are paid out to the special electric winning device 32. When one of the game balls is entered, 15 prize balls are paid out.

The number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34 may be smaller than that in the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is the first operating port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

In addition, an out opening 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and a game ball that has not entered various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area PA through the out opening 24a. Further, a large number of nails 24b are planted on the game board 24 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only is the ball discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the flow of the game area PA is continued without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the ball from entering the game ball into the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 The entry of a game ball into a game is also referred to as a prize.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the first actuating port 33 and the second actuating port 34 are open upward. Further, both the operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operating port 33 faces upward. The second actuating port 34 is provided with a universal electric accessory 34a as a guide piece made of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the general electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot win the prize in the second operating port 34, and when the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the prize can be won in the second operating port 34.

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side of the second operating port 34 in the flow direction of the game ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball winning the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the second operating port 34.

Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the universal electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the through gate 35, and a normal drawing unit 38 is displayed in the lower right corner of the game area PA where the game ball does not pass. The variable display of the pattern is performed in the part 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the winning of the electric service opening, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the general map display unit 38a is completed, the state shifts to the general electric opening state. In the open state of the normal electric power, the public electric accessory 34a is in the open state in a predetermined manner.

The cathode ray display unit 38a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , CRT or other types of display devices such as dot matrix displays. Further, as the pattern to be variablely displayed on the general map display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed. A configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the normal drawing unit 38, a normal drawing holding display unit 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal drawing display unit 38a. The number of game balls that have won a prize in the through gate 35 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the normal figure reservation display unit 38b.

A winning lottery is performed with a prize in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly shown through the display effect in the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

More specifically, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display unit 37a. The display area of the special figure display unit 37a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the special figure display unit 37a, a winning lottery is performed triggered by a prize in the first operating port 33 or a winning in the second operating port 34, so that a variable display or a predetermined display of the pattern is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. The special figure display unit 37a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , CRT or other types of display devices such as dot matrix displays. Further, as the pattern displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are displayed. Is displayed.

In the special figure unit 37, a special figure hold display unit 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display unit 37a. The number of game balls that have won a prize in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the special figure reservation display unit 37b.

About the symbol display device 41 In detail, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display device. You may.

In the symbol display device 41, when the special symbol display unit 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the winning of the second operating port 34, the symbol is displayed accordingly. A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. For example, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows of upper, middle, and lower rows are set as a plurality of display areas, and the numbers "1" to "9" are added to each symbol row. The symbols are scrolled and displayed in ascending or descending order. In this scroll display, the scroll display in all the symbol columns is started first, the scroll display is switched to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol column → the lower symbol column → the middle symbol column, and finally the predetermined symbol display is specified in each symbol column. It ends with the symbol still displayed. Then, for example, in a game round in which the game result is a big hit result, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a preset effective line on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41.

In the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect triggered by winning a prize in the first actuating port 33 or the second actuating port 34, but also the display effect in the open / close execution mode that shifts after winning is performed. Will be. Further, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 33 and 34, the display is started on the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41, and the game times 1 until the predetermined result is displayed and ended. Equivalent to times. Further, the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern to be variablely displayed by the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned symbol, and may be configured such that only numbers are variablely displayed as the symbol, for example.

If a big hit is won in the winning lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the winning of the second operating port 34, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 can be won. The special electric winning device 32 is provided with a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and is provided with an opening / closing door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The opening / closing door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening / closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize, and is switched to an open state in which the game ball can win a prize when the transition to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery. It has become. By the way, the open / close execution mode is a mode in which the transition is made when a hit result is obtained. It should be noted that although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured in a state in which it is more difficult for the prize to occur than in the open state.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration relating to discharge of a game ball flowing down the game area PA.

As described above, the game ball that has entered any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a is discharged from the gaming area PA. In other words, the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 and flowing into the game area PA is any one of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a. By entering the ball, it will be discharged from the game area PA. The game ball that has entered any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a is guided to the back side of the game board 24.

On the back surface of the game board 24, discharge passage portions 42 to 48 are formed corresponding to each of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a. .. The game balls that have flowed into the discharge passages 42 to 48 are guided to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24 by flowing down the flowed discharge passages 42 to 48, and become a discharge ball recovery part (not shown). Will be collected. Then, the game balls collected by the discharge ball collection unit are discharged to the ball circulation device of the island facility in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Various detection sensors 42a to 48a for detecting the game ball are provided in the discharge passage portions 42 to 48. The discharge passage portions 42 to 48 and the detection sensors 42a to 48a will be described below. Since four general winning openings 31 are provided as described above, the discharge passage portions 42 to 44 exist corresponding to each of the four general winning openings 31. In this case, one detection sensor 42a, one for each of the first discharge passage portion 42 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31 and the second discharge passage portion 43 corresponding to the general winning opening 31 on the right side thereof. 43a is provided. Specifically, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the first discharge passage portion 42, and the detection range is provided in the middle position of the second discharge passage portion 43. The second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided so as to exist. The game ball that has entered the leftmost general winning opening 31 is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a while passing through the first discharge passage portion 42, and the game that has entered the general winning opening 31 to the right of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a. The ball is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a on the way through the second discharge passage portion 43. Further, a third discharge passage portion 44 formed so as to join the two general winning openings 31 on the right side at an intermediate position is provided. The third discharge passage portion 44 has an inlet side region corresponding to each of the two general winning openings 31, and has one outlet side region when the inlet side regions merge in the middle. is doing. The third winning opening detection sensor 44a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the exit side region in the third discharge passage portion 44. The game ball that has entered one of the two general winning openings 31 on the right side is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a while passing through the third discharge passage portion 44.

The fourth discharge passage portion 45 exists corresponding to the special electric winning device 32. A special electric detection sensor 45a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, and the game ball that has entered the special electric winning device 32 is on the way through the fourth discharge passage portion 45. It is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. A fifth discharge passage portion 46 exists corresponding to the first actuating port 33. The first actuating port detection sensor 46a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the fifth discharge passage portion 46, and the game ball that has entered the first actuating port 33 passes through the fifth discharge passage portion 46. It is detected by the first actuating port detection sensor 46a on the way through. A sixth discharge passage portion 47 exists corresponding to the second actuating port 34. The second operating port detection sensor 47a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the sixth discharging passage portion 47, and the game ball that has entered the second operating port 34 uses the sixth discharging passage portion 47. It is detected by the second actuating port detection sensor 47a on the way through. The seventh discharge passage portion 48 exists corresponding to the out port 24a. The out port detection sensor 48a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the seventh discharge passage portion 48, and the game ball that has entered the out port 24a is on the way through the seventh discharge passage portion 48. It is detected by the out port detection sensor 48a.

The game ball that is the target of detection by any one of the various detection sensors 42a to 48a is not the target of detection by the other detection sensors 42a to 48a. Further, the gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and the game ball passing through the through gate 35 while flowing down the game area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

As the various detection sensors 42a to 49a, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors are used, but any sensor can be used as long as the game balls can be individually detected. Further, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a are electrically connected to the main control device 60 described later, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 42a to 49a are output to the main control device 60. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a output a LOW level signal when the game ball is not detected, and output a HI level signal when the game ball is detected. The relationship between HI and LOW is not limited to this, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 so that almost the entire area of the game area PA can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is colorless and transparently formed by glass, but is not limited to this, and may be colorless and transparent by synthetic resin, and the gaming area PA is formed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52. It may be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

A display light emitting unit 53 is provided above the window unit 51. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 54 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided. Further, below the window portion 51, an upper bulging portion 55 bulging toward the front side and a lower bulging portion 56 are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 55a opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a also opened upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. The upper plate 55a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 56a has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 55a.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 60 that controls the main control of the game is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 housed in a board box 60a. The substrate box 60a may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box 60a are inseparably bonded, and a bonding portion that requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation is configured, or an adhesive layer remains on the bonding target at the time of peeling. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box 60a can be considered.

The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 60. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism unit 73 and a control device collective unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

The payout mechanism unit 73 includes a tank 75 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game ball paid out from the payout device 76 is discharged to the upper plate 55a or the lower plate 56a through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism unit 73 is provided with, for example, a back pack board having a power switch for turning on and off the power supply while supplying a main power supply of AC 24 volts.

The control device collective unit 74 generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by the payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76 and various control devices, and is accompanied by the operation of the launch operation device 28 by the player. It is equipped with a power supply / launch control device 78 for controlling the launch of a game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply / launch control device 78 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 67 that monitors the power supply. The MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. In addition to the main CPU 63, which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and an arithmetic unit, the MPU 62 includes a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 62 has a built-in interrupt circuit, timer circuit, data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

The main ROM 64 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory, and is used only for reading. The main ROM 64 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the main CPU 63.

The main RAM 65 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 65 can be randomly accessed, and the time required for reading is faster than that of the main ROM 64 when compared with the same data capacity. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data and the like for the execution of the control program stored in the main ROM 64.

The management IC 66 is a management device that manages the entry mode of the game ball in the game area PA based on the information supplied from the main CPU 63. The details will be described later, but the management IC 66 grasps the entry history of the game ball into the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a. According to the grasped ball entry history, the frequency of entry into the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is grasped.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 67 and a payout control device 77 provided in the main control device 60 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. A power supply / emission control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 67, and operating power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power failure monitoring board 67.

Various sensors such as various ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. As described above, the various ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a include a first winning opening detection sensor 42a, a second winning opening detection sensor 43a, a third winning opening detection sensor 44a, a special electric detection sensor 45a, and a first operating opening detection sensor. 46a, a second operating port detection sensor 47a, an out port detection sensor 48a, and a gate detection sensor 49a. Based on the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 determines the entry into each entry portion. Further, in the main CPU 63, various lottery is executed based on the winning of the first operating port 33, and various lottery is executed based on the winning of the second operating port 34.

A power failure monitoring board 67, a payout control device 77, and a voice emission control device 81 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. The payout control device 77 outputs, for example, a prize ball command based on the fact that the game ball has entered the prize ball corresponding entry unit corresponding to the payout of the game ball in the above-mentioned entry unit. To. Various commands such as fluctuation commands, type commands, and opening commands are output to the voice emission control device 81.

On the output side of the MPU 62, there is a drive unit 32b for special electric power that opens and closes the opening / closing door 32a of the special electric winning device 32, and a drive unit 34b for general electric power that opens and closes the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34. The figure unit 37 and the normal figure unit 38 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display unit 37a and a special figure hold display unit 37b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the normal map unit 38 is provided with a normal map display unit 38a and a normal map hold display unit 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the open / close execution mode, the drive control of the special electric drive unit 32b is executed in the main CPU 63 so that the special electric winning device 32 is opened / closed. Further, when the open state of the utility accessory 34a is won, the drive control of the drive unit 34b for the utility is executed in the main CPU 63 so that the utility accessory 34a is opened and closed. Further, at each game round, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a is executed on the main CPU 63. Further, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the general electric accessory 34a is clearly shown, the display control of the general drawing display unit 38a is executed in the main CPU 63. Further, when a prize is awarded to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, or when the variable display is started on the special figure display unit 37a, the display control of the special figure holding display unit 37b is performed on the main CPU 63. Is executed, and when a prize is won in the through gate 35, or when the variable display is started in the normal figure display unit 38a, the display control of the normal figure hold display unit 38b is executed in the main CPU 63.

The power failure monitoring board 67 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply / emission control device 78, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

The power supply / launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, and the like is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied. By the way, the power supply / emission control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power failure is mainly used. Power for storage retention is supplied to the main RAM 65 of the control device 60 and the payout control device 77. Further, the power supply / launch control device 78 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

The voice emission control device 81 drives and controls the display light emission unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and also controls the display control device 82. Is. The display control device 82 executes the display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command received from the voice emission control device 81.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main CPU 63>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

The main CPU 63 uses various counter information during the game to perform a big hit generation lottery, a setting of the display of the special figure display unit 37a, a setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, a setting of the display of the normal figure display unit 38a, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the occurrence of hits, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 41 are displaced. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and the display duration in the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41 are determined. The variable type counter CS is used. Further, it is decided to use the general electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is set to the ordinary electric accessory open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is provided in the main RAM 65 as an acquisition information storage means when a prize is won in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. It is stored in the reserved storage area 65a.

The hold storage area 65a includes a hold area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and is recorded in the winning history of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. In addition, the combination of the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as the hold information in any of the hold areas RE1 to RE4.

In this case, in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, when the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first holding area RE1 → the second. Each numerical information is stored in the order of the holding area RE2 → the third holding area RE3 → the fourth holding area RE4 in chronological order. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 can be reserved and stored. ..

The number that can be stored on hold is not limited to four, and may be any other, such as two, three, or five or more, or may be a single number.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display unit 37a, and is the start of one game. At that time, a hit / fail judgment or the like is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the general electric utility opening counter C4 will be described. The general electric utility opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The general electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the general electric holding area 65c of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the utility accessory 34a to the open state by the value of the stored utility accessory opening counter C4.

In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the general electric accessory 34a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened per unit time when compared in the situation where the game ball is continuously launched in the game area PA in the same manner. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of states is relatively high or low.

In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the normal-electricity open state in the general-purpose electric power opening lottery using the general-purpose electric goods opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the general-purpose accessory 34a is opened when the general-purpose electric accessory 34a is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and one opening time is set longer. Has been done. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the open state of the general electric power is won and the open state of the public electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time for the next public-electric open lottery to be held after one public-electric open lottery is performed (that is, the general-purpose map), compared to the low-frequency support mode. The duration of one display on the display unit 38a) is set short.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operating port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operating port 33 is higher than that of the second operating port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is higher than that of the first operating port 33. The probability that a prize will be awarded to the mouth 34 increases. Then, when a prize is won in the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of balls held so much. It can be carried out.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the open state per unit time is not limited to the above, for example, in the general open lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the open state. In addition, the secured time secured for the next Fuden opening lottery after one Fuden opening lottery is performed (for example, is executed by the Fuzu display unit 38a based on the winning of the through gate 35). In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display times are prepared, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter reservation time is easier to select or the average reservation time is shorter than the low-frequency support mode. May be good. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured for the next public power opening lottery after one public power opening lottery is held is shortened. By applying any one of the conditions or any combination of the conditions of shortening the average time and increasing the winning probability, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be enhanced.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the hold storage area 65a of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored in the main ROM 64 as a winning / failing table. As the pass / fail table, a pass / fail table for the low probability mode and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means.

In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the big hit is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the big hit is 20. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29 and returned to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the hold storage area 65a at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plurality of big hit results are (1) the mode of opening / closing control of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) the first after the opening / closing execution mode ends. A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing differences in the three conditions of the support mode in the general electric accessory 34a of the two operating ports 34.

As an aspect of the opening / closing control of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is relatively high and low. Frequent winning mode and low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in either the high-frequency winning mode or the low-frequency winning mode, the game is executed up to a predetermined number of round games.

Here, the round game continues until either the predetermined upper limit duration elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the special electric winning device 32. It is a game to play. Further, the number of round games in the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is the same as the fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result triggered by the transition. Specifically, the maximum number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of one-time opening mode of the special electric winning device 32 are set with different opening durations from the opening to the closing of the special electric winning device 32. Specifically, a long-time mode in which the opening duration is set to 29 sec, which is a long time, and a short-time mode in which the opening duration is set to 0.06 sec, which is shorter than the long time, are set. Has been done.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Will be done. In addition, the maximum number of end conditions for round games is set to nine. Then, in the long-time mode among the above-mentioned opening modes, the opening duration is set to be longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and one round game. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, the opening duration is set to be shorter than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and one round game, and more specifically, the opening duration is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, when the opening is performed once in the long-time mode, it is expected that the special electric winning device 32 will be awarded the maximum number of prizes in one round game, and 1 in the short-time mode. When the number of times is opened, it is expected that the special electric winning device 32 will not be awarded, or even if the winning is generated, the number will be about one.

In the high-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round game according to the long-time mode. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round game in a short-time mode.

In addition, the number of times of opening and closing of the special electric winning device 32 in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game are those in the high frequency winning mode. Is not limited to the above values and is arbitrary as long as the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is higher than that of the low frequency winning mode. Is.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 64 as a distribution table. Then, a low probability jackpot result, a low winning high probability jackpot result, and a most advantageous jackpot result are set as such distribution destinations.

The low-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, this high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the transition.

The low-winning high-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / fail lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. be. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the winning / losing lottery becomes a big hit state and the state shifts to the big hit state.

The most advantageous jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the winning / losing lottery becomes a big hit state and the state shifts to the big hit state.

In relation to each of the above game states, the normal game state is not an open / close execution mode, but a state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode. Further, as a game result, a configuration in which a low winning high probability jackpot result is not set may be used. Further, in the open / close execution mode in the low winning high probability jackpot result, the number of round games may be smaller than in the case of the low probability jackpot result and the most advantageous jackpot result.

In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the low accuracy jackpot result, and "10 to 14" corresponds to the low winning high accuracy jackpot result. "15-29" corresponds to the most advantageous jackpot result.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The expected effect is a symbol display device 41 that is provided with a symbol display device 41 capable of displaying variable symbols, and in a gaming machine in which a final stop result is given as a result of a game that results in a predetermined jackpot. In the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol in the above is started, it means a display state for making the player think that the variable display state is likely to be the grant correspondence result. Specifically, regarding the grant correspondence result, the combination of symbols with the same number on any of the effective lines is stopped and displayed.

Two types of expected effects are set: a reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of the reach display and the occurrence of the grant response result in the stage before the reach display occurs.

In the reach display, the combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying a part of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and the remaining symbols are displayed in that state. A display state in which a variable display of a symbol is performed in a symbol column is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen. , A combination of reach symbols is reduced or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect.

In the notice display, after the variable display of the symbol is started on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, the symbol is variablely displayed in all the symbol rows, or a plurality of symbol rows. In the situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol row, the mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol row is included. Further, a background screen having a predetermined mode different from the previous mode and a symbol on the symbol row having a predetermined mode different from the previous mode are also included. Such a notice display may occur in any of the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the case where the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with a probability.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times when the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped and displayed. Further, in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result in which the combination of the same symbols is not stopped and displayed, the game is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game round corresponding to the deviation result, it is executed when the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the main ROM 64 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. ..

On the other hand, the determination of whether or not to display the advance notice is not performed by the main control device 60, but by the voice emission control device 81. In this case, in the voice emission control device 81, the notice display is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results than in the game times corresponding to the missed result, and the notice display having a low appearance rate is displayed. A lottery process for displaying a notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions that are likely to occur. Incidentally, this lottery result is reflected when the effect for the game round is executed on the symbol display device 41.

Next, the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used in the main CPU 63 to determine the display duration on the special symbol display unit 37a and the symbol display duration on the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the variation display on the special symbol display unit 37a and at the start of the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41.

<About the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, each process executed for advancing the game on the main CPU 63 will be described. The processing of the main CPU 63 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the power-on wait process is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined time for waiting (specifically, 1 sec) elapses after the main process is started. During the execution period of the power-on wait process, the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. After that, the access of the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function register of the main CPU 63 is set (step S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch provided in the power / emission control device 78 is manually operated (step S104), and whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 65. Determination (step S105). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed (step S106), and whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined (step S106). Step S107).

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, at the start of business of the game hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108 in the same manner. In step S108, the main RAM 65 is cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch is not pressed, step S109 without executing the process of step S108, provided that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. Proceed to. In step S109, the power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 65 such as initialization of the power failure flag is set as an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. Further, after the processing of step S109 is executed, the recognition processing (step S110) for causing the management IC 66 to recognize various information, and the data output for outputting various data to the reading device connected to the MPU 62. The process is executed (step S111). Details of these recognition processes and data output processes will be described later.

The main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited at the stage when the main process is started. The state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is released at the timing before the process of step S111 is completed and the process of step S112 is executed, and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output processing in step S111 is completed, and the timer interrupt processing is not executed until the stage before the processing in step S112 is started. Therefore, the process for advancing the game is not started in the main CPU 63 until the situation is reached.

After that, the process proceeds to the residual processing of steps S112 to S115. That is, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt processing, a residual time is generated between the timer interrupt processing of one and the next timer interrupt processing. This residual time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the residual process of steps S112 to S115 is repeatedly executed by utilizing the irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual processing in steps S112 to S115 is an irregular processing that is executed irregularly.

In the residual processing, first, in step S112, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In the following step S113, the random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and the variation counter update process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed in step S114. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 65, a process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S115, the interrupt enable setting for switching from the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt process is permitted is set. After executing the process of step S115, the process returns to step S112, and the processes of steps S112 to S115 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, in a 4 msec cycle).

First, the power failure information storage process is executed (step S201). In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 67, and if the occurrence of a power failure is identified, an infinite loop occurs after the power failure process is executed. Become. In the power failure processing, "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 65, a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

After that, the lottery random number update process is executed (step S202). In the lottery random number update process, the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information was sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric utility release counter C4, and the read numerical information was added by 1 to each. Later, a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S113, and in step S204, the fluctuation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S114.

After that, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred is executed (step S205). In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, "1" is set in the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 65. In the following step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag. If a negative determination is made in step S206, the processes after step S207 are executed.

In step S207, the port output process is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, the process for outputting the output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 32b for the special electric is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. Further, when the information for switching the utility accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for the utility should be started and the state should be switched to the closed state. If the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

After that, the reading process is executed (step S208). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

After that, the ball entry detection process is executed (step S209). In the ball entry detection process, the signals received from the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a are read, and based on the read result, the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the first operating port 33 are read. , The presence or absence of a ball entering the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 is specified. The details of the ball entry detection process will be described later.

After that, a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S210). In this case, the timer counters to which the stored numerical information is subtracted and updated are collectively handled, but both the subtraction type timer counter update and the addition type timer counter update are collectively performed. It may be configured.

After that, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed (step S211). In a situation where the firing operation to the firing operation device 28 is continued, one game ball is launched every 0.6 sec, which is a predetermined firing cycle. In the following step S212, as the input state monitoring process, the disconnection confirmation of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a and the opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are confirmed based on the information read in the reading process of step S208. I do.

After that, the special figure special electric control process for performing the execution control of the game times and the execution control of the open / close execution mode is executed (step S213). In the special figure special electric control process, when a prize is generated in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 in a situation where the number of reserved information stored in the holding storage area 65a is less than the upper limit number, the prize is awarded. A process of sequentially storing each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the time point in the hold storage area 65a is executed. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, it is determined whether or not the hold information corresponds to the jackpot winning on the condition that the hold information is stored and not during the game rotation or the open / close execution mode. Processing, and if it corresponds to the jackpot winning, the distribution determination processing for determining which jackpot result the pending information corresponds to is executed. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, not only the hit / fail determination process and the distribution determination process, but also whether or not the hold information corresponds to the reach occurrence when the hold information does not correspond to the big hit winning. The determination reach determination process is executed, and the process of selecting the duration of the game round is executed by using the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time. Then, a variable command including information on the duration according to the result of each of these processes and a type command including information on the game result are transmitted to the voice emission control device 81, and the pattern on the special figure display unit 37a is displayed. Start variable display. By receiving the variation command and the type command, the voice emission control device 81 starts the effect for the game round corresponding to the contents of these commands in the display light emission unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Further, the voice emission control device 81 transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the contents of the variation command and the type command to the display control device 82. Upon receiving the variation pattern command, the display control device 82 causes the symbol display device 41 to start the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the content of the variation pattern command. As a result, one game round is started.

In the special figure special electric control process, whether or not it is the end timing of the game round is determined by determining whether or not the continuation period of the game round determined at the start of the game round has elapsed during the execution of one game round. Is determined. If it is the end timing, the process of ending the game is executed with the display corresponding to the game result displayed. In this case, if the game times this time correspond to the occurrence of any of the jackpot results, the pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a. When the game times correspond to the out-of-game result, the pattern corresponding to the out-of-game result is stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a. Further, a final stop command indicating that the game round should be ended is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. Upon receiving the final stop command, the voice emission control device 81 ends the production for the current game round in the display light emission unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Further, the voice emission control device 81 transmits a final stop command to the display control device 82. By receiving the final stop command, the display control device 82 ends the effect of the current game round on the symbol display device 41.

In the special figure special electric control process, when the result of the game round corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the process for starting the open / close execution mode is executed. At the time of this start, an opening command indicating that the open / close execution mode is started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. When the round game is started, the special electric winning device 32 is opened, and when the round game is finished, the special electric winning device 32 is closed. In each of these processes, an open command indicating that the round game is started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81, and a closing command indicating that the round game is ended is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, when the open / close execution mode is terminated, an ending command indicating that is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. The voice emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 to execute the effect for the opening / closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to various commands received during the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the voice emission control device 81 transmits a command corresponding to the command received during the open / close execution mode to the display control device 82. The display control device 82 causes the symbol display device 41 to execute an effect for the open / close execution mode in a manner corresponding to various commands received during the open / close execution mode. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, when the opening / closing execution mode is terminated, the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode is terminated correspond to the type of jackpot result that triggered the execution of the opening / closing execution mode. Execute the process to switch to the mode.

After executing the special figure special electric control process of step S213 in the timer interrupt process, the normal figure normal electric control process is executed (step S214). In the Fuzu Fuden control process, when a prize has been won in the through gate 35, a process for acquiring the hold information on the Fuzu side is executed, and the hold information on the Fuzu side is stored. In addition, a release determination is made for the reserved information, and further, a process for performing an effect for a normal drawing is executed with the opening determination as an opportunity. Further, based on the result of the opening determination, a process of opening and closing the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is executed. In this case, if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed, and if the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed. Further, in the case of the open / close execution mode, even if the support mode immediately before that is the high frequency support mode, it becomes the low frequency support mode.

In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the reserved information related to the special figure display unit 37a in the special figure reservation display unit 37b is set. , The output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the reserved information related to the normal figure display unit 38a in the normal figure hold display unit 38b is set. Further, in step S215, the output information for updating the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, and the display contents of the normal figure display unit 38a are set. Set the output information for updating.

After that, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and the payout state reception process for performing the process corresponding to the check result is executed (step S216). In addition, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S217). Further, the external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing result of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time is executed (step S218). After that, the management output process for outputting the information corresponding to the entry result of the game ball in the game area PA to the management IC 66 is executed (step S219). The details of the management output processing will be described later.

Next, on the main CPU 63, based on the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a, the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the through. A configuration for specifying whether or not a game ball has entered the gate 35 will be described. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration in which the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a are input to the main CPU 63.

The main CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that eight types of signals can be handled at the same time. An area in which information of "0" or "1" is stored according to the voltage of each signal is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the 0th bit D0 to the 7th bit D7 are provided as the area. Further, more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 63a, but in order to limit the targets to be input at the same time to eight types, the signal group to be input to the input port 63a depends on the driver IC. It is switched through switching control.

In the ball entry detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), the signal group to be input to the input port 63a is set to the signal group from the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a. In the situation where such a setting is made, the 0th bit D0 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the first bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second bit D2 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and the third bit D3 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the special electric detection sensor 45a. , The 4th bit D4 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the 1st actuating port detection sensor 46a, and the 5th bit D5 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the 2nd actuating port detection sensor 47a. The 6-bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the out port detection sensor 48a, and the 7th bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 49a.

When each of the above-mentioned ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a does not detect the passage of the game ball, it outputs a LOW level signal indicating that it is not detected as a detection signal, and detects the passage of the game ball. In the case, an HI level signal indicating that detection is being performed is output as a detection signal. Then, the input port 63a stores the information of "0" for the corresponding bit when the LOW level signal is received, and "1" for the corresponding bit when the HI level signal is received. Store information about. That is, in the situation where the passage of the game ball is not detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a, the information of "0" corresponding to the information indicating that the corresponding bit is not detected is stored, and the passage of the game ball is stored. In the detected situation, the information of "1" corresponding to the information indicating that detection is being performed is stored for the corresponding bit.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a ball entry detection process executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the 0th bit D0 has been switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one piece is used by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a. It is determined that the game ball has been detected (step S301: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the first output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S302), and the value of the 10 prize ball counters provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S303). .. The first output flag is for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a should be executed for the management IC 66. It is a flag. The 10-prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times to execute the payout of 10 game balls. When the value of the counter for 10 prize balls is 1 or more, the 10 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), and the 10 prize balls are output to the payout control device 77. When the command is output once, the value of the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball command, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the 10 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the first bit D1 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one piece is used by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. It is determined that the game ball has been detected (step S304: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the second output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S305), and the value of the 10 prize ball counters provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S306). .. The second output flag is for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a should be executed for the management IC 66. It is a flag.

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the second bit D2 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one piece is used by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. It is determined that the game ball has been detected (step S307: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the third output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S308), and the value of the 10 prize ball counters provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S309). .. The third output flag is for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a should be executed for the management IC 66. It is a flag.

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored in the third bit D3 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, one game ball is released by the special electric detection sensor 45a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S310: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the special electric winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S311), and "1" is set in the fourth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S312). The value of the 15 prize ball counters provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S313). The special electric winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the special electric winning device 32 in the round game in the open / close execution mode. By confirming that "1" is set in the special electric winning flag in the special electric special electric control processing (step S213) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8), one game ball is inserted into the special electric winning device 32. It is specified that a ball has been generated, and the number of remaining balls that can be entered into the special electric winning device 32 in the round game is subtracted by 1. When the process of subtracting 1 from the number of balls that can be entered is executed, the special electric winning flag is cleared to "0". The fourth output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a should be executed for the management IC 66. .. The 15-prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times to execute the payout of 15 game balls. When the value of the 15 prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 15 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), and the 15 prize ball is output to the payout control device 77. When the command is output once, the value of the 15 prize ball counters is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 15 prize ball commands, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the 15 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the 4th bit D4 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one piece is used by the first operating port detection sensor 46a. It is determined that the game ball has been detected (step S314: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the first operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S315), and "1" is set in the fifth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S316). Further, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S317). The first operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the first operation port 33. In the special figure special electric control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), it is stored in the hold area RE of the hold storage area 65a by confirming that "1" is set in the first operation winning flag. The process of newly storing the pending information is executed on condition that the number of pending information being held is less than the upper limit of four. When it is confirmed that "1" is set in the first operation winning flag in the special electric special electric control process (step S213) and the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first operation winning flag is cleared to "0". do. The fifth output flag is for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a should be executed for the management IC 66. It is a flag. The one prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times one game ball should be paid out. When the value of the counter for one prize ball is 1 or more, the one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), and one prize ball is output. When the command is output once, the value of one prize ball counter is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives one prize ball command, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out.

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the fifth bit D5 has been switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one piece is used by the second actuating port detection sensor 47a. It is determined that the game ball has been detected (step S318: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the second operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S319), and "1" is set in the sixth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S320). Further, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S321). The second operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the second operation port 34. In the special figure special electric control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), it is stored in the hold area RE of the hold storage area 65a by confirming that "1" is set in the second operation winning flag. The process of newly storing the pending information is executed on condition that the number of pending information being held is less than the upper limit of four. When it is confirmed that "1" is set in the second operation winning flag in the special electric special electric control process (step S213) and the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the second operation winning flag is cleared to "0". do. The sixth output flag is for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a should be executed for the management IC 66. It is a flag.

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored in the 6th bit D6 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, one game ball is used by the out-port detection sensor 48a. Is detected (step S322: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the seventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S323). The seventh output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the out port detection sensor 48a should be executed for the management IC 66. be.

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored in the 7th bit D7 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S324: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S325). The gate winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35. In the normal power control process (step S214) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), by confirming that "1" is set in the gate winning flag, the normal power storage in the normal power holding area 65c is confirmed. On condition that the number of pending information on the side is less than 4, which is the upper limit, the process of storing the numerical information of the current general electric utility release counter C4 in the general electric holding area 65c as the holding information on the normal drawing side. To execute. It is confirmed that "1" is set in the gate winning flag in the Fuzu Fuden control process (step S214), and the gate winning flag is cleared to "0" when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed.

Since the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) is started in a cycle of 4 msec as described above, when the detection of one game ball is started by one ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a, the ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a. In the situation where the detection sensors 42a to 49a continue to detect the one game ball, the main CPU 63 identifies that one game ball is detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a. It will be done. Therefore, it is sufficient that one of the first to seventh output flags is provided.

Next, the processing contents executed by the payout control device 77 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the payout control device 77 and various devices that communicate with the payout control device 77 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The payout control device 77 includes an MPU 91. The MPU 91 has a payout side ROM 93, a payout side RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like, in addition to the payout side CPU 92, which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and an arithmetic unit.

The payout side ROM 93 is a memory (that is, non-volatile storage means) such as a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage retention, and is used only for reading. The payout side ROM 93 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the payout side CPU 92.

The payout side RAM 94 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The payout side RAM 94 can be randomly accessed, and the time required for reading is faster than that of the payout side ROM 93 when compared with the same data capacity. The payout side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data and the like for the execution of the control program stored in the payout side ROM 93.

The payout side CPU 92 can perform bidirectional communication with the main side CPU 63. By receiving the prize ball command from the main CPU 63, the payout side CPU 92 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. Further, the payout side CPU 92 monitors whether or not the game ball can be paid out normally, and if it is determined that the game ball cannot be paid out normally, the payout side RAM 94 is used. Even in the situation where the information on the number of unpaid prize balls is stored, the payout device 76 is stopped. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a payout restriction command indicating that the payout cannot be normally performed in this way to the main side CPU 63. When the main CPU 63 receives the payout restriction command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 execute a notification indicating that the game ball cannot be paid out normally. A notification command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 so as to be executed. As a state in which it is not possible to pay out the game ball normally, there are a state in which the lower plate 56a is full with the game ball, a state in which the tank 75 is not replenished with the game ball, and a payout device 76. There are an abnormal payout state in which the machine does not operate normally, a main body open state in which the game machine main body 12 is released from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is released from the inner frame 13. ..

A full tank detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball passage leading from the payout device 76 to the lower plate 56a, and the detection result of the full tank detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 identifies that the game ball is in a full tank state when the game ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor, and the state in which the game ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor is released. In the case, it is specified that the full tank state is released.

A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball passage leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76, and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 identifies that the game ball is in the ball-free state when the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball non-detection sensor, and when the state in which the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball non-detection sensor is released. It is specified that the ballless state has been released.

The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting a game ball paid out from the payout device 76, and the detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 identifies that one game ball is paid out from the payout device 76 when the game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. Further, the payout side CPU 92 identifies that the payout is in an abnormal state when the payout detection sensor does not continuously detect the game ball even though the payout device 76 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is paid out. , It is specified that the payout abnormal state is canceled when the state in which the game ball is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is canceled.

A front door opening sensor 95 is provided on the front surface of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13. In this case, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. When the payout side CPU 92 identifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95, and receives the opening detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95. It is specified that the front door frame 14 is in the open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a front door opening command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when the front door frame 14 is specified to be in the open state from the closed state, and the front door frame 14 is specified to be in the closed state from the open state. A front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63 at the same timing. The main CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the open state when the front door opening command is received, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when the front door closing command is received.

A main body opening sensor 96 is provided on the front surface of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the gaming machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body open sensor 96 transmits an open detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 identifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96, and receives the opening detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96. It is specified that the main body 12 is in the open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 sends a main body opening command to the main CPU 63 at the timing when it is specified that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and has specified that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the open state to the closed state. The main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63 at the timing. The main CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state when the main body opening command is received, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when the main body closing command is received.

The timer interrupt process executed by the payout side CPU 92 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly started in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

First, the full tank process is executed (step S401). In the full tank processing, as described above, it is specified whether or not the tank is full based on the detection result of the full tank detection sensor, and if the tank is full, the payout of the game ball is stopped. Is executed, and a command indicating that the tank is full is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the full tank state is canceled, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball is executed, and a command indicating that the full tank state is canceled is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

After that, the ball unnecessary process is executed (step S402). In the ball-free process, as described above, it is specified whether or not the ball is in a ball-free state based on the detection result of the ball-free detection sensor, and if the ball is in a ball-free state, a process for stopping the payout of the game ball is performed. At the same time as executing, a command indicating that the ball is not in a state is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the ballless state is released, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball is executed, and a command indicating that the ballless state is released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

After that, the payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S403). In the payout abnormality monitoring process, as described above, it is specified whether or not the payout abnormality state is present based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, and if the payout abnormality state is present, the process of stopping the payout of the game ball is executed. At the same time, a command indicating that the payout is abnormal is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the payout abnormal state is canceled, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball is executed, and a command indicating that the payout abnormal state is canceled is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

After that, the front door opening monitoring process is executed (step S404). In the front door opening monitoring process, as described above, whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state is specified based on the detection result of the front door open sensor 95, and if the front door frame 14 is in the open state, the front door frame 14 is in the open state. A process of stopping the payout of the game ball is executed, and a front door opening command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the front door frame 14 is closed, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball is executed, and a front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

After that, the main body opening monitoring process is executed (step S405). In the main body open monitoring process, as described above, whether or not the game machine main body 12 is in the open state is specified based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96, and if the game machine main body 12 is in the open state, the game ball. While executing the process of stopping the payout, the main body release command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, a process for enabling the payout of the gaming ball is executed, and a main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

After that, the command reading process is executed (step S406). In the command reading process, a process of reading the prize ball command transmitted by the main CPU 63 is executed. Then, the prize ball command is stored in the payout side RAM 94. Then, after executing the prize ball setting process for adding the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the unpaid prize ball number information in the payout side RAM 94 (step S407), the game ball is paid out by the payout device 76. The payout control process for controlling the execution of the above is executed (step S408). In the payout control process, when the unpaid prize ball number information stored in the payout side RAM 94 is a value of 1 or more, the payout device 76 is driven and controlled, and one game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. If so, the value of the prize ball number information is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the prize ball number information becomes "0", the drive control of the payout device 76 is stopped. After that, the external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing result of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time is executed (step S409).

Next, a configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal board 97. The external terminal board 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals, and some of the external terminals are electrically connected to the main CPU 63 and some of the external terminals. A plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 92. Since each of the main CPU 63 and the payout side CPU 92 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 97 in this way, as shown in FIG. 11, the main side CPU 63 and the payout side CPU 92 externally send information to the hall computer HC. It is possible to output.

One external terminal of the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the front door opening sensor 95, and one external terminal of the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the main body opening sensor 96. In detail about the configuration of this electrical connection, a signal relay board 98 is provided at an intermediate position of the signal path from the front door opening sensor 95 to the payout side CPU 92. The signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL2 branched from the signal path SL1 from the front door opening sensor 95 toward the payout side CPU 92. The branch path SL2 is connected to an external terminal for opening the front door in the external terminal board 97. Therefore, the electric signal corresponding to the detection result in the front door opening sensor 95 is input not only to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the front door in the external terminal board 97. This makes it possible to externally output a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state to the hall computer HC without the control of the payout side CPU 92.

Regarding the main body open sensor 96 in detail, the signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL4 branched from the signal path SL3 from the main body open sensor 96 toward the payout side CPU 92. The branch path SL4 is connected to an external terminal for opening the main body of the external terminal board 97. Therefore, the electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input not only to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the main body of the external terminal board 97. This makes it possible to externally output a signal indicating whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state to the hall computer HC without the control of the payout side CPU 92.

Next, the contents of the information output externally from the main CPU 63 and the payout side CPU 92 to the hall computer HC will be described. First, the contents of the information output externally from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC will be described.

The main CPU 63 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 on the external terminal board 97 in the external information setting process (step S218) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8). As the information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97, the information indicating that the open / close execution mode is in progress, the information indicating that the support mode is in the high frequency support mode, and one game round are completed. Information indicating that, and a predetermined number (for example, 100) of game balls are sent from the game area PA through any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Information indicating that the ball has been discharged, information indicating that the game ball has entered the first operating port 33, and information indicating that the game ball has entered the second operating port 34 are included. ..

The payout side CPU 92 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the payout side CPU 92 on the external terminal board 97 in the external information setting process (step S409) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). The information output from the payout side CPU 92 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that 10 game balls have been paid out.

In the hall computer HC, it is possible to grasp the execution mode of paying out the game ball in the pachinko machine 10 according to various information received from the pachinko machine 10 through the external terminal board 97. for example,
-The payout rate, which is the ratio of the number of game balls to be paid out until 100 game balls are ejected from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10. Ball rate (hereinafter, this ball output rate is referred to as "B")
・ Ball ejection rate in the open / close execution mode ・ Ball ejection rate in the high frequency support mode ・ Number of game times executed until 100 game balls are ejected from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as this ratio). "S")
B-S x "Number of prize balls for winning prizes in the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34"
-The number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 generated until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S1").
-The number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 generated until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S2").
B- (S1 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + S2 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34")
Etc. are calculated. This makes it possible to manage the entry mode of the game ball in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall computer HC. The number of prize balls is the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the corresponding entry portion.

<Structure for managing the winning mode of the game ball>
Next, a configuration for managing the winning mode of the game ball by using the management IC 66 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

As described above, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 includes a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66. In addition to these, the MPU 62 also includes an I / F 101 and a reading terminal 102.

The I / F 101 is an interface for transmitting and receiving signals to and from an external device of the MPU 62. The I / F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via the internal bus 103. The detection results from the sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a and the commands from the payout side CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62 through the input port of the I / F 101, and based on the input detection results and the contents of the commands. As described above, various processes are executed by the main CPU 63. Further, when a signal is output to a device such as a drive unit 32b for special electric power as a result of executing various processes on the main CPU 63, the signal output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101 and the main side. When a command is output to the payout side CPU 92 and the voice emission control device 81 as a result of executing various processes in the CPU 63, the command output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101.

The reading terminal 102 is a terminal for electrically connecting a reading device, which is an external device of the pachinko machine 10, to the MPU 62, and is provided so that the connection terminal portion is exposed on the surface of the MPU 62. .. However, as described above, the main control board 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted is housed in the board box 60a, and the reading terminal 102 faces the wall portion of the board box 60a so as not to be exposed to the outside of the main control device 60. ing. Therefore, in order to electrically connect the reading device to the reading terminal 102, it is necessary to open the board box 60a to expose the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent the reading device from being illegally electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. The substrate box 60a is not limited to this, and the substrate box 60a is formed with an opening for exposing the reading terminal 102 to the outside of the main control device 60, so that the substrate box 60a can be read without being damaged. The configuration may be such that the reading device can be electrically connected to the terminal 102.

The management IC 66 includes a management side I / F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, a management side RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence-related memory 116, and a history memory 117. Each of these devices is connected so as to be capable of bidirectional communication through an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66.

The management side I / F 111 receives various signals from the main CPU 63 via the signal path group 118 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62, and also receives the signal path group 119 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62. It is an interface for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 102 via the reading terminal 102. Various signals from the main CPU 63 are input to the input port of the management side I / F 111, and various signals to the reading terminal 102 are output from the output port of the management side I / F 111. The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 via the signal path group 120 for bidirectional communication built in the MPU 62.

The management side CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. The management side ROM 113 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory, and is used only for reading. The management side ROM 113 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the management side CPU 112. The management-side RAM 114 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The management side RAM 114 can be randomly accessed, and the time required for reading is faster than that of the management side ROM 113 when compared with the same data capacity. The management side RAM 114 temporarily stores various data and the like for the execution of the control program stored in the management side ROM 113.

The RTC 115 is a real-time clock, and has a configuration capable of constantly measuring date information and time information, and outputting the measured date information and time information according to an instruction from the management side CPU 112. The RTC 115 is provided with a backup power supply, and it is possible to measure the date information and the time information even while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

The correspondence memory 116 is a memory (that is, volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The correspondence memory 116 stores information on the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122p provided in the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p. Used for. The details of the contents of the correspondence memory 116 will be described later.

The history memory 117 is a memory (that is, non-volatile storage means) such as a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage retention, and is used for both reading and writing. The history memory 117 is used to store information regarding the entry of a game ball received from the main CPU 63 through the management side I / F 111. The details of the contents of the history memory 117 will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided on the management side I / F 111 will be described. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111.

The input port 121 is provided with a plurality of buffers 122a to 122p. Specifically, the 1st to 16th buffers 122a to 122p are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to 16th buffers 122a to 122p through the signal paths 118a to 118p, and each of the first to 16th buffers 122a to 122p is an input target signal. When is at the LOW level, the information of "0" is stored as the first data, and when the signal to be input is at the HI level, the information of "1" is stored as the second data. The relationship between these LOW and HI and the first data and the second data may be reversed.

A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level first signal when a new game ball is not detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and one game is played by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a. When a sphere is detected, a first signal of HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the first signal of the HI level is input to the first buffer 122a.

A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level second signal when a new game ball is not detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and one game is played by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. When a sphere is detected, a second signal of HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level second signal is input to the second buffer 122b.

A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level third signal when a new game ball is not detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and one game is played by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. When a sphere is detected, a third signal of HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level third signal is input to the third buffer 122c.

A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fourth signal when a new game ball is not detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a, and when one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. The HI level fourth signal is output over a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level fourth signal is input to the fourth buffer 122d.

A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first actuating port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fifth signal when a new game ball is not detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a, and one game is played by the first operating port detection sensor 46a. When a sphere is detected, a fifth signal of HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level fifth signal is input to the fifth buffer 122e.

A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second actuating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level sixth signal when a new game ball is not detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a, and one game is played by the second operating port detection sensor 47a. When a sphere is detected, a HI level sixth signal is output over a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level sixth signal is input to the sixth buffer 122f.

A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level 7th signal when a new game ball is not detected by the out port detection sensor 48a, and one game ball is detected by the out port detection sensor 48a. In this case, the HI level 7th signal is output over a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level 7th signal is input to the 7th buffer 122g.

An eighth signal corresponding to whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress is input to the eighth buffer 122h. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level 8th signal when it is not in the open / close execution mode, and continuously outputs the HI level 8th signal when it is in the open / close execution mode.

A ninth signal corresponding to whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress is input to the ninth buffer 122i. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level 9th signal when it is not in the high frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the HI level 9th signal when it is in the high frequency support mode.

A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is input to the tenth buffer 122j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level 10th signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and continues the HI level 10th signal when the front door frame 14 is open. And output.

In the 16th buffer 122p, an output instruction signal for causing the management side CPU 112 to recognize the opportunity to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102 is input. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level output instruction signal when it is not necessary to output history information, and outputs an HI level output instruction signal over a specific period when it is necessary to output history information. do. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p.

Although the 11th buffer 122k, the 12th buffer 122l, the 13th buffer 122m, the 14th buffer 122n, and the 15th buffer 122o can input the signal from the main CPU 63, the normal signal is not input in the pachinko machine 10. It is blank. As described above, as the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a larger number of buffers 122a to 122p than the types of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. The management IC 66 can be diverted to a model different from the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66. Incidentally, signal paths 118a to 118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and each of the 1st to 16th buffers 122a to 122p so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the 1st to 16th buffers 122a to 122p. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the signal paths 118k to 118o may not be formed between the buffers 122k to 122o to be blanked.

It is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p in the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111, and the management side CPU 112 is not instructed by the main side CPU 63. Can specify that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p. On the other hand, what kind of signal is input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the type of these signals receives an instruction from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management side CPU 112. The specification of these signal types in the management side CPU 112 will be described in detail later, but when control is started in the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 with the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62, the main side CPU 63 transfers to the management side CPU 112. This is done by sending a type identification command. In this case, information on the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the corresponding memory 116, and when the management side CPU 112 specifies the types of various signals in a situation where operating power is supplied. The information stored in the correspondence memory 116 is referred to.

FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence memory 116. The correspondence-related memory 116 has the first to fifteenth correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o having a one-to-one correspondence with the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111. It is provided.

In the first correspondence area 123a, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is stored is stored as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the first buffer 122a. Further, in the first correspondence area 123a, along with the information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is used, the information on the number of gaming balls (10) to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 is also provided. Will be stored. In the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is stored is stored as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the second buffer 122b. Further, in the second correspondence area 123b, along with the information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is used, the information on the number of gaming balls (10) to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 is also provided. Will be stored. In the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is stored is stored as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the third buffer 122c. Further, in the third correspondence area 123c, along with the information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is used, the information on the number of gaming balls (10) to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 is also provided. Will be stored.

In the fourth correspondence area 123d, information indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is stored is stored as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the fourth buffer 122d. Further, in the fourth correspondence area 123d, along with the information indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is used, the information on the number of gaming balls (15) to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the special electric winning device 32 is also provided. Will be stored. In the fifth correspondence area 123e, information indicating that the first operating port 33 is stored is stored as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the fifth buffer 122e. Further, in the fifth correspondence area 123e, information indicating that the first operating port 33 is provided and information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the first operating port 33 (one). ) Is also stored. In the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating that the second operating port 34 is stored is stored as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the sixth buffer 122f. Further, in the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating that the second operating port 34 is provided and information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the second operating port 34 (one). ) Is also stored. In the seventh correspondence area 123g, information indicating that the out port 24a is stored is stored as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the seventh buffer 122g.

In the eighth correspondence area 123h, information indicating that the open / close execution mode is set is stored as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h. In the ninth correspondence area 123i, information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set is stored as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i. In the tenth correspondence area 123j, information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored is stored as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j.

In the eleventh correspondence area 123k, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k by the management side CPU 112, information indicating that the blank does not correspond to any of them is stored. In the twelfth correspondence area 123l, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l by the management side CPU 112, information indicating that the blank does not correspond to any of them is stored. In the thirteenth correspondence area 123m, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m by the management side CPU 112, information indicating that the blank does not correspond to any of them is stored. The 14th correspondence area 123n stores information indicating that the blank does not correspond to any of the information for specifying the type of the signal input to the 14th buffer 122n by the management side CPU 112. The fifteenth correspondence area 123o stores information indicating that the blank does not correspond to any of the information for specifying the type of the signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o by the management side CPU 112.

As described above, what kind of signal is input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o can be specified by the management side CPU 112 by receiving an instruction from the main side CPU 63. , The management IC 66 can be diverted to a model different from the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

Further, each time the signals corresponding to the storage of the history information are output to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, the information for recognizing the signal type is not output, but the signal type is recognized in advance. Information for specifying the type of signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o based on the output information is stored in the correspondence memory 116 by the management side CPU 112. It is a configuration. As a result, as compared with the configuration in which the information for recognizing the type of the signal is output to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o each time the signal corresponding to the storage of the history information is output, the signal is mainly output each time. It is possible to suppress the amount of information output from the side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112.

Further, the management side CPU 112 outputs information for specifying the type of the signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o at the start of supply of the operating power. Thereby, in the situation where the game is started by the pachinko machine 10, the type of the signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o can be specified by the management side CPU 112.

Further, the information setting that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p is performed at the design stage of the management IC 66. As a result, the type of signal input to the 16th buffer 122p is specified for the output instruction signal that is surely used not only in this pachinko machine 10 but also in other models of pachinko machines that use the management IC 66. It is possible to omit the processing for this. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the processing load of the processing for specifying the type of the signal.

Next, the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 will be described. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117.

The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, a plurality of pointer information is set in sequence, and a history information storage area 125 is set in which each pointer information is associated with each other on a one-to-one basis. The history information storage area 125 can store a combination of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, and a data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and as an area for storing correspondence information. One byte of data capacity is allocated. When it becomes necessary to store correspondence information according to the signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o (actually, the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j of the pachinko machine 10). First, the date information and the time information measured in the current RTC 115 are stored in the area for storing the RTC information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information currently being written. After that, the correspondence information corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o that triggered the information storage this time is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o in the correspondence memory 116, and the read correspondence information is read. Is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information currently to be written.

Specifically, regarding the correspondence information stored in the history information storage area 125, signals corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g as described above. Therefore, information corresponding to the types of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence memory 116. More specifically, information corresponding to the type of the ball entry unit corresponding to each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. As described above in the pachinko machine 10, all of the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42a to 44a detect the game ball that has entered the general winning opening 31, and therefore these first to third winning openings. Information indicating that each of the first to third correspondence areas 123a to 123c corresponding to the detection sensors 42a to 44a is a general winning opening 31 is stored. Further, the fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is used, and the fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating that the first operating port 33 is used. , The sixth correspondence area 123f stores information indicating that it is the second operating port 34, and the seventh correspondence area 123g stores information indicating that it is the out port 24a. When the buffers 122a to 122o that triggered the information storage this time are any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, the information on the type of the ball entry portion corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122g is the first to first. It is read from any of the seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, and the read information on the type of the ball entry portion is stored as it is in the area for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

On the other hand, the eighth buffer 122h is input with a signal indicating whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode, the ninth buffer 122i is input with a signal indicating whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode, and the tenth buffer 122j is input with a signal indicating whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. A signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is input. Therefore, the 8th correspondence area 123h stores information indicating that the open / close execution mode is set, the 9th correspondence area 123i stores information indicating that the high frequency support mode is used, and the 10th correspondence area 123i stores information indicating that the mode is high frequency support mode. Information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored is stored in 123j.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level 8th signal when it is not in the open / close execution mode, and continuously outputs the HI level 8th signal when it is in the open / close execution mode. The side CPU 112 specifies that the open / close execution mode has started when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and specifies that the open / close execution mode has ended when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. Is possible. Then, in both the case where the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and the case where the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the management side CPU 112 generates an opportunity to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identify that you did. That is, when the 8th signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the history information storage area 125 includes not only the information indicating that the open / closed execution mode is read from the 8th correspondence area 123h but also the start information. Store in the area for storing the correspondence information of. Further, when the 8th signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the history information storage area 125 includes not only the information indicating that the open / close execution mode is read from the 8th correspondence area 123h but also the end information. Store in the area for storing the correspondence information of.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level 9th signal when it is not in the high frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the HI level 9th signal when it is in the high frequency support mode. , The management side CPU 112 identifies that the high frequency support mode is started when the 9th signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and ends the high frequency support mode when the 9th signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It is possible to identify that it has been done. Then, in both the case where the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and the case where the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the management side CPU 112 generates an opportunity to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identify that you did. That is, when the 9th signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the history information storage area includes not only the information indicating that the high frequency support mode is read from the 9th correspondence area 123i but also the start information. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of 125. Further, when the 9th signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the history information storage area includes not only the information indicating that the high frequency support mode is read from the 9th correspondence area 123i but also the end information. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of 125.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level 10th signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and outputs the HI level 10th signal when the front door frame 14 is open. In order to continuously output, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the front door frame 14 is opened when the 10th signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and when the 10th signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. Can identify that the front door frame 14 is closed. Then, in both the case where the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and the case where the HI level changes to the LOW level, the management side CPU 112 generates an opportunity to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identify that you did. That is, when the 10th signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the history information is stored together with not only the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is read from the 10th correspondence area 123j but also the opening start information. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the area 125. Further, when the 10th signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is read from the 10th correspondence area 123j but also the opening end information is stored together with the history information. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the area 125.

The history information storage area 125 can store all the history information generated during the 10 consecutive business days in which the launch of the game ball in the pachinko machine 10 is continued from the opening to the closing of the store. It is provided for a few minutes. For example, if history information is generated 60,000 times a day, more than 600,000 history information storage areas 125 are provided. Thereby, all the history information can be stored and held in the history memory 117 for at least 10 days.

The history memory 117 is provided with a pointer area 126 in addition to the history area 124. In the pointer area 126, information for specifying the pointer information currently to be written in the history memory 117 by the management side CPU 112 is stored. Specifically, at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, information for designating the pointer information of "0" as a writing target is set in the pointer area 126. Then, every time one history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1. When the pointer information in the last order is the writing target and the history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information in the last order, the pointer information of "0" is the writing target. The information in the area 126 is updated. As a result, when the number of history information that can be stored is exceeded and an opportunity to store the history information occurs, the new history information is overwritten in order from the history information storage area 125 in which the old history information is stored. Become.

Further, when the history information is read from the history memory 117 by the reading device, all the history information storage areas 125 are cleared to "0", and the pointer information of "0" is to be written. The information in the pointer area 126 is updated. This makes it possible to prevent the history information that was once read as the read target from being read again.

Next, a specific processing configuration for managing the winning mode of the game ball by using the management IC 66 will be described. First, a processing configuration for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 and the signal type in the correspondence memory 116 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a recognition process executed by the main CPU 63. The recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 7).

First, "15" is set in the recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S501). The recognition output counter determines the remaining number of times of information output required for the management CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal each buffer 122a to 122p of the input port 121 on the management side I / F 111 corresponds to. It is a counter for specifying by the main CPU 63. As described above, 15 of the 1st to 15th buffers 122a to 122o are the recognition targets of the signal type, so "15" is set in the recognition output counter.

After that, the output process of the identification start command is executed (step S502). The main CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize which type of signal the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o correspond to. In outputting this command, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used. That is, the first to fifteenth buffers 122a are used by using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) used to instruct the management side CPU 112 to store the history information. A command output is performed to make the management CPU 112 recognize which type of signal the ~ 122o corresponds to. As a result, the number of signal paths can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the signal paths for outputting the command are provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p for outputting signals to the first to 16th buffers 122a to 122p. It becomes possible to simplify the configuration. The identification start command has an 8-bit data capacity, and the data of each bit is input to the 1st to 8th buffers 122a to 122h as the 1st to 8th signals, respectively. Further, in the output processing of the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification start command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. Further, the output period of the identification start command and the period for maintaining the output state of the 9th signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification start command and the 9th signal. Has been done. Upon receiving the identification start command, the management CPU 112 should start the process for storing the information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the signal type in the correspondence memory 116. Identify.

After that, the type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S503). In this case, the first buffer 122a corresponds to the first buffer 122a to 122o so that the first buffer 122a is the signal type setting target first, and then the n + 1 buffer is the signal type setting target next to the nth buffer. The recognition setting of the signal type to be performed is performed. Therefore, if the recognition output counter is "15" to "13", the general winning opening 31 and the type identification command indicating the number of prize balls are read, and if the recognition output counter is "12", the special electric prize is won. Read the type identification command indicating that it is the device 32 and the number of prize balls, and if the recognition output counter is "11", read the type identification command indicating that it is the first operating port 33 and the number of prize balls. If the recognition output counter is "10", it means that it is the second operating port 34, and if the recognition output counter is "9", it means that it is the out port 24a. Read the type identification command shown, read the type identification command indicating that it is in the open / close execution mode if the recognition output counter is "8", and read the high frequency support mode if the recognition output counter is "7". If the recognition output counter is "6", the type identification command indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is read, and if the recognition output counter is "5" to "1", it is blank. Read the type identification command indicating that.

After that, the output process of the read type identification command is executed (step S504). The type identification command has an 8-bit data capacity like the identification start command, and the data of each bit is input to the 1st to 8th buffers 122a to 122h as the 1st to 8th signals, respectively. Further, in the output processing of the identification type command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification type command is started in order to make the management side CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. Further, the output period of the identification type command and the period for maintaining the output state of the 9th signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification type command and the 9th signal. Has been done. By receiving the identification type command, the management CPU 112 corresponds to the identification type command in the corresponding relational areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffers to be set this time among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o. Store information to be used.

After that, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S505), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S506). When the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S506: NO), the process for outputting the type identification command corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after 1 subtraction is executed (step S503 and). Step S504).

On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S506: YES), the output process of the identification end command is executed (step S507). The identification end command has an 8-bit data capacity, and the data of each bit is input to the 1st to 8th buffers 122a to 122h as the 1st to 8th signals, respectively. Further, in the output processing of the identification end command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification end command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. Further, the output period of the identification end command and the period for maintaining the output state of the 9th signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification end command and the 9th signal. Has been done. By receiving the identification end command, the management CPU 112 specifies that the process for storing the information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the signal type in the correspondence memory 116 is completed. do.

Next, the management process executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of the operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started. The processing speed of the management side CPU 112 is faster than the processing speed of the main side CPU 63, and the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8) is performed after one timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8) is started in the main side CPU 63. Is started, the combination of the processes after step S606 in the management process is executed 16 times or more.

When the identification start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S601: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S602). The setting target counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify the types of the buffers 122a to 122o for which the signal type is set. The first buffer 122a is the signal type setting target first, and then the n + 1th buffer is the signal type setting target after the nth buffer.

After that, on condition that the type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S604). In the correspondence setting process, the type identification received this time is performed in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value in the setting target counter of the management side RAM 114 among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116. Stores information on the signal type set in the command. After that, the value of the setting target counter of the management side RAM 114 is added by 1 (step S605).

When a negative determination is made in step S603, or when the process of step S605 is executed, it is determined whether or not an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S606). If the identification end command has not been received (step S606: NO), the process returns to step S603, and on condition that a new type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES), steps S604 and S605 are performed. Execute the process again.

When the identification end command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), the processes of step S607 and step S608 are repeatedly executed. Although the details will be described later in step S607, a history setting process for storing the history information corresponding to the type of the signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117 is executed. Although the details will be described later in step S608, an external output process for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102 is executed.

FIG. 19 is a time chart showing how the correspondence relationship information between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122o is stored in the correspondence relationship memory 116. FIG. 19A shows a period in which a command is output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h), and is shown in FIG. 19 (a). b) shows the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is at the HI level, and FIG. 19 (c) shows the types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and these buffers 122a to 122o. The execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence relationship is executed is shown, and FIG. 19D shows the timing at which the correspondence relationship setting process (step S604) is executed by the management side CPU 112.

When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, the output of the identification start command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 19 (a). To. Further, at the timing of t1, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 19B. After that, at the timing of t2 in which the output of the identification start command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 19 (b). The management side CPU 112 identifies that the command is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h By confirming the information in, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 can be grasped. In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management side CPU 112 enters the identification state by making an affirmative determination in step S601 of the management process (FIG. 18). After that, at the timing of t3, the output of the identification start command is stopped as shown in FIG. 19A.

Then, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 19A, the output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started. Further, at the timing of t4, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 19B. After that, at the timing of t5, which is the situation where the output of the type identification command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 19B. The management side CPU 112 identifies that the command has been transmitted from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. By checking the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 can be grasped. In this case, since the first type identification command is received, the management side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 19 (d) at the timing of t5. In the correspondence relationship setting process, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is used and information on the number of prize balls are stored in the first correspondence relationship area 123a of the correspondence relationship memory 116. After that, at the timing of t6, the output of the type identification command is stopped as shown in FIG. 19A.

After that, in each of the timing of t7 to the timing of t9, the timing of t10 to the timing of t12, the timing of t13 to the timing of t15, and the timing of t16 to the timing of t18, the main timing is the same as the timing of t4 to t6. The management side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process corresponding to the type identification command output from the side CPU 63. In this case, the correspondence setting process corresponding to the fifteenth type identification command is completed from the timing of t16 to the timing of t18.

After that, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 19A, the output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started. Further, at the timing of t19, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 19B. After that, at the timing of t20, which is the situation where the output of the identification end command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 19B. The management side CPU 112 identifies that the command has been transmitted from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. By checking the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 can be grasped. In this case, since the identification end command is received, the identification state of the management side CPU 112 ends at the timing of t20 as shown in FIG. 19 (c). After that, at the timing of t21, the output of the identification end command is stopped as shown in FIG. 19A.

In order to instruct the management side CPU 112 to store the history information by making the management side CPU 112 recognize whether or not the command is being output using the ninth signal as described above. It is clear to the management side CPU 112 that the command is output even in the configuration where the command is output using the used first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths). It becomes possible to recognize.

Next, a processing configuration for storing the history information in the history memory 117 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a management output process executed by the main CPU 63. The management output process is executed in step S219 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

First, "10" is set in the managed counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S701). The management target counter specifies whether or not there is a management target that is not a specific target for specifying whether or not the signal output state to the management side CPU 112 should be changed in the current management output process. At the same time, it is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the signal output state to the management side CPU 112 should be changed for any management target. The management targets for which the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the signal output state to the management side CPU 112 should be changed in one management output process are the seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. There are a total of 10 cases of whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is executed, whether or not the high-frequency support mode is executed, and whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened / closed. Therefore, first, "10" is set in the managed counter.

After that, it is determined whether or not the output state of the signal to the management side CPU 112 for the management target corresponding to the value of the current management target counter is at the HI level (step S702). When it is not the HI level (step S702: NO), by determining whether or not the value of the managed target counter is 4 or more, the managed target corresponding to the value of the managed target counter is 7 ball entry detection sensors 42a. It is specified whether it is any of ~ 48a (step S703).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S703, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the managed counter (step S704). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is "10" and corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first output flag. When the value of the managed counter is "9" and corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second output flag, and the value of the managed counter is determined. Is "8" and corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the third output flag, and the value of the managed counter is "7". Yes When the special electric detection sensor 45a is supported, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the fourth output flag, the value of the managed counter is "6", and the first operating port detection sensor 46a. If it corresponds to, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the fifth output flag, the value of the management target counter is "5", and it corresponds to the second actuating port detection sensor 47a. In that case, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the 6th output flag, and if the value of the managed counter is "4" and corresponds to the out port 24a, "1" is set in the 7th output flag. It is determined whether or not "1" is set. As described above, the first to seventh output flags are set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 10).

When "1" is set in the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter (step S704: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the first to seventh signals is set to the HI level. (Step S705). After that, the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is cleared to "0" (step S706).

When a negative determination is made in step S703, it is determined whether or not an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the HI level (step S707). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is "3", it is determined whether or not the transition to the open / close execution mode has occurred, and when the value of the managed counter is "2", it is high. It is determined whether or not the transition to the frequency support mode has occurred, and when the value of the management target counter is "1", it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S707, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to the HI level (step S708).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S702, it is determined whether or not an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level (step S709). Specifically, when the value of the management target counter is 4 or more and the current management target is any of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, the value of the management target counter among the first to seventh signals is used. It is determined whether or not the HI output duration period (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed since the output state of the corresponding signal was switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI output continuation period is set in the management side CPU 112 to be longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S607) of the management process (FIG. 18), and the output of the signal switched from the LOW level to the HI level is set. It is a period during which the state can be reliably specified by the management side CPU 112. Further, when the value of the managed target counter is "3" and the current managed target is the open / close execution mode, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode has ended, and the value of the managed target counter is "2". When the current management target is the high frequency support mode, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode has ended, the value of the management target counter is "1", and the current management target is the front door frame 14. In that case, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. When an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S709: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to the LOW level (step S709: YES). Step S710).

When a negative determination is made in step S704, when the process of step S706 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S707, when the process of step S708 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S709, or in step. When the process of S710 is executed, the value of the managed counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S711). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the managed target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S712). When the value of the managed target counter is 1 or more (step S712: NO), the processes after step S702 are executed for the managed target corresponding to the value of the new managed target counter.

Next, the history setting process executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (FIG. 18).

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 (step S801). Specifically, the number of correspondence-related areas in the correspondence-related memory 116 in which information other than the information indicating that the correspondence-related areas 123a to 123o are blank is stored is specified and specified. Set the information of the specified number in the confirmation target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, information other than the information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is blank is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j as described above. Therefore, in step S801, "10" is set in the confirmation target counter. do.

After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S802). When the value of the confirmation target counter is "n", the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the confirmation targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "10", the tenth buffer 122j is the confirmation target of the numerical information, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is the confirmation target of the numerical information. ..

If an affirmative determination is made in step S802, the RTC information which is the date information and the time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S803). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S804). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 currently being written is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the pointer information to be written is specified. The RTC information read in step S803 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, the correspondence relation information is read from the correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter, and the correspondence relation information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, when the correspondence information is any one of the information indicating that the open / close execution mode is set, the information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set, and the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is used, the above Not only the correspondence information but also the start information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. When the value of the confirmation target counter is "n", the nth correspondence area 123a to 123o is the target for reading the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "10", the tenth correspondence area 123j is the target for reading the correspondence information, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the correspondence relation. Information is to be read out.

When the writing process is executed as described above, the value of the confirmation target counter is any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. In the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, the RTC information, the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 The combination of the correspondence information indicating that the information is one of the above and the correspondence information is stored as history information. Further, when the value of the confirmation target counter is any of the open / close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, the RTC information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. The combination of the correspondence information indicating that the mode is one of the open / close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14 and the start information is stored as history information.

After that, the target pointer update process is executed (step S805). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and added by 1. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after 1 addition is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as pointer information to be newly written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

When a negative determination is made in step S802, or when the process of step S805 is executed, whether or not the signal output has been switched to the LOW level is determined in the corresponding related areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the values of the current confirmation target counters. It is determined whether or not the correspondence information to be confirmed is stored (step S806). Specifically, when the value of the current confirmation target counter is "8" to "10", the corresponding related areas 123h to 123j are provided with information indicating that the open / close execution mode is used, and the high frequency support mode is used. Since either the information indicating that the door frame is present or the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S806.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S806, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is changed from "1" to "0". By confirming whether or not the buffer has been output, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the HI level to the LOW level (step S807). If an affirmative determination is made in step S807, the RTC information is read (step S808) and a write process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S809) in the same manner as in step S803. In the writing process, the RTC information read in step S808 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, the correspondence relation information is read from the correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter, and the correspondence relation information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, not only the correspondence information but also the end information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. By executing the writing process in this way, when the value of the confirmation target counter is any of the open / close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, the pointer information to be written is supported. In the history information storage area 125 to be stored, a combination of RTC information, correspondence information indicating that the mode is one of the open / close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, and the end information is stored as history information. It will be in the state of being done. After that, the target pointer update process is executed in the same manner as in step S805 (step S810).

When a negative determination is made in step S806, a negative determination is made in step S807, or the process of step S810 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S811). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S812). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S812: NO), the processing after step S802 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the value of the new confirmation target counter.

Next, the state in which the history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 22A shows a period during which the HI level signal is input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, and FIG. 22B shows the HI level signal being input to the eighth buffer 122h. 22 (c) shows the period during which the HI level signal is input to the 9th buffer 122i, and FIG. 22 (d) shows the period during which the HI level signal is input to the 10th buffer 122j. The period is shown, and FIG. 22 (e) shows the timing of writing the history information to the history memory 117.

At the timing of t1, the output state of the signal input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g is switched from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 22A. Therefore, the history information is written in the history memory 117 at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 22 (e). After that, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 22A, the signal switched to the HI level at the timing of t1 is switched to the LOW level. However, since the signal is a signal input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the switching of the LOW level is not the storage target of the history information, FIG. 22 (at the timing of t2) As shown in e), the history information is not written.

After that, at the timing of t3, the timing of t5, the timing of t6, the timing of t9, the timing of t10, the timing of t13, and the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 22A, the first to seventh buffers 122a The output state of the signal input to any of ~ 122 g is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Therefore, history information is written at each of these timings as shown in FIG. 22 (e).

As shown in FIG. 22B, the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h becomes the HI level from the timing of t4 to the timing of t7. The eighth buffer 122h corresponds to the presence / absence of the open / close execution mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22 (e), the timing of t4, which is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is switched to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal is switched to the LOW level. History information is written at each of the timings of t7. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t4 includes the start information, and the history information written at the timing of t7 includes the end information. This makes it possible to grasp the execution period of the open / close execution mode by checking the history information of the history memory 117.

Further, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, is the history information indicating that the ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 in the open / close execution mode? It is possible to distinguish whether or not. Further, since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 can be compared by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the ball is in the open / close execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 22 (c), the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i becomes the HI level from the timing of t8 to the timing of t11. The ninth buffer 122i corresponds to the presence or absence of the high frequency support mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22 (e), the timing of t8, which is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is switched to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal is switched to the LOW level. History information is written at each of the timings of t11. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t8 includes the start information, and the history information written at the timing of t11 includes the end information. This makes it possible to grasp the execution period of the high-frequency support mode by checking the history information of the history memory 117.

Further, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, the history information indicating that the ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is in the high frequency support mode. It is possible to distinguish whether or not. Further, since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 can be compared by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the ball is in the high frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 22D, the output state of the signal input to the 10th buffer 122j becomes the HI level from the timing of t12 to the timing of t15. The tenth buffer 122j corresponds to whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22 (e), the timing of t12, which is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the 10th buffer 122j is switched to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal is switched to the LOW level. History information is written at each of the timings of t15. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t12 includes the start information, and the history information written at the timing of t15 includes the end information. This makes it possible to grasp the period during which the front door frame 14 is in the open state by checking the history information of the history memory 117.

Further, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, the history information indicating that the ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is being opened. It is possible to distinguish whether it is a thing or not. Further, since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 can be compared by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the door is open.

Next, a processing configuration for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 of the MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a data output process executed by the main CPU 63. The data output process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 7).

In the data output process, first, it is determined whether or not a connection signal indicating that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 is received from the reading terminal 102 (step S901). The reading device is configured to output a connection signal when it is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and when the connection signal is received through the reading terminal 102, an affirmative determination is made in step S901. do.

If a negative determination is made in step S901, the data output process is terminated as it is. In this case, in order to execute the data output process, it is necessary to restart the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62. As a result, in order for the history information to be output externally, it is necessary to start supplying the operating power to the MPU 62 with the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. .. Since the power supply operation unit for stopping and starting the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is provided on the back surface of the back pack unit 15, in order to perform these stop operations and start operations, the outer frame 11 is used. It is necessary to open the gaming machine main body 12 to expose the back surface of the back pack unit 15. Under such circumstances, in order to enable external output of history information, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the MPU 62 with the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. With a certain configuration, even if a person other than the manager of the game hall tries to perform the operation of reading the history information, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform the operation.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S901, it is determined whether or not a control information confirmation signal is received from the reading terminal 102, so that the current connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is the main ROM 64. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to the confirmation of the control information (program and data) of (step S902). The reading device is configured to be able to check both control information and history information, and when confirmation of control information is selected by manual operation on the reading device, the reading device is used to check the control information. A signal is transmitted, and if confirmation of history information is selected by manual operation on the reading device, a signal for checking history is transmitted from the reading device. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the reading device for checking the control information and the reading device for checking the history may be separately configured. In this case, if a reading device for checking control information is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, a signal for checking control information is transmitted from the reading device, and a reading for checking history is sent to the reading terminal 102. When the device is electrically connected, a history confirmation signal is transmitted from the reading device.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, an output process for confirming control information is executed (step S903). In the output process, the program and data are read as control information from the main ROM 64, and the read control information is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the control information can be read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and it is confirmed whether the control information is legitimate or normal. Can be done.

If a negative determination is made in step S902, an output instruction signal is transmitted to the management side CPU 112 (step S904). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI level output state is continued for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p. When the output state of the output instruction signal is switched to the HI level, the management side CPU 112 executes a process for outputting history information. The process will be described in detail later.

When the process of step S903 is executed or the process of step S904 is executed, it is determined whether or not the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is continued (step S905). If it is continued (step S905: YES), it waits in step S905 as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing set in the execution order after the data output processing from being executed until the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released. When the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is disconnected (step S905: NO), the data output process is terminated.

Next, the external output process executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24. The external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 18).

When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1001: YES), a process for outputting the history information after step S1002 is executed. Specifically, first, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the number of the history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that the out port 24a is stored is counted, so that the out port 24a can be reached. The number of balls entered is calculated (step S1002). Further, by counting the number of the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the ball is entered into the general winning opening 31. The number is calculated (step S1003). Further, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the ball is entered into the special electric winning device 32. The number is calculated (step S1004). Further, by counting the number of the history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that the operation port 33 is the first operation port 33 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the first operation port 33 can be reached. The number of balls entered is calculated (step S1005). Further, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that the second operation port 34 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the second operation port 34 can be reached. The number of balls entered is calculated (step S1006).

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored and the start information are stored, and the correspondence relationship indicating that the front door frame 14 is used. By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the out door generated in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state. The number of balls entered into each of the 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated (step S1007). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored, the correspondence information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored, and the correspondence information indicating that the front door frame 14 is used. The period between the end information and the history information storage area 125 is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. Further, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored and the correspondence relationship indicating that the front door frame 14 is used. If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which information and end information are stored, the total number of balls entered in each section is calculated. Further, although the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored exists, the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is present. If the history information storage area 125 in which is stored does not store the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored, the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored are stored. All the history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as if the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1002 to S1007 (step S1008). Specifically, first, the number of balls entered while the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1007 is open is subtracted from the number of balls entered in each of steps S1002 to S1006. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of balls entered after the subtraction. The difference in the number of balls entered in the out port 24a calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of balls entered in step S1002 is defined as the number of balls entered K1 and calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of balls entered calculated in step S1003. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning opening 31 is defined as the number of balls entered K2, and the difference in the number of balls entered in the special electric winning device 32 calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of balls entered in step S1004 is defined as the number of balls K3. The difference in the number of balls entered in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of balls entered in step S1005 was defined as the number of balls entered K4, and was calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of balls entered calculated in step S1006. The difference in the number of balls entered in the second operating port 34 is defined as the number of balls entered K5.
1st parameter: Total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 31" + K3 x "number of winning balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "first operating opening""Number of prize balls for winning 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning second operating port 34") / Ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the skill area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) "D1")
-Second parameter: Total number of game balls entered into the general winning opening 31 K2 / Ratio of total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5)-Third parameter: Game balls to the special electric winning device 32 Total number of balls entered K3 / Ratio of total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) ・ Fourth parameter: Total number of game balls ejected into the first operating port 33 K4 / ejected from the game area PA Ratio of the total number of game balls (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D2").
Fifth parameter: Total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 K5 / Ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D3").
6th parameter: D1- (D2 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + D3 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34")
7th parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "general""Number of prize balls for winning the prize opening 31" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Second operating port 34" Ratio of "number of prize balls for winning a prize") ・ Eighth parameter: K3 x "number of prize balls for winning a prize in the special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "for winning a prize in the general winning opening 31" Number of prize balls "+ K3 x" Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32 "+ K4 x" Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33 "+ K5 x" Number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34 " ”) Ratio After that, using the oldest RTC information and the newest RTC information in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the total required until all the history information targeted for this calculation is extracted. Calculate the time (step S1009). Then, the first output process is executed (step S1010). In the first output process, all the history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. Further, the various parameters calculated in step S1008 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102, and the total time calculated in step S1009 is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, each information to be output in the first output process is read.

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating the open / close execution mode are stored, the correspondence information indicating the open / close execution mode, and the correspondence information indicating that the open / close execution mode is set. By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the out opening 24a and the general winning opening 31 that occurred in the open / closed execution mode. , The number of balls entered into each of the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated (step S1011). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating the open / close execution mode are stored, and the correspondence information and the end information indicating the open / close execution mode are stored. The period between the history information storage area 125 and the history information storage area 125 is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. Further, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the open / close execution mode is stored, the correspondence information indicating that the open / close execution mode is set, and the correspondence information indicating that the open / close execution mode is set are stored. If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the total number of balls entered in the sections is calculated. Further, although the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the open / close execution mode is stored exists, the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is stored. When the correspondence information and the start information indicating the open / close execution mode are not stored in the stored history information storage area 125, the correspondence information and the start information indicating the open / close execution mode are stored. All the history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as in the open / close execution mode.

After that, during the period of the opening / closing execution mode specified in step S1011, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the out port 24a, which occurred when the front door frame 14 was in the open state, The number of balls entering each of the second actuating openings 34 is calculated (step S1012). The method of calculating the number of balls entered is the same as that of step S1007, except that the period of the opening / closing execution mode specified in step S1011 is premised.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1011 and S1012 (step S1013). Specifically, first, the number of each ball entered while the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1012 is open is subtracted from each number of balls entered in step S1011. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of balls entered after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls entered in the out port 24a calculated in step S1011 and the number of balls entered in the out port 24a calculated in step S1012 is defined as the number of balls K11, and the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1011 is entered. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of balls entered K12. Let the difference in the number of balls entered in 32 be the number of balls entered K13, and the difference in the number of balls entered in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of balls entered in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1011. The number K14 is defined, and the difference between the number of balls entered in the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1011 and the number of balls entered in the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1012 is defined as the number of balls K15.
11th parameter: Total number of game balls to be paid out (K12 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 31" + K13 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "first operating port 33""Number of prize balls for winning a prize" + K15 x "Number of prize balls for winning a prize in the second operating port 34") / Ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as " D11 ")
12th parameter: Total number of game balls entered into the general winning opening 31 K12 / Ratio of total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) 13th parameter: Game balls to the special electric winning device 32 Total number of balls entered K13 / Ratio of total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) ・ 14th parameter: Total number of game balls ejected into the first operating port 33 K14 / ejected from the game area PA Ratio of the total number of game balls (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D12").
Fifteenth parameter: Total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 K15 / Ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D13").
16th parameter: D11- (D12 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + D13 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34")
17th parameter: (K13 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K15 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K12 x "general""Number of prize balls for winning the prize opening 31" + K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K15 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K15 x "Second operating port 34" Ratio of "number of prize balls for winning a prize") ・ 18th parameter: K13 x "number of prize balls for winning a prize in the special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls paid out (K12 x "for winning a prize in the general winning opening 31" Number of prize balls "+ K13 x" Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32 "+ K14 x" Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33 "+ K15 x" Number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34 " ”) Then, the second output process is executed (step S1014). In the second output process, the various parameters calculated in step S1013 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, each information to be output in the second output process is read.

After that, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and the correspondence relationship indicating that the high frequency support mode is set are stored. By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the out port 24a generated in the high frequency support mode, general The number of balls entered into each of the winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated (step S1015). The history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the correspondence information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set, and the correspondence information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set are stored. The period between the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the high frequency support mode is stored and the correspondence relationship indicating that the high frequency support mode is used. If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which information and end information are stored, the total number of balls entered in the sections is calculated. Further, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating that the high frequency support mode is stored exists, RTC information corresponding to a time after the history information storage area 125 is present. If the history information storage area 125 in which is stored does not store the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set, the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the high frequency support mode is stored are stored. All the history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as in the high frequency support mode.

After that, during the period of the high frequency support mode specified in step S1015, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the first operating port 33 that occurred when the front door frame 14 was in the open state. And the number of balls entering each of the second actuating openings 34 is calculated (step S1016). The method of calculating the number of balls entered is the same as that of step S1007, except that the period of the high frequency support mode specified in step S1015 is premised.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1015 and S1016 (step S1017). Specifically, first, from each number of balls entered in step S1015, the number of balls entered while the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1016 is open is subtracted. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of balls entered after the subtraction. The difference in the number of balls entered in the out port 24a calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of balls entered in the out port 24a calculated in step S1015 is defined as the number of balls entered K21, and the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1015 is entered. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of balls entered K22, and the special electric winning device calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of balls entered in the special electric winning device 32 calculated in step S1015. Let the difference in the number of balls entered in 32 be the number of balls K23, and the difference in the number of balls entered in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of balls entered in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1015. The number K24 is defined, and the difference between the number of balls entered in the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1015 and the number of balls entered in the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1016 is defined as the number of balls K25.
21st parameter: Total number of game balls to be paid out (K22 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 31" + K23 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K24 x "first operating port 33""Number of prize balls for winning a prize" + K25 x "Number of prize balls for winning a prize in the second operating port 34") / Ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as " D11 ")
22nd parameter: Total number of game balls entered into the general winning opening 31 K22 / Ratio of total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) ・ 23rd parameter: Game balls to the special electric winning device 32 Total number of balls entered K23 / Ratio of total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) ・ 24th parameter: Total number of game balls ejected into the first operating port 33 K24 / ejected from the game area PA Ratio of the total number of game balls (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D22").
25th parameter: Total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 K25 / Ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D23”).
26th parameter: D21- (D22 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + D23 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34")
After that, the third output process is executed (step S1018). In the third output process, various parameters calculated in step S1017 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, each information to be output in the third output process is read. After that, the clearing process is executed (step S1019). In the clearing process, all the history information storage areas 125 of the history memory 117 are cleared by "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared by "0". As a result, the history area 124 is in the initialized state.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When a game ball enters any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating opening 34, the game ball is paid out, so that the player can use any of these entry sections. The game will be played while expecting the game ball to enter. In the configuration, the game ball enters any one of the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (hereinafter, also referred to as a history target ball entry portion). When this occurs, the corresponding history information is stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. As a result, it becomes possible for the pachinko machine 10 to store and retain information for managing the number or frequency of balls of a game ball entering each history target ball entry section, and this managed information is used. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the mode of entering the game ball into each history-targeted entry unit. Further, since the history information is stored and retained by the pachinko machine 10 itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the history information.

All the ball entry portions that eject the game ball from the game area PA are subject to execution of the storage process of the history information and are subject to management using the history information. This makes it possible to manage the ball entry frequency for any history target ball entry unit by using the history information. Further, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls to the history target ball entry unit to the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA by using the history information.

The history information includes RTC information which is information corresponding to the timing when the game ball enters the history target ball entry portion which triggered the storage of the history information. As a result, by using the history information, it is possible to grasp in detail the ball entry history of the game ball to the history target ball entry section.

In the history memory 117, not only the history information corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the history target entry portion, but also the history information indicating whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in the open / closed execution mode, and the high frequency support mode are in progress. History information indicating whether or not the door frame 14 is open and history information indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open are stored. As a result, it is possible to distinguish whether or not each of these situations is the case, and to manage the ball entry mode of the game ball into the history target ball entry section.

It is possible to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to a reading device which is a device outside the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to read the history information with the reading device and analyze the ball entry mode of the game ball into the history target ball entry section using the read history information.

The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 102, and a program can be read from the main ROM 64 by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the program is normal. In this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is externally output by using the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program. This makes it possible to output the history information to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

It is specified which of the program and the history information is the information to be output from the reading terminal 102, and the information on the side corresponding to the specified result is externally output through the reading terminal 102. As a result, in a configuration in which history information is externally output using the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program, the pachinko machine 10 determines which of the program and the history information is the target information for external output. It is specified on the side, and the specified information is output to the outside. Therefore, even if the reading terminal 102 is also used, it is possible to read only necessary information.

Based on the information received from the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, it is specified which of the program and history information is the information to be output from the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration regarding the selection of information to be output externally from becoming complicated.

The MPU 62 having the main ROM 64 for storing the program in advance has the management IC 66 and the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to consolidate the signal paths for the reading terminal 102 in the MPU 62. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described above while making it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the reading terminal 102.

The main CPU 63 that executes a process for paying out the game ball based on the entry of the game ball into any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Separately, the management side CPU 112 is provided, and the management side CPU 112 executes a process for storing the history information in the history memory 117. As a result, it is possible to manage the ball entry mode of the game ball into each history target ball entry unit while preventing the processing load of the main CPU 63 from being extremely increased.

The main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 are provided on the same chip as the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

The main CPU 63 inputs information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a to each buffer of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 by using the signal path corresponding to each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. It is transmitted to 122a to 122g. As a result, the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 corresponds to each buffer 122a to 122g (that is, each signal path), and the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the management side CPU 112 is simplified. It becomes possible to do.

The main CPU 63 has information corresponding to whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode, information corresponding to whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode, and information corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open. Is transmitted to the buffers 122h to 122j of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 by using the signal path corresponding to each of these situations. As a result, the types of information corresponding to each of these situations correspond to the buffers 122h to 122j (that is, each signal path), and the configuration for distinguishing each type of information on the management side CPU 112 is simplified. It becomes possible.

The main CPU 63 transmits correspondence information indicating which type of information each buffer 122a to 122j (that is, each signal path 118a to 118j) corresponds to, to the management side CPU 112. As a result, it is not necessary to store the correspondence information in the management IC 66 in advance. Therefore, it is possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. As a result, in a situation where a game ball may enter the history target ball entry section, the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the main CPU 63 and the history target entry section can be specified by the management IC 66. It becomes possible to become.

Correspondence-related information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 by using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating whether or not the game ball has entered the history target ball entry unit. This makes it possible to simplify the communication-related configuration as compared with the configuration in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting correspondence information is provided.

The management IC 66 is provided with a correspondence memory 116, and the correspondence information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence memory 116. As a result, each time the main CPU 63 transmits the information of the detection result of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, the information that enables the history target ball entry unit corresponding to the transmission target information to be specified by the management IC 66 is transmitted. No need to provide. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the detection result of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a transmitted from the main CPU 63.

By switching the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 from the LOW level to the HI level, information is output from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102. In this case, the fact that the signal path corresponding to the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal can be specified by the management side CPU 112 without receiving the correspondence information from the main side CPU 63. .. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the transmission of correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

The management IC 66 is provided with a number of buffers 122a to 122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63, which is larger than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Has been done. As a result, even if the number of types of the information increases or decreases depending on the model of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to deal with it without changing the configuration of the buffers 122a to 122p. Therefore, it is possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

When the history information is transmitted from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102, the corresponding history information includes the correspondence information indicating the type of the history target ball entry unit corresponding to the history information. As a result, it is possible to specify the ball entry mode of the game ball into each history target ball entry portion by using the read history information.

In the management IC 66, by using the history information stored in the history memory 117, various parameters (1st to 8th, 11th to 18th, corresponding to the entry mode of the game ball in the game area PA in a predetermined period, 21-26 parameters) are calculated. This makes it possible to externally output various parameters that are the result of calculation using the history information.

Various parameters are calculated in a state where the history information corresponding to the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is excluded. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a normal situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. In addition, various parameters corresponding to the situation of the open / close execution mode and the situation of the high frequency support mode are calculated. This makes it possible for the manager of the game hall or the like to grasp the entry mode of the game ball according to each situation.

When various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized by executing the clearing process of the history memory 117. As a result, the history information that exceeds the storage capacity of the history memory 117 becomes the storage target in the history memory 117, and the history information that should be stored and retained is erased by overwriting. Can be made less likely to occur.

When various parameters are output to the reading terminal 102, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is also output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, when reading out various parameters and analyzing the entry mode of the game ball in the game area PA, it is possible to refer not only to the various parameters but also to the history information on which the calculation of the various parameters is based.

The management side CPU 112 calculates various parameters when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency of calculating various parameters.

It is specified by the main CPU 63 that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and when the output instruction information is transmitted from the main CPU 63, various parameters are calculated by the management IC 66. , Various parameters of the calculation result are output to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to output various parameters to the reading device outside the pachinko machine 10 based on the instruction from the main CPU 63.

Whether or not the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 is specified by the processing at the start of supply of the operating power executed by the main CPU 63, and the reading device is electrically connected. Is specified, the output instruction information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. As a result, in a situation where the processing at the start of supplying operating power is being executed by the main CPU 63 or the like, that is, in a situation before the normal processing for advancing the game is started in the main CPU 63, various types are used. The calculation of the parameters and the external output of various parameters of the calculation results are completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters and the external output of the calculation result in the situation where the game ball may enter the history target ball entry section, and the processing load of the management IC 66 is increased. It is possible to reduce it.

History information is stored in the history memory 117 in a configuration in which external output corresponding to the occurrence of a game ball entering the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is performed through the external terminal board 97. .. As a result, by using the information output externally through the external terminal board 97, the history can be easily grasped while the number and frequency of the game balls entering the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. By using the history information stored in the memory 117, it is possible to accurately grasp the number and frequency of the game balls entering the history target entry portion.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, among the first to 16th buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 on the management side I / F 111, the type of buffer whose input signal type is determined in the design stage of the management IC 66 is described above. It is different from the first embodiment. Further, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 in order to cause the management CPU 112 to specify the type of the input signal is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 in the present embodiment.

A signal of the same type as that of the first embodiment is input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and the second buffer 122b corresponds to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. Two signals are input, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and a fourth corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. A signal is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first actuating port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second actuating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. The sixth signal is input, the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h as the eighth signal, and the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i as the ninth signal. The signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal, but in the present embodiment, the buffers to which these signals are input are different. Specifically, the signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input to the 13th buffer 122m as the open / close execution mode signal, and the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the 14th buffer 122n as the high frequency support mode signal. , The signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the 15th buffer 122o as a signal during door opening.

An open / close execution mode signal is input to the 13th buffer 122m, a high frequency support mode signal is input to the 14th buffer 122n, a door opening signal is input to the 15th buffer 122o, and a th. It is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the 16 buffer 122p, and the management CPU 112 does not receive an instruction from the main CPU 63, and the management CPU 112 has these 13th to 16th buffers 122m to 122p. It is possible to specify that each of the above signals corresponding to each is input to. On the other hand, what kind of signal is input to the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the type of these signals receives an instruction from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management side CPU 112. The process for specifying the type of the signal is executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a recognition process of the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 7) as in the first embodiment.

First, "12", which is the number of the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l to be recognized for the signal type, is set in the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 (step S1101). After that, the output processing of the identification start signal is executed (step S1102). In the output processing, the output states of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the open / closed execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n are respectively. Is set to the HI level to start the output of the identification start signal. The period for maintaining these signals at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

After that, the information of the number of outputs corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64, and the information of the read number of outputs is set in the output counter provided in the main RAM 65 (. Step S1103). The output count counter is a counter for specifying the output count of the type identification signal by the main CPU 63.

In the present embodiment, when the management side CPU 112 is made to recognize the type of the signal input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l, the number of prize balls set for the ball entry unit corresponding to the signal type. Outputs the type identification signal the same number of times as. The management side CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times the type identification signal is received for each of the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l in the first to twelfth correspondence relation areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence relation memory 116. .. That is, the type of the signal input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l is grasped as the number of prize balls set for the ball entry unit corresponding to the signal type.

In step S1103, when the value of the recognition output counter is any of "12", "11", and "10", "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the general winning opening 31 is set in the output count counter. .. When the value of the recognition output counter is "9", "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric winning device 32 is set in the output count counter. When the value of the recognition output counter is "8", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the first operating port 33 is set in the output count counter. When the value of the recognition output counter is "7", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34 is set in the output count counter. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is "6", even if the game ball enters the out port 24a although it corresponds to the out port 24a, the game ball is not paid out, so that the output number counter is used. Set to "0". Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is any of "5" to "1", the corresponding ball entry portion does not exist and the ball is blank, so "0" is set in the output count counter.

After that, the output processing of the start trigger signal is executed (step S1104). In the output process, the output of the start trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a to the HI level. The period for maintaining the first signal at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

After that, on the condition that the value of the output count counter of the main RAM 65 is not "0" (step S1105: YES), that is, on the condition that a value of 1 or more is set in the output count counter in step S1103. The process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1106, the output processing of the type identification signal is executed. In the output process, the output of the type identification signal is started by setting the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b to the HI level. The period for maintaining the second signal at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

After that, the value of the output count counter of the main RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S1107), and it is determined whether or not the value of the output count counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S1108). If the value of the output count counter is 1 or more (step S1108: NO), the process returns to step S1106.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1105, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1108, the end trigger signal output process is executed (step S1109). In the output process, the output of the end trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c to the HI level. The period for maintaining the third signal at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

After that, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S1110), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S1111). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S1111: NO), the process returns to step S1103 and the process for recognizing the signal type corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after 1 subtraction is executed. do.

On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S1111: YES), the output processing of the identification end signal is executed (step S1112). In the output process, the output states of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the open / closed execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n. Is set to the HI level to start the output of the identification end signal. The period for maintaining these signals at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

Next, the management process in the present embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27. The management process is started when the supply of the operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started as in the first embodiment.

When the reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S1201: YES), the value of the setting target counter of the management side RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S1202). After that, the process proceeds to step S1204 on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1203: YES). In step S1204, it is determined whether or not the type identification signal is received from the main CPU 63. When the type identification signal is received (step S1204: YES), the value of the reception count counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is added by 1 (step S1205). The reception count counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify the number of times the type identification signal is received from the main side CPU 63. The value of the reception count counter is cleared to "0" when an affirmative determination is made in step S1203.

When a negative determination is made in step S1204, or when the process of step S1205 is executed, it is determined whether or not an end trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1206). If the end trigger signal has not been received (step S1206: NO), the process returns to step S1204, and if the end trigger signal has been received (step S1206: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S1207). In the correspondence setting process, the reception count counter is set in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value in the setting target counter of the management side RAM 114 among the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116. Stores the value that has been set. In this case, "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the general winning opening 31 is set in the first correspondence area 123a, the second correspondence area 123b, and the third correspondence area 123c, and the fourth correspondence area 123d is set. Is set to "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric winning device 32, and "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operating port 33 is set in the fifth correspondence area 123e, and the sixth correspondence relationship. In the area 123f, "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34 is set. Further, "0" is set in the 7th to 12th correspondence related areas 123g to 123l. After that, the value of the setting target counter of the management side RAM 114 is added by 1 (step S1208).

When a negative determination is made in step S1203, or when the process of step S1208 is executed, it is determined whether or not the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S1209). If the reception of the identification end signal is not completed (step S1209: NO), the process returns to step S1203, and the processing after step S1204 is performed on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1203: YES). Run. When the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S1209: YES), the history setting process in step S1210 and the external output process in step S1211 are repeatedly executed.

FIG. 28 is a time chart showing how the correspondence relationship information between the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122l is stored in the correspondence relationship memory 116. FIG. 28 (a) shows a period in which the output state of the first signal is at the HI level, and FIG. 28 (b) shows a period in which the output state of the second signal is at the HI level. ) Indicates the period during which the output state of the third signal is at the HI level, FIG. 28 (d) indicates the period during which the output state of the signal during the open / close execution mode is at the HI level, and FIG. 28 (e) shows the period. The period during which the output state of the signal during the high frequency support mode is at the HI level is shown, and FIG. 28 (f) shows the types of signals input to the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and these buffers 122a to 122l. FIG. 28 (g) shows the execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence is executed, FIG. 28 (g) shows the timing at which the value of the reception count counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1, and FIG. 28 (h) shows the timing. The timing at which the correspondence setting process (step S1207) is executed by the management side CPU 112 is shown.

When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, the first signal is shown at the timing of t1 as shown in FIGS. 28 (a), 28 (d) and 28 (e). , The output state of the signal in the open / close execution mode and the signal in the high frequency support mode is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. After that, at the timing of t2, the output states of the first signal, the open / close execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing of t2, the management side CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S1201 of the management process (FIG. 27), so that the identification state is set as shown in FIG. 28 (f).

After that, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 28A from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4. As a result, the start trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112. Then, the output state of the second signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 28B from the timing of t5 to the timing of t7. As a result, the type identification signal is output once to the management side CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t6, the value of the reception count counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 as shown in FIG. 28 (g).

After that, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 28 (c) from the timing of t8 to the timing of t10. As a result, the end trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t9, the correspondence setting process is executed by the management side CPU 112 as shown in FIG. 28 (h). Since the value of the reception count counter is "1" at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, "1" is provided as the correspondence information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123l to be set this time in the correspondence memory 116. Information is stored.

After that, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 28A from the timing of t11 to the timing of t12. As a result, the start trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112. Then, as shown in FIG. 28 (b), the timing of t13 to the timing of t15, the timing of t16 to the timing of t18, the timing of t19 to the timing of t21, and the timing of t22 to the timing of t24 are second. The output state of the signal is maintained at the HI level. As a result, the type identification signal is output once to the management side CPU 112. In this case, the value of the reception count counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 at each of the timing of t14, the timing of t17, the timing of t20, and the timing of t23, as shown in FIG. 28 (g).

After that, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 28 (c) from the timing of t25 to the timing of t27. As a result, the end trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t26, the correspondence setting process is executed by the management side CPU 112 as shown in FIG. 28 (h). Since the value of the reception count counter is "10" at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, "10" is used as the correspondence information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123l to be set this time in the correspondence memory 116. Information is stored.

After that, at the timing of t28, as shown in FIGS. 28 (c), 28 (d), and 28 (e), the output states of the third signal, the open / close execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are LOW. The level is changed to the HI level. As a result, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. After that, at the timing of t29, the output states of the third signal, the open / close execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. As a result, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing of t29, the management side CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S1209 of the management process (FIG. 27), so that the identification state is released as shown in FIG. 28 (f).

Since the information on the number of prize balls is stored as the correspondence information in the present embodiment, the history information stored in the history memory 117 includes the prize balls corresponding to the ball entry portion that triggered the storage of the history information. Information on the number of pieces is included as correspondence information. In this configuration, when there are a plurality of types of ball entry portions having the same number of prize balls, it is not possible to distinguish between the ball entry portions in the history information. Specifically, since the number of prize balls is one in both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34, it is possible to distinguish between the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 in the history information. Can not. Under such circumstances, the number of prize balls may be different between the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. This makes it possible to distinguish between the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 in the history information even in the configuration in which the history information is stored as in the second embodiment.

Further, in the present embodiment, "15" is set in the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 in step S801 of the history setting process. As a result, all of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are to be confirmed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, not only the output instruction signal, but also the information corresponding to whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect, the information corresponding to whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect, and the front door. Regarding the information corresponding to whether or not the frame 14 is open, it is possible for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the signal path corresponds to these information without receiving the correspondence information from the main side CPU 63. It has become. In this case, only the information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is the information that the main CPU 63 needs to make the management CPU 112 recognize the correspondence relationship between each information and each signal path 118a to 118g. Become. Then, when the management side CPU 112 is made to recognize the correspondence information, the same number of pulse signals as the number of prize balls corresponding to the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is generated from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 by using the second signal. Is output to. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration related to the transmission of correspondence information.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the trigger for executing the calculation of various parameters using the history information is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 29 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 in the present embodiment. The management IC 66 is provided with a management side I / F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, a management side RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence-related memory 116, and a history memory 117, as in the first embodiment. These functions are the same as those in the first embodiment.

In addition to the above, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 131. In the present embodiment, as will be described in detail later, when a calculation trigger occurs, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112 using the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. Then, the various calculated parameters are sequentially stored in the calculation result memory 131. Various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102.

The calculation trigger of various parameters occurs before the timing when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. As a result, it is possible to make the timing of calculating various parameters different from the timing of externally outputting to the reading device, and it is possible to distribute the processing load.

In addition, since the calculation result memory 131 for storing the calculation results of various parameters is provided, not only the various parameters for one calculation trigger but also the various parameters for multiple calculation triggers are collectively collected. It becomes possible to memorize it. This makes it possible to shorten the time required to calculate various parameters at each calculation trigger.

FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 in the present embodiment.

A signal of the same type as that of the first embodiment is input to the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and the second buffer 122b corresponds to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. Two signals are input, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and a fourth corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. A signal is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first actuating port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second actuating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. The sixth signal is input, the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, the signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h, and the ninth buffer is input. A signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the buffer 122i, a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the 10th buffer 122j, and an output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p.

In the present embodiment, in addition to the various signals described above, a calculation instruction signal is input to the 15th buffer 122o. The calculation instruction signal is a signal output from the main CPU 63 in order to provide a calculation trigger for various parameters to the management side CPU 112. The input of the calculation instruction signal to the 15th buffer 122o is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 in the same manner as the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p, and is an instruction from the main CPU 63. The management side CPU 112 can specify that each of the above signals corresponding to the 15th to 16th buffers 122o to 122p is input to the 15th to 16th buffers 122o to 122p without receiving the signal. On the other hand, what kind of signal is input to the first to 14th buffers 122a to 122n is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the type of these signals receives an instruction from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management side CPU 112. The process for specifying the type of the signal is executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

Next, a processing configuration for causing the management side CPU 112 to execute various parameter calculations in response to the occurrence of a calculation trigger will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a power failure information storage process executed by the main CPU 63. The power failure information storage process is executed in step S201 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

In the power failure information storage process, when the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 67 (step S1301: YES), the output process of the calculation instruction signal is executed (step S1302). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This specific period is a sufficient period for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level. After that, after executing the power failure processing in step S1303, an infinite loop occurs, and the process waits until the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is completely stopped. In the power failure processing, "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 65, a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a power failure response process executed by the management side CPU 112. The power failure response process is configured to be executed after the external output process in the management process (FIG. 18). In the management process, after receiving the identification end command from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), step S607. The history setting process, the external output process of step S608, and the power failure response process are repeatedly executed in this order.

In the power failure response process, when the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 reaches the HI level (step S1401: YES), the external output in the first embodiment is performed in steps S1402 to S1406. In the same manner as in steps S1002 to S1006 of the processing (FIG. 24), the number of balls entered for each of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated. .. Further, in step S1407, similarly to step S1007 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, the number of various balls entered in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is calculated. Further, in step S1408, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1008 of the external output processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, and in step S1409, for external output in the first embodiment. The total time is calculated in the same manner as in step S1009 of the process (FIG. 24). Then, the calculation result information in step S1408 and the calculation result information in step S1409 are written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S1410). In this case, if the calculation result memory 131 already stores information on other calculation results, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. conduct. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

After that, in step S1411, the number of various balls entered in the open / close execution mode is calculated in the same manner as in step S1011 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, and in step S1412, the first step is performed. Similar to step S1012 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the embodiment, the number of various balls entered in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open in the open / close execution mode is calculated. Further, in step S1413, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1013 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. Then, the information of the calculation result of step S1414 is written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S1414). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 131. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

After that, in step S1415, the number of various balls entered in the high frequency support mode is calculated in the same manner as in step S1015 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, and in step S1416, the above-mentioned first step. Similar to step S1016 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, the number of various balls entered in the high frequency support mode and the front door frame 14 is open is calculated. Further, in step S1417, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1017 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. Then, the information of the calculation result of step S1417 is written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S1418). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 131. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing. After that, an infinite loop occurs, and the system waits until the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is completely stopped.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an external output process executed by the management side CPU 112. The external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 18).

When the output state of the output instruction signal from the main CPU 63 reaches the HI level (step S1501: YES), the output processing of the calculation result is executed (step S1502). In the output process, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are read. In this case, when only the various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of one calculation trigger are stored in the calculation result memory 131, only the various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of the one calculation trigger are stored in the reading device. When it is read and various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of multiple calculation triggers are stored in the calculation result memory 131, the various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of these multiple calculation triggers are read by the reading device. ..

After that, the history information output process is executed (step S1503). In the output process, all the history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, various history information stored in the history area 124 is read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. By outputting not only the various calculation results but also the history information in this way, it is possible for the operator using the reading device to perform detailed analysis of the various calculation results.

After that, the clearing process is executed (step S1504). In the clear process, all the history information storage areas 125 of the history memory 117 are cleared by "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared by "0". As a result, the history area 124 is in the initialized state. Further, in the clearing process, all the areas of the calculation result memory 131 are cleared to "0". As a result, the calculation result memory 131 is in the initialized state.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, various parameters are calculated by the management CPU 112. This makes it possible to manage various parameters on a business day basis.

When it is specified that the supply of the operating power is stopped in the main CPU 63, the output state of the calculation instruction signal is changed to the HI level, so that the management side CPU 112 calculates various parameters. This makes it possible for the management side CPU 112 to calculate various parameters based on the instruction from the main side CPU 63.

Various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 are sequentially written in the calculation result memory 131. As a result, various parameters can be accumulated in the management IC 66, and when various parameters are read by the reading device, various parameters of a plurality of business days can be read together.

When various parameters are written to the calculation result memory 131, information that enables the time when the various parameters are calculated is written to the calculation result memory 131 in association with the various parameters. This makes it possible to analyze various parameter information while grasping the timing when various parameters are calculated.

When a calculation trigger occurs and the calculation results of various parameters for the calculation result are written in the calculation result memory 131, the history memory 117 may be cleared to "0". As a result, in a situation where the maximum number of storable history information is already stored in the history memory 117, it becomes difficult for a new history information to be written to the history memory 117.

Further, the target information to be externally output to the reading device may be only the information of various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131, and the history information stored in the history memory 117 may not be output externally. .. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information output to the outside.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the power failure response process executed by the management side CPU 112 is different from the third embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a power failure response process executed by the management side CPU 112 in the present embodiment.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 reaches the HI level (step S1601: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S1602). In various arithmetic processes, the processes of steps S1402 to S1409, steps S141 to S1413, and steps S1415 to S1417 of the power failure response process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment are executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not a predetermined parameter is within the reference range among the various parameters calculated in step S1602 (step S1603). In particular,
7th parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "general""Number of prize balls for winning the prize opening 31" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Second operating port 34" Ratio of "number of prize balls for winning a prize") ・ Eighth parameter: K3 x "number of prize balls for winning a prize in the special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "for winning a prize in the general winning opening 31" Number of prize balls "+ K3 x" Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32 "+ K4 x" Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33 "+ K5 x" Number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34 " The two parameters of the ratio of ") are set as the parameters to be determined whether or not they are within the reference range. Then, when the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, an affirmative determination is made in step S1603 assuming that the predetermined parameter is in the reference range.

The predetermined parameter is not limited to the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter, and may be configured in which other parameters are set as predetermined parameters in place of or in addition to these. for example,
Second parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entered into the general winning opening 31 K2 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) may be set as a predetermined parameter. .. In this case, for example, when the value of the second parameter is 0.1 or more and 0.2 or less, the predetermined parameter may be determined to be in the reference range. Further, only the predetermined parameters to be determined in step S1603 may be calculated by various arithmetic processes in step S1602.

When the predetermined parameter is not in the reference range (step S1603: NO), various parameters calculated in step S1602 are written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S1604). In this case, if the calculation result memory 131 already stores information on other calculation results, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. conduct. Further, the current date information and the time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and the time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

On the other hand, when the predetermined parameter is in the reference range (step S1603: YES), the process of step S1604 is not executed. As a result, only various parameters when the predetermined parameter is not in the reference range are written in the calculation result memory 131. Therefore, when an abnormal situation occurs, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required for the calculation result memory 131 while leaving the history in the calculation result memory 131.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1603 or when the process of step S1604 is executed, the clear process of the history memory 117 is executed (step S1605). In the clearing process, all the history information storage areas 125 of the history memory 117 are cleared by "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared by "0". As a result, the history area 124 is in the initialized state. After executing the process of step S1605, an infinite loop is formed, and the process waits until the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is completely stopped.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, it is determined whether or not the contents of the various calculated parameters are included in the reference range, and only the various parameters determined not to be included in the reference range are the operation result memory 131. Written in. As a result, it is possible to suppress the amount of various parameters to be stored in the calculation result memory 131, and it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the calculation result memory 131.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the content of the calculation trigger for causing the management side CPU 112 to execute the calculation of various parameters is different from the third embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 35A is a flowchart showing a trigger identification process executed by the main CPU 63. The trigger identification process is executed as a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S712 in the management output process (FIG. 20).

It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (step S1701). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1701, the addition process of the ball entry counter provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S1702). In the addition process, the number of game balls that have entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated this time. It is specified based on the number of times step S705 is executed in the management output process (FIG. 20) of. Then, the number of the specified game balls is added to the ball entry counter.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the ball entry counter is equal to or more than the trigger reference number "500" (step S1703). When it is "500" or more (step S1703: YES), the subtraction process of the ball entry counter of the main RAM 65 is executed (step S1704). In the subtraction process, the value of the ball entry counter is subtracted by "500". After that, the output processing of the calculation instruction signal is executed (step S1705). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This specific period is a sufficient period for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level.

FIG. 35B is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing executed by the management side CPU 112. The arithmetic processing is a processing executed instead of the power failure response processing in the third embodiment. Therefore, the arithmetic processing is configured to be executed after the external output processing in the management processing (FIG. 18), and in the management processing, after receiving the identification end command from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), in step S607. The history setting process, the external output process of step S608, and the arithmetic process are repeatedly executed in this order.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 reaches the HI level (step S1801: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S1802). In various arithmetic processes, the same processes as in steps S1402 to S1418 of the power failure response process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment are executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112 every time the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or more than the trigger reference number. In this case, since various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger that repeatedly occurs in the situation where the operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63, the game ball enters the game area PA within one business day. It becomes possible to manage the mode in detail.

Further, since various parameters are calculated based on whether or not the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA exceeds the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated on condition that the game is executed. Is calculated. This makes it possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters from being performed meaninglessly in a situation where the game is not continuously executed.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the content of the calculation trigger for causing the management side CPU 112 to execute the calculation of various parameters is different from the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the fifth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a trigger identification process executed by the main CPU 63. The trigger identification process is executed as a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S712 in the management output process (FIG. 20).

It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (step S1901). If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the value of the continuation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S1902). The continuation counter is the main CPU 63 for a period in which the game ball does not enter any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. It is a counter for specifying at.

When the value of the continuation counter after 1 addition is equal to or greater than the stop reference value (step S1903: YES), the time measurement flag provided in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S1904). When the state in which the game ball does not enter any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 continues for 5 seconds, a positive judgment is made in step S1903. The stop reference value is set so as to. Further, the time measurement flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not to measure the time for specifying the timing for switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level, and is a time measurement flag. When the value of is "0", the time is not measured, and when the value of the time measurement flag is "1", the time is measured. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, the time measurement flag is set to "1" (step S1905).

When a negative determination is made in step S1903, when the process of step S1904 is executed, or when the process of step S1905 is executed, the time measurement flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (condition). Step S1906: YES), the value of the measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S1907). The measurement counter is a counter used for measuring the time for specifying the timing for switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level.

1 It is determined whether or not the value of the measurement counter after addition is equal to or higher than the indicated reference value (step S1908). An instruction reference value is set so that an affirmative determination is made in step S1908 when the time measured by the measurement counter reaches 10 hours. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1908, the value of the measurement counter is cleared to "0" (step S1909), and the calculation instruction signal output process is executed (step S1910). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This specific period is a sufficient period for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, since various parameters are calculated each time a predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of various parameters simply by adjusting the predetermined period. Become. In this case, in the situation where the game is not executed, the measurement for the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game round is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude the situation where the game is not executed from the calculation targets of various parameters, and it is possible to appropriately derive various parameters in the situation where the game is being executed.

In addition, instead of the configuration in which whether or not the predetermined period has elapsed is measured by using the measurement counter, the configuration may be such that the RTC 115 is used for measurement.

<7th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the content of the calculation trigger for executing the calculation of various parameters by the management side CPU 112 is different from the first embodiment, and the presence or absence of the calculation trigger is specified by the main CPU 63. It is not performed independently by the management side CPU 112. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing executed by the management side CPU 112. The calculation process is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S812 in the history setting process (FIG. 21).

Corresponding to the occurrence of a game ball entering any of the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 in the history setting process of this processing time. It is determined whether or not the history information to be stored is stored in the history memory 117 (step S2001). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, the addition process of the ball entry counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is executed (step S2002). In the addition process, the number of game balls that have entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated this time. In the history setting process of, the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the game ball is specified based on the number of times of storage. Then, the number of the specified game balls is added to the ball entry counter.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the ball entry counter is equal to or more than the trigger reference number "500" (step S2003). When it is "500" or more (step S2003: YES), the subtraction process of the ball entry counter of the main RAM 65 is executed (step S2004). In the subtraction process, the value of the ball entry counter is subtracted by "500". After that, various arithmetic processes are executed (step S2005). In various arithmetic processes, the same processes as in steps S1402 to S1418 of the power failure response process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment are executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112 every time the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or more than the trigger reference number. In this case, since various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger that repeatedly occurs in the situation where the operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63, the game ball enters the game area PA within one business day. It becomes possible to manage the mode in detail.

Further, since various parameters are calculated based on whether or not the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA exceeds the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated on condition that the game is executed. Is calculated. This makes it possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters from being performed meaninglessly in a situation where the game is not continuously executed.

Further, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is measured by the management side CPU 112, and the management side CPU 112 determines whether or not the total number is equal to or more than the trigger reference number. That is, the calculation trigger of various parameters is independently determined by the management side CPU 112. As a result, it is not necessary for the main CPU 63 to execute the process for determining the calculation trigger of various parameters, so that the processing load of the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management side CPU 112 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

In the present embodiment, the operation result memory 131 is provided in the management IC 66 as in the third embodiment (see FIG. 29). When a calculation trigger occurs, the management side CPU 112 calculates various parameters using the history information stored in the history memory 117, and writes the various parameters of the calculation result to the calculation result memory 131. Further, in the present embodiment, there are a signal indicating that the open / close execution mode has started, a signal indicating that the open / close execution mode has ended, a signal indicating that the high frequency support mode has started, and a high frequency support mode. A signal indicating that the front door frame 14 has been opened, a signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has started, and a signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has been completed are individually sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Will be sent to.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a history setting process in the present embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112.

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S2101). Specifically, the number of correspondence-related areas in the correspondence-related memory 116 in which information other than the information indicating that the correspondence-related areas 123a to 123o are blank is stored is specified and specified. Set the information of the specified number in the confirmation target counter. In the present embodiment, information indicating that any of the ball entry portions is supported is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, and the opening / closing execution mode is started in the eighth correspondence area 123h. Corresponding information is stored, information corresponding to the end of the open / close execution mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i, and information corresponding to the start of the high frequency support mode is stored in the tenth correspondence area 123j. Information corresponding to the end of the high frequency support mode is stored in the 11th correspondence area 123k, and information corresponding to the opening start of the front door frame 14 is stored in the 12th correspondence area 123l. , Information corresponding to the end of opening of the front door frame 14 is stored in the thirteenth correspondence area 123m. Therefore, in step S2101, "13" is set in the confirmation target counter.

After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2102). When the value of the confirmation target counter is "n", the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the confirmation targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "10", the tenth buffer 122j is the confirmation target of the numerical information, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is the confirmation target of the numerical information. ..

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, the RTC information which is the date information and the time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S2103). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2104). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 currently being written is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the pointer information to be written is specified. The RTC information read in step S2103 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, the correspondence relation information is read from the correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter, and the correspondence relation information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. When the value of the confirmation target counter is "n", the nth correspondence area 123a to 123o is the target for reading the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "10", the tenth correspondence area 123j is the target for reading the correspondence information, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the correspondence relation. Information is to be read out.

After that, the value of the target pointer is added by 1 (step S2105). Specifically, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read, and the numerical information is added by 1. Then, it is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 (step S2106).

When the maximum value is exceeded (step S2106: YES), various arithmetic processes are executed (step S2107). In various arithmetic processes, the same processes as in steps S1002 to step S1009, steps S1011 to step S1013, and steps S1015-step S1017 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment are executed. Then, various parameters of the calculation result and information on the total time are written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2108). In this case, if the calculation result memory 131 already stores information on other calculation results, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. conduct. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

After that, the status information takeover process is executed (step S2109). In the takeover process, based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, whether or not the current state is in the open / close execution mode, whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress, and the front door frame 14 is being opened. It is determined whether or not it is. Then, the state information is written to the management side RAM 114.

After that, the clearing process of the history memory 117 is executed (step S2110). In the clearing process, all the history information storage areas 125 of the history memory 117 are cleared by "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared by "0". As a result, the history area 124 is in the initialized state. Further, after executing the clearing process, the state information written in the management side RAM 114 is read out in step S2109. Then, when the state information indicating that the open / close execution mode is being stored is stored, the history information indicating that the open / close execution mode is in the open / close execution mode is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. At the same time as writing, the pointer information to be written is added by 1. In addition, when the status information indicating that the high frequency support mode is being stored is stored, the history information storage area corresponding to the pointer information to which the history information indicating that the high frequency support mode is being written is stored. While writing to 125, the pointer information to be written is added by 1. Further, when the state information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open is stored, the history information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open corresponds to the pointer information to be written. While writing to the history information storage area 125, the pointer information to be written is added by 1.

When a negative determination is made in step S2102, a negative determination is made in step S2106, or the process of step S2110 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S2111). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2112). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S2112: NO), the processing after step S2102 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the value of the new confirmation target counter.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, various parameters are calculated when the history information stored in the history memory 117 exceeds the upper limit number that can be stored in the history memory 117. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the history information exceeds the upper limit that can be stored in the history memory 117 and the history information becomes a storage target and the calculation of various parameters cannot be performed accurately.

Further, when various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized and all the history information is erased. This makes it possible to prevent the history information that has already been the calculation target of various parameters from becoming the calculation target of various parameters again.

Further, even when the history memory 117 is initialized, the state information takeover process is executed. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the status information.

<9th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 117 and the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management side CPU 112 are different from those of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in the present embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 141, a first state area 142, a second state area 143, and a third state area 144. Each of these areas 141 to 144 is provided with first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o, 142a to 142o, 143a to 143o, 144a to 144o. The first counters 141a to 144a of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The second counters 141b to 144b of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The third counters 141c to 144c of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourth counters 141d to 144d of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fifth counters 141e to 144e of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The sixth counters 141f to 144f of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the seventh counters 141g to 144g of each area 141 to 144. The eighth counters 141h to 144h of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The ninth counters 141i to 144i of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the tenth counters 141j to 144j of each area 141 to 144. The 11th counters 141k to 144k in each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the 11th signal input to the 11th buffer 122k is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The twelfth counters 141l to 144l of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Information on the number of times the output state of the 13th signal input to the 13th buffer 122m is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the 13th counters 141m to 144m of each area 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the 14th signal input to the 14th buffer 122n is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the 14th counters 141n to 144n of each area 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the 15th signal input to the 15th buffer 122o is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the 15th counters 141o to 144o of each area 141 to 144.

However, the measurement targets using the first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o, 142a to 142o, 143a to 143o, 144a to 144o are the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the first operation. The first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g to which a signal corresponding to the result of entering the ball into any of the mouth 33 and the second operating port 34 is input. Therefore, the 8th to 8th signals corresponding to the state information such as whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect, and whether or not the front door frame 14 is open are input. The 10 buffers 122h to 122j are excluded from the above measurement targets. Distinguishing whether or not these are measurement targets is performed based on the correspondence relation information stored in the correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence relation memory 116.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a history setting process in the present embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112.

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S2201). Specifically, the number of correspondence-related areas in the correspondence-related memory 116 in which information other than the information indicating that the correspondence-related areas 123a to 123o are blank is stored is specified and specified. Set the information of the specified number in the confirmation target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, information other than the information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is blank is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j as described above. Therefore, in step S2201, "10" is set in the confirmation target counter. do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the buffers 122a to 122o corresponding to the current confirmation target counters are buffers to which the status information signal is input (step S2202). Specifically, in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the values of the current confirmation target counters, the correspondence information includes information indicating that the open / close execution mode is used, information indicating that the high frequency support mode is used, and information indicating that the high frequency support mode is used. It is determined whether or not any of the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored is stored.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2202, the state information setting process is executed (step S2203). In the setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the information of the first state indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress is stored on the management side. It is stored in the RAM 114, and when the output state of the eighth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information in the first state is erased from the management side RAM 114. Further, when the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether or not the high frequency support mode is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the information of the second state indicating that the high frequency support mode is in the state is stored in the management side RAM 114. When the output state of the 9th signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information of the 2nd state is erased from the management side RAM 114. Further, when the output state of the tenth signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the information of the third state indicating that the front door frame 14 is open. Is stored in the management side RAM 114, and when the output state of the tenth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information of the third state is erased from the management side RAM 114.

When a negative determination is made in step S2202, it is stored in a buffer corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and in which a signal of information different from the state information is input. By confirming whether or not the numerical information is changed from "0" to "1", whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. It is determined whether or not (step S2204). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, the corresponding total counter addition process is executed (step S2205). In the addition process, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o for totalization in the totalization area 141 of the history memory 117 is added by one. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth counter 141e for totaling is the addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first counter 141a for totalization is the addition target. ..

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the first state, that is, whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode (step S2206). If it is in the first state (step S2206: YES), the counter addition process for the corresponding first state is executed (step S2207). In the addition process, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 142a to 142o for the first state in the first state area 142 of the history memory 117 is added by one. .. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth counter 142e for the first state is the addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first counter 142a for the first state is the addition target. It is subject to addition.

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the second state, that is, whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode (step S2208). If it is in the second state (step S2208: YES), the counter addition process for the corresponding second state is executed (step S2209). In the addition process, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 143a to 143o for the second state in the second state area 143 of the history memory 117 is added by one. .. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth counter 143e for the second state is the addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first counter 143a for the second state is used. It is subject to addition.

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the third state, that is, whether or not the front door frame 14 is open (step S2210). If it is in the third state (step S2210: YES), the counter addition process for the corresponding third state is executed (step S2211). In the addition process, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 144a to 144o for the third state in the third state area 144 of the history memory 117 is added by one. .. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth counter 144e for the third state is the addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first counter 144a for the third state is used. It is subject to addition.

When the process of step S2203 is executed, the negative determination is made in step S2204, the negative determination is made in step S2210, or the process of step S2211 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 is set to 1. Subtract (step S2212). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2213). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S2213: NO), the processing after step S2202 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the value of the new confirmation target counter.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the ball entry history of the game ball into the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is described above. It is not stored as history information as in the first embodiment, but is stored as information on the number of times a game ball is detected by each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. As a result, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 as compared with the configuration in which each history information is individually stored.

As described above, the configuration is such that the game balls are stored as the number of times information is detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. Therefore, in the external output process (FIG. 24) in the present embodiment, the out port 24a such as step S1002 is used. The process of calculating the number of game balls entering the game, the process of calculating the number of game balls entered into the special electric winning device 32 such as step S1004, and the number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 such as step S1005. It is not necessary to perform the calculation process and the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 such as step S1006. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

In the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31 such as step S1003, the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, 144a to 144c are all general winning openings. Since it corresponds to 31, it is necessary to execute the process of summing the values of the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, and 144a to 144c. Further, the number of balls entered in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open in the open / close execution mode cannot be distinguished from the number of balls entered in other situations. Therefore, the process of step S1012 is not executed in the external output process (FIG. 24) in the present embodiment. Similarly, the number of balls entered in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open in the high frequency support mode cannot be distinguished from the number of balls entered in other situations. Therefore, the process of step S1016 is not executed in the external output process (FIG. 24) in the present embodiment.

<10th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the storage means for storing the history information is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 41 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the MPU 62 in the present embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I / F 101, and a reading terminal 102, as in the first embodiment. Further, the management IC 66 is provided with a management side I / F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, and a management side RAM 114 as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, the correspondence-related memory 116, and the history memory 117. Instead, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 131 as in the third embodiment. Since the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, the correspondence-related memory 116, and the history memory 117, the history information is not stored in the management IC 66 in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the ball entry history to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is stored in the main RAM 65. That is, the main RAM 65, in which the information necessary for executing the program in the main CPU 63 is temporarily stored, is also used as the memory for storing the ball entry history. Then, the management IC 66 can access the main RAM 65 through the management I / F 111, and when a calculation trigger for various parameters occurs, the management IC 66 is accessed to read the ball entry history and read it. Various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history. The various calculated parameters are stored in the calculation result memory 131. When the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, various parameters are provided to the reading device from the calculation result memory 131, but the ball entry history stored in the main RAM 65 is not provided to the reading device. ..

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a ball entry detection process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The ball entry detection process is executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored for the 0th bit D0 has been switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a 1 It is determined that an individual game ball has been detected (step S2301: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2302). The general winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the general winning opening 31 as a winning history. The value of the general winning counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. By the way, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the general winning counter is the value even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the power cutoff state. It is stored in memory. After that, the value of the counter for 10 prize balls of the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2303).

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored for the first bit D1 has been switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a 1 It is determined that the number of game balls has been detected (step S2304: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter of the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2305). After that, the value of the counter for 10 prize balls of the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2306).

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored for the second bit D2 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a 1 It is determined that the number of game balls has been detected (step S2307: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter of the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2308). After that, the value of the counter for 10 prize balls of the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2309).

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored for the third bit D3 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, one game is performed by the special electric detection sensor 45a. It is determined that the sphere has been detected (step S3210: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the special electric winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2311). Further, the value of the special electric winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2312). The special electric winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the special electric winning device 32 as a winning history. The value of the special electric winning counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. By the way, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the special electric winning counter is the value even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the power cutoff state. It is stored in memory. After that, the value of the 15 prize ball counters of the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2313).

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored for the 4th bit D4 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, the first actuating port detection sensor 46a 1 It is determined that an individual game ball has been detected (step S2314: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the first operation winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2315). Further, the value of the first operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2316). The first operation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the first operation port 33 as a ball entry history. The value of the first operation counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. .. By the way, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the first operation counter even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the power cutoff state. Is stored in memory. After that, the value of the one prize ball counter of the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2317).

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored for the 5th bit D5 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, the second actuating port detection sensor 47a is used for 1 It is determined that the number of game balls has been detected (step S2318: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the second operation winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2319). Further, the value of the second operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2320). The second operation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the second operation port 34 as a ball entry history. The value of the second operation counter is cleared to "0" when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. .. By the way, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the second operation counter even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the power cutoff state. Is stored in memory. After that, the value of the one prize ball counter of the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2321).

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored for the 6th bit D6 has been switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one out port detection sensor 48a is used. It is determined that the game ball has been detected (step S2322: YES). In this case, the value of the out counter provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2323). The out counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the out port 24a as an entry history. The value of the out counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. By the way, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the out counter is stored even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the power cutoff state. Be retained.

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored for the 7th bit D7 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, one game is played by the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that the sphere has been detected (step S2324: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the gate winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2325).

By executing the ball entry detection process as described above, the ball entry history to the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is recorded in each ball entry section. It is stored in the main RAM 65 as the number of balls entering the ball. As a result, every time a ball enters any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a signal is sent from the main CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112. No need to output. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the configuration for outputting a signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112.

In the present embodiment, when a calculation trigger occurs, the management side CPU 112 reads the number of balls entered into the general winning opening 31 from the general winning counter of the main RAM 65, and transfers from the special electric winning counter of the main RAM 65 to the special electric winning device 32. The number of balls entered is read, the number of balls entered into the first operating port 33 from the first operation counter of the main RAM 65 is read, and the number of balls entered into the second operating port 34 is read from the second operation counter of the main RAM 65. The number of balls entering the out port 24a is read from the out counter of the main RAM 65. Then, the first parameter to the eighth parameter described in the first embodiment are calculated by using each of the read out numbers of balls. However, the number of each ball entered when the front door frame 14 is open and the number of each ball entered when the front door frame 14 is closed are not measured. Therefore, the first parameter to the eighth parameter are calculated in a state including the number of balls entered when the front door frame 14 is open. Further, since the number of each ball entered in the open / close execution mode and the number of each ball entered in the high frequency support mode are not individually measured, the first parameter to the eighteenth parameter and the twenty-first parameter described in the first embodiment are described above. ~ The 26th parameter is not calculated. The calculated first parameter to eighth parameter are written in the calculation result memory 131. Then, when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, all the parameters written at that time in the calculation result memory 131 are provided to the reading device. At this time, the calculation result memory 131 is cleared to "0".

The management IC 66 does not access the main RAM 65 independently, but information on the number of each ball entered stored in the main RAM 65 as a ball entry history is transmitted to the management IC 66 by transfer control by the main CPU 63. It may be configured as such. In this case, it is possible to reliably prevent the event that the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 access the main RAM 65 at the same time.

<11th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the main control board 61, the type of the signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112, and the method of storing the ball entry history in each ball entry section are different from those in the first embodiment. ing. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 43 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the main control board 61 in the present embodiment. The MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61 as in the first embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I / F 101, and a reading terminal 102, as in the first embodiment. Further, the management IC 66 is provided with a management side I / F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, a management side RAM 114, a correspondence-related memory 116, and a history memory 117, as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115. also. In addition to the MPU 62, the main control board 61 is provided with a light emitting unit 151 for notification. The light emitting unit 151 for notification is directly controlled by the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 can access the history memory 117 of the management IC 66, and calculates various parameters by using the information of the ball entry history to each ball entry unit read from the history memory 117. Then, the light emitting state of the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled according to the contents of the various calculated parameters. The light emitting unit 151 for notification is housed in the accommodation space of the board box 60a of the main control device 60. The board box 60a is transparently formed, and the light emitting state of the light emitting unit 151 for notification is measured outside the board box 60a. A light emitting unit 151 for notification is provided so that it can be visually confirmed from the above. As a result, the gaming machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 so that the main control device 60 can be visually confirmed, so that the light emitting unit 151 for notification does not require opening work of the board box 60a. It is possible to visually confirm the light emitting state of.

FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 in the present embodiment.

A signal of the same type as that of the first embodiment is input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and the second buffer 122b corresponds to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. A signal is input, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. Is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first actuating port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second actuating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. The 6 signals are input, the 7th signal corresponding to the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a is input to the 7th buffer 122g, and the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h as the eighth signal, and the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i as the ninth signal. The signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal, but in the present embodiment, the signal corresponding to these open / close execution modes, the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode, and the front The signal corresponding to the door frame 14 is not input to the input port 121. That is, the signal related to the ball entry history is not input to the 8th to 15th buffers 122h to 122o.

What kind of signal is input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has not been determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the type of these signals is determined by receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. It is specified by the management side CPU 112. The process for specifying the type of the signal is executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, it is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p, and the management CPU 112 outputs to the 16th buffer 122p without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. It is possible to specify that the instruction signal is input.

FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in the present embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with counters 152a to 152o for the first to fifteenth buffers. The first buffer counter 152a stores information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The second buffer counter 152b stores information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The third buffer counter 152c stores information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourth buffer counter 152d stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fifth buffer counter 152e stores information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The sixth buffer counter 152f stores information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 7th buffer counter 152g stores information on the number of times the output state of the 7th signal input to the 7th buffer 122g is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The eighth buffer counter 152h stores information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The ninth buffer counter 152i stores information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The tenth buffer counter 152j stores information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 11th buffer counter 152k stores information on the number of times the output state of the 11th signal input to the 11th buffer 122k is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The twelfth buffer counter 152l stores information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 13th buffer counter 152m stores information on the number of times the output state of the 13th signal input to the 13th buffer 122m is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 14th buffer counter 152n stores information on the number of times the output state of the 14th signal input to the 14th buffer 122n is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 15th buffer counter 152o stores information on the number of times the output state of the 15th signal input to the 15th buffer 122o is changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

However, the measurement target using the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o is any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. These are the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g to which the signal corresponding to the result of entering the ball is input. Therefore, the 8th to 15th buffers 122h to 122o are excluded from the above measurement targets. Distinguishing whether or not these are measurement targets is performed based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a history setting process executed by the management side CPU 112. The history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (FIG. 18).

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S2401). Specifically, the number of correspondence-related areas in the correspondence-related memory 116 in which information other than the information indicating that the correspondence-related areas 123a to 123o are blank is stored is specified and specified. Set the information of the specified number in the confirmation target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, information other than the information indicating that the blank is stored is stored in the first to seventh response areas 123a to 123j as described above. Therefore, in step S2401, "7" is set in the confirmation target counter. do.

After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2402). When the value of the confirmation target counter is "n", the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the confirmation targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is the confirmation target of the numerical information, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first buffer 122a is the confirmation target of the numerical information. ..

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2402, the corresponding buffer counters 152a to 152o are added (step S2403). In the addition process, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the counters 152a to 152o for the first to fifteenth buffers of the history memory 117 is added by one. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth buffer counter 152e is the addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first buffer counter 152a is the addition target.

When a negative determination is made in step S2402, or when the process of step S2403 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S2404). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2405). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S2405: NO), the processing after step S2402 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the value of the new confirmation target counter.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the ball entry history of the game ball into the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is described above. It is not stored as history information as in the first embodiment, but is stored as information on the number of times a game ball is detected by each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. As a result, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 as compared with the configuration in which each history information is individually stored.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an external output process in the present embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112. The external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 18).

When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 reaches the HI level (step S2501: YES), the output target counters provided in the management side RAM 114 are the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to Of the 152o, the number of counters for which the number of times information is output is set in the management side CPU 112 (step S2502). Specifically, the number of correspondence-related areas in the correspondence-related memory 116 in which information other than the information indicating that the correspondence-related areas 123a to 123o are blank is stored is specified and specified. Set the information of the specified number in the confirmation target counter. In the present embodiment, as described above, information other than the information indicating that the blank is stored is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. Therefore, in step S2502, “7” is set in the output target counter. ..

After that, the correspondence information stored in the area corresponding to the value of the current output target counter among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence relation memory 116 is read (step S2503), and for history. Among the counters 152a to 152o for the first to fifteenth buffers in the memory 117, the number of times information stored in the counter corresponding to the value of the current output target counter is read (step S2504). In this case, when the value of the output target counter is "n", the nth correspondence area 123a to 123o is the target for reading the correspondence information, and the nth buffer counters 152a to 152o read the number of times information. Be the target. For example, if the value of the output target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the target for reading the correspondence information, the fifth buffer counter 152e is the target for reading the number of times information, and the value of the output target counter is If it is "1", the first correspondence area 123a is the target for reading the correspondence information, and the first buffer counter 152a is the target for reading the number of times information.

After that, the information output process is executed (step S2505). In the information output process, the combination of the correspondence information read in step S2503 and the number of times information read in step S2504 is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 can read the number of times information about the correspondence information that is the output target this time.

After that, the value of the output target counter of the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S2506). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the output target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2507). When the value of the output target counter is 1 or more (step S2507: NO), the processing after step S2503 is executed for the output target corresponding to the value of the new output target counter. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2507, the values of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o are cleared to "0".

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the parameter management process executed by the main CPU 63. The parameter management process is executed after the management output process of step S219 is executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

First, it is determined whether or not a calculation trigger for various parameters has occurred (step S2601). The calculation trigger is when the parameter management process is executed for the first time after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, and the special electric winning are awarded as in the fifth embodiment. It occurs every time the total number of game balls entered into the device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 reaches 500 or more, which is the trigger reference number. Since the case where the parameter management process is first executed after the supply of operating power is started is set as the calculation trigger, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned off and then turned on again to calculate various parameters. It is possible to easily generate an opportunity. Then, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, notification corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters is executed as described later, so that the game area PA up to that point can be obtained simply by turning the power off and on. It becomes possible to grasp the entry mode of the game ball. In addition, it is possible to finely manage the entry mode of the game balls in the game area PA by configuring the configuration so that a calculation trigger is generated every time the total number of balls entered is 500 or more, which is the trigger reference number. Will be.

When a calculation trigger occurs (step S2601: YES), the ball entry history is read from the counters 152a to 152o for the first to fifteenth buffers of the history memory 117, which are the targets for storing the ball entry history. Specifically, the numerical information of the counters 152a to 152g for the first to seventh buffers is read out. In this case, the main CPU 63 can recognize the buffer counters 152a to 152o to be read out from the ball entry history by the program and data stored in the main ROM 64.

After that, various arithmetic processes are executed (step S2603). In the various calculation processes, various parameters are calculated using the information on the entry history read in step S2602 and the number of prize balls corresponding to the entry history. In the main CPU 63, each ball entry history read in step S2602 by the program and data stored in the main ROM 64 is the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the first. It is possible to specify which of the two operating ports 34 corresponds to, and it is also possible to specify the information on the number of prize balls corresponding to each ball entry history read in step S2602. ..

Specifically, the various parameters calculated in step S2603
7th parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "general""Number of prize balls for winning the prize opening 31" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Second operating port 34" Ratio of "number of prize balls for winning a prize") ・ Eighth parameter: K3 x "number of prize balls for winning a prize in the special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "for winning a prize in the general winning opening 31" Number of prize balls "+ K3 x" Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32 "+ K4 x" Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33 "+ K5 x" Number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34 "") Is calculated.

After that, it is determined whether or not the various calculated parameters are in the first range (step S2604). When the value of the 7th parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the 8th parameter is 0.6 or less, affirmative determination is made in step S2604 assuming that the various calculated parameters are in the first range. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2604, the first notification state setting process is executed (step S2605). In the setting process, the light emitting unit 151 for notification is controlled to emit light so as to be in the first notification state. In this case, the light emitting unit 151 for notification is in a blue light emitting state.

When a negative determination is made in step S2604, it is determined whether or not the calculated parameters are in the second range (step S2606). If only one of the conditions that the value of the 7th parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the 8th parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, the various calculated parameters are the first. Assuming that there are two ranges, an affirmative determination is made in step S2606. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2606, the second notification state setting process is executed (step S2607). In the setting process, the light emitting unit 151 for notification is controlled to emit light so as to be in the second notification state. In this case, the light emitting unit 151 for notification is in a yellow light emitting state.

When a negative determination is made in step S2606, it means that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6. In this case, the third notification state setting process is executed (step S2608). In the setting process, the light emitting unit 151 for notification is controlled to emit light so as to be in the third notification state. In this case, the light emitting unit 151 for notification is in a red light emitting state.

In the light emitting state set in step S2605, step S2607 or step S2608, the supply of the operating power to the notification light emitting unit 151 is stopped until a new notification state is set for the notification light emitting unit 151. Continue until. Further, since the notification state of the notification light emitting unit 151 is stored and held in the main RAM 65 and the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and the notification light emitting unit Even if 151 is turned off once, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed, the light emitting state corresponds to the type of information in the notification state stored in the main RAM 65. The light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 151 is executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The entry history of the game ball into the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is stored as history information as in the first embodiment. However, it is stored as the number of times information that the game ball is detected by each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. As a result, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 as compared with the configuration in which each history information is individually stored.

A notification light emitting unit 151 for notifying the contents corresponding to various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 is provided. As a result, the contents corresponding to various parameters are notified by the pachinko machine 10 itself, so that the manager of the game hall or the like does not have to read the information stored in the history memory 117 to read the information of the game ball in the game area PA. It becomes possible to grasp the ball entry mode.

The main control board 61 housed in the board box 60a is provided with a light emitting unit 151 for notification together with the MPU 62. This makes it difficult to illegally access the communication path between the MPU 62 and the light emitting unit 151 for notification.

Calculation of various parameters and light emission control of the light emitting unit 151 for notification are executed not by the management side CPU 112 but by the main side CPU 63. This makes it possible to improve the reliability of the notification content in the notification light emitting unit 151.

When the calculation results of various parameters correspond to the first range, the first notification state is set, and when the calculation results of various parameters correspond to the second range, the second notification state is set, and the calculation results of various parameters are displayed. When neither the first range nor the second range is supported, the third notification state is set. That is, the various parameters are not notified as they are, but the contents corresponding to the range including the various parameters are notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification pattern in the notification light emitting unit 151 from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification light emitting unit 151.

Even when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped by continuing the power supply to the notification light emitting unit 151. It may be configured to maintain the light emitting state in. In this case, even when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, by checking the notification light emitting unit 151, it is possible to grasp the entry mode of the game ball in the game area PA. ..

Further, instead of the configuration, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the notification light emitting unit 151 is turned off, but when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. May be configured such that the light emitting unit 151 for notification is controlled to emit light so as to be in a light emitting state corresponding to the results of various parameters calculated before the supply of operating power is stopped. In this case, for example, by checking the notification light emitting unit 151 in the game hall before the start of business, it is possible to grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball on the immediately preceding business day.

The notification means for notifying the calculation results of various parameters is not limited to the configuration of the notification light emitting unit 151, and may be a display device having a display surface such as a symbol display device 41, or a speaker unit 54. May be. Further, the signal corresponding to the calculation result of various parameters may be externally output to the hall computer HC of the game hall through the external terminal board 97.

The special figure display unit 37a of the special figure unit 37 or the normal figure display unit 38a of the normal figure unit 38 may also have a function as a light emitting unit 151 for notification. For example, various parameters are calculated when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started, and the calculation result is included in the first range, the second range, or any other of them as in the above embodiment. Immediately after the start of supply of the operating power, the special figure display unit 37a or the normal figure display unit 38a may be configured to execute the notification corresponding to the calculation result. In this case, the notification may be configured to end when the start condition of the variable display of the pattern on the special figure display unit 37a or the start condition of the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 38a is satisfied. The configuration may be such that it is temporarily interrupted when the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, and restarted when the variable display of the pattern is completed. According to this configuration, the special figure display unit 37a or the normal map display unit 38a can also be used as a notification means for notifying the entry mode of the game ball in the game area PA.

The notification light emitting unit 151 may be provided at a position where it can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are closed. For example, the light emitting unit 151 for notification may be provided at a position behind the pachinko machine 10 behind the window panel 52 and visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52. In this case, it is possible to confirm the notification contents corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters without requiring the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for providing the information of each ball entry result to the management IC 66 is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a signal path for inputting the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a to the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66.

The detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the main CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. Further, the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the main CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. Further, the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the main CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. Further, the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fourth signal path SL14. Further, the detection result of the first actuating port detection sensor 46a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. Further, the detection result of the second actuating port detection sensor 47a is input to the main CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. Further, the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a is input to the main CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

The first branch path SL21 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the first signal path SL11, and the first branch path SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, the second branch path SL22 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the second signal path SL12, and the second branch path SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, the third branch path SL23 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the third signal path SL13, and the third branch path SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, the fourth branch path SL24 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fourth signal path SL14, and the fourth branch path SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, the fifth branch path SL25 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fifth signal path SL15, and the fifth branch path SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, the sixth branch path SL26 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the sixth signal path SL16, and the sixth branch path SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, the seventh branch path SL27 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the seventh signal path SL17, and the seventh branch path SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC 66.

With the above configuration, the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the management IC 66 without intervening processing by the main CPU 63. As a result, the main CPU 63 executes a process for causing the management side CPU 112 to recognize the ball entry results of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main CPU 63.

Further, the branch points of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the signal paths SL11 to SL17 exist in the MPU 62. This makes it difficult to access the branch point and each branch route SL21 to SL27 from the outside, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts that cause an abnormal entry result to be input only to the management IC 66. ..

<13th embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is provided in the MPU 62 of the main control board 61, but the management IC 66 is not provided in the present embodiment. Instead, the main CPU 63 executes a process for managing the history of ball entry into each of the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 50 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the main control device 60 and the voice emission control device 81 in the present embodiment.

Similar to the first embodiment, the MPU 62 is provided on the main control board 61 of the main control device 60. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65 and an I / F 101 as in the first embodiment, but is not provided with a management IC 66. The I / F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via the internal bus 103. The detection results from the sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a and the commands from the payout side CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62 through the input port of the I / F 101, and based on the input detection results and the contents of the commands. As described above, various processes are executed by the main CPU 63. Further, when a signal is output to devices such as the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a as a result of executing various processes on the main CPU 63, the signal output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101. At the same time, when a command is output to the payout side CPU 92 and the voice emission control device 81 as a result of executing various processes on the main side CPU 63, the command output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101.

The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the hall computer HC via the external terminal board 97 as in the first embodiment. Here, in the first embodiment, the signal is externally output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC, but the signal is not output from the hall computer HC to the main CPU 63. However, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 63 is not output. A signal is externally output to the hall computer HC, and a signal is output from the hall computer HC to the main CPU 63. The type of signal externally output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC, that is, the content of the information externally output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC is the same as that of the first embodiment. Although the details will be described later from the hall computer HC to the main CPU 63, it is instructed to execute the calculation of various parameters by using the ball entry history to each entry section 24a, 31 to 34 and notify the calculation result. An instruction signal for starting the check is output.

During the execution of the calculation using the ball entry history and the execution of the notification of the calculation result, the execution mode of the display control of the symbol display device 41 becomes the corresponding mode. The execution instruction of the display control is executed by the voice emission control device 81 based on the command transmitted from the main CPU 63. Regarding the voice emission control device 81, in detail, the voice emission control device 81 includes a voice emission control board 161 on which the MPU 162 is mounted. The MPU 162 of the voice emission control board 161 includes a sound light side ROM 164, a sound light side RAM 165, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and data input / output, in addition to the sound light side CPU 163 which is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. It has a built-in circuit.

The sound-light side ROM 164 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory, and is used only for reading. The sound light side ROM 164 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the sound light side CPU 163.

The sound-light side RAM 165 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The sound light side RAM 165 can be randomly accessed, and the time required for reading is faster than that of the sound light side ROM 164 when compared with the same data capacity. The sound light side RAM 165 temporarily stores various data and the like for the execution of the control program stored in the sound light side ROM 164.

The sound light side CPU 163 receives a command from the main side CPU 63, but does not send a command to the main side CPU 63. The sound / light side CPU 163 receives a variation command, a type command, and an opening command from the main side CPU 63 as in the first embodiment. When the sound / light side CPU 163 receives these commands, it executes a process of determining an effect corresponding to the received command, and executes light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 according to the determined contents. .. Further, the command corresponding to the determined content is transmitted to the display control device 82. The display control device 82 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 according to the content of the received command.

In addition to the above commands, the sound light side CPU 163 receives a demo start command and a check start command from the main side CPU 63. The demo start command is a command instructing to start the demo production. The demonstration effect is a start that is started by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 when a predetermined period (for example, 10 sec) has elapsed since the end of the previous game round. It is a waiting production. In the start waiting effect, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 execute an effect different from the effect for the game round and the effect for the open / close execution mode. The check start command will be described in detail later, but it corresponds to the execution mode of the display control of the symbol display device 41 during the execution of the calculation using the management result of the ball entry history and the execution of the notification of the calculation result. It is a command instructing that the mode is set.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process of the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63.

In steps S2701 to S2705, the same processing as in steps S201 to S205 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8) in the first embodiment is executed. After that, the check process is executed (step S2706). Although the details of the check process will be described later, the process for notifying the calculation result is executed while performing the calculation of various parameters by using the ball entry history to each entry section 24a, 31 to 34.

After that, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped or the check result is displayed (step S2707). When it is confirmed that a predetermined event (for example, detection of an illegal radio wave or detection of an illegal vibration) has occurred in the fraud detection process (step S2705) as in the first embodiment, the main RAM 65 By setting "1" in the game stop flag of, it is determined in step S2707 that the game is stopped. When it is confirmed that the occurrence of the predetermined event has been canceled, the game stop flag is cleared to "0", so that it is not determined in step S2707 that the game is stopped. The check result display period is a period during which the calculation results of various parameters executed by using the ball entry history to each entry section 24a, 31 to 34 are notified, and the notification is made in step S2706. Is set to the check result display period when is started, and the check result display period is canceled when the notification is terminated in step S2706.

If a negative determination is made in step S2707, the processes of steps S2708 to S2719 are executed in order to advance the game. Specifically, in step S2708, the port output process is executed in the same manner as in step S207 in the first embodiment, and in step S2709, the read process is executed in the same manner as in step S208 in the first embodiment, and step S2710. In step S2711, the timer update process is executed in the same manner as in step S210 in the first embodiment, and in step S2712, the launch control process is executed in the same manner as in step S211 in the first embodiment. In step S2713, the input state monitoring process is executed in the same manner as in step S212 in the first embodiment, in step S2714, the special electric power control process is executed, and in step S2715, step S214 in the first embodiment is executed. In step S2716, the display control process is executed in the same manner as in step S215 in the first embodiment, and in step S2717, the display control process is executed in the same manner as in step S216 in the first embodiment. The payout state reception process is executed, and in step S2718, the payout output process is executed in the same manner as in step S217 in the first embodiment, and in step S2719, the external information setting process is performed in the same manner as in step S218 in the first embodiment. Run.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2707, the processes of steps S2708 to S2719 are not executed. As a result, if the game is stopped in the fraud detection process of step S2705, or if the check result display period is set in the check process of step S2706, the game is advanced. Therefore, some of the necessary processes will not be executed.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process executed in step S2714.

First, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the demo display (step S2801). When the demo display is not performed and a predetermined period (for example, 10 sec) has elapsed since the end of the previous game round, it is determined that the demo display start timing is reached. When it is the start timing of the demo display (step S2801: YES), the demo start command is transmitted to the sound / light side CPU 163 (step S2802).

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an effect control process executed by the sound / light side CPU 163. The effect control process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec). When the sound / light side CPU 163 receives the demo start command from the main side CPU 63 (step S2902: YES), the sound / light side CPU 163 executes the effect determination process for the demo (step S2903). In the effect determination process for the demo, the data table of the demo effect is read from the sound / light side ROM 164 to the sound / light side RAM 165. Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the demonstration effect is executed in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. After that, the demo start command is transmitted to the display control device 82 (step S2904). By receiving the demo start command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display effect for the demo effect is executed.

Returning to the description of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 52), when a negative determination is made in step S2801 or when the process of step S2802 is executed, the hold information acquisition process is executed (step S2803). In the holding information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, and if a winning has occurred, the number of holdings in the holding storage area 65a is the upper limit. It is determined whether or not the value is less than the value (“4” in the present embodiment). If the number of holdings is less than the upper limit, the number of holdings is added by 1, and the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S2702 is used for holding. It is stored in the first holding area of the free holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the area RE. If the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are winning at the same time, the process for acquiring the hold information is performed within the range in which the hold information acquisition process is executed once. Run multiple times.

Further, when a new acquisition of the hold information is performed, an acquisition command corresponding to the acquisition is transmitted to the sound / light side CPU 163. When the sound / light side CPU 163 receives the acquisition command, it transmits the command corresponding to the acquisition command to the display control device 82 in another process (step S2914) in the effect control process (FIG. 53). Upon receiving the command, the display control device 82 changes the display mode in the hold display area Ga (FIG. 66 (b)) in the symbol display device 41 to a display mode corresponding to the increase in the hold information. The details of the reserved display area Ga will be described later.

After that, the information of the special figure special electric counter provided in the main RAM 65 is read (step S2804), and the special figure special electric address table provided in the main ROM 64 is read (step S2805). Then, the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special electric counter is acquired from the special figure special electric address table (step S2806), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address among the processes of steps S2808 to S2814 (step S2807). ). The special figure special electric counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to grasp which of the various processes of steps S2808 to S2814 should be executed, and the special figure special electric address table is a special figure special electric counter. Corresponding to the numerical information, the start address of the program for executing the process of step S2808 to step S2814 is set.

In step S2808, the special figure change start process is executed. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the special figure fluctuation start processing.

In the special figure fluctuation start process, the data setting process is executed on condition that the number of hold information stored in the hold area RE is 1 or more (step S3001: YES) (step S3002). In the data setting process, the number of holds is first subtracted by 1, and the data stored in the first hold area RE1 of the hold area RE is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first hold area RE1 to the fourth hold area RE4 to the lower area side, clearing the data of the first hold area RE1 and the second. The data in each area is shifted such as the holding area RE2 → the first holding area RE1, the third holding area RE3 → the second holding area RE2, the fourth holding area RE4 → the third holding area RE3. At this time, a shift command for recognizing that the data in the hold area has been shifted is transmitted to the sound / light side CPU 163. When the sound / light side CPU 163 receives the shift command, it transmits the command corresponding to the shift command to the display control device 82 in another process (step S2914) in the effect control process (FIG. 53). Upon receiving the command, the display control device 82 changes the display mode in the hold display area Ga (FIG. 66 (b)) in the symbol display device 41 to a display mode corresponding to the decrease in the hold information. The details of the reserved display area Ga will be described later.

Returning to the description of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 54), after executing the data setting process, the pass / fail determination process is executed (step S3003). In the win / fail determination process, it is first determined whether or not the win / fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, the hit / fail table for the high probability mode provided in the main ROM 64 is referred to, and among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for hit / fail determination, that is, the hit random number counter C1 is related. It is determined whether or not the numerical information matches the jackpot numerical information for high probability. Further, in the case of the low probability mode, the numerical information related to the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is for low probability by referring to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode provided in the main ROM 64. Judge whether or not it matches the jackpot numerical information.

If the result of the hit / fail determination process is the jackpot winning result (step S3004: YES), the distribution determination process is executed (step S3005). In the distribution determination process, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for distribution determination, that is, the numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2 is read out. Then, with reference to the distribution table provided in the main ROM 64, it is specified which jackpot result corresponds to the numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2 read out. Specifically, it is specified which of the low probability jackpot result, the low winning high probability jackpot result, and the most advantageous jackpot result corresponds to.

After that, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S3006). Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in the game round related to the start of this fluctuation is stored in the main ROM 64 in advance from the stop result table for the jackpot result. It is specified, and the specified information is written to the main RAM 65. In the stop result table for the big hit result, the information of the mode of the picture stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a is set differently for each type of the big hit result.

After that, the flag set process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (step S3007). Specifically, the main RAM 65 is provided with a flag corresponding to each type of jackpot result, and in step S3007, among the flags corresponding to each type of jackpot result, the distribution determination process of step S3005 is performed. Set "1" to the flag corresponding to the result.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3004 that the result is not the jackpot winning result, the stop result setting process for the loss result is executed (step S3008). Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in the game round related to the start of this fluctuation is stored in advance in the main ROM 64 from the stop result table for the deviation result. It is specified, and the specified information is written to the main RAM 65. The information on the aspect of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result.

After executing any of the processes of step S3007 and step S3008, the process of grasping the duration of the game times is executed (step S3009). In such processing, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated by the symbol display device 41 in this game round. Specifically, when the game times related to the start of the fluctuation this time are the low probability jackpot result or the most advantageous jackpot result, it is determined that the reach display occurs. Further, if it is not the result of any big hit and the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is the numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that the reach display occurs.

When it is determined that the reach display will occur, the duration of the game times corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach generation duration table stored in the main ROM 64. .. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the continuation of the game times corresponding to the numerical information of the variation type counter CS this time is continued by referring to the reach non-occurrence duration table stored in the main ROM 64. Get the period. Incidentally, the duration of the game times that can be acquired by referring to the reach non-occurrence duration table is different from the duration of the game times that can be acquired by referring to the reach generation duration table.

The duration of the game times when the reach does not occur is set so that the larger the number of hold information stored in the hold area RE, the shorter the duration of the game times. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the duration of the shorter game times is selected as compared with the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. A duration table for non-reach is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the duration of the game may not change depending on the number of reserved information and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Further, the above configuration may be applied to the duration of the game times when the reach occurs. Further, in the case of various jackpot results, the duration table may be set individually for each of the case of the out-of-reach case and the case of the out-of-reach non-occurrence case. In this case, the duration of the game is distributed according to the result of each game.

After that, the information on the duration of the game times acquired in step S3009 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3010). The update of the numerical information set in the special figure special electric timer counter is executed in the timer update process (step S2711). By the way, as an effect for the game round, the variable display of the pattern on the special symbol display unit 37a and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 are performed, and when each of these variable displays is completed, the variable display is performed. The final stop is displayed over the final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec) in the state where the stop result of is displayed (in the symbol display device 41, a predetermined combination of symbols is waiting on the effective line). In this case, the duration of the game rounds acquired in step S3009 is the total time for one game round.

After that, the variation command and the type command are transmitted to the sound / light side CPU 163 (step S3011). The variable command includes information on the duration of the game. Here, as described above, the duration of the game times acquired by referring to the reach non-occurrence duration table is different from the duration of the game times acquired by referring to the reach generation duration table. Even if the variation command does not include the information on whether or not the reach has occurred, the sound and light side CPU 163 can specify the presence or absence of the reach from the information on the duration of the game times. In this respect, it can be said that the variable command contains information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. It should be noted that the variable command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred. In addition, the type command includes information on the game result.

When the sound / light side CPU 163 receives the variation command and the type command from the main side CPU 63, the sound / light side CPU 163 executes the effect determination process for the game round by making an affirmative determination in step S2905 of the effect control process (FIG. 53). S2906). In the effect determination process for the game round, the effect lottery process according to the contents of the variable command and the type command received this time is executed. Further, the data table corresponding to the combination of the contents of the variable command and the type command received this time and the result of the effect lottery process is read from the sound light side ROM 164 to the sound light side RAM 165. Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the main CPU 63 executes the effect for the game round in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 over the duration of the game round determined this time. After that, the variation pattern command corresponding to the type of the data table read in step S2906 is transmitted to the display control device 82 (step S2907). By receiving the variation pattern command, the display control device 82 starts the variation display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 to start the effect for the game round on the symbol display device 41, and the variation pattern command received this time. The symbol display device 41 is displayed and controlled so that the effect for the game round corresponding to the above is executed.

Returning to the description of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 54), after the process of step S3011 is executed, the variation display of the pattern on the special figure display unit 37a is started (step S3012). Then, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S3013). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "0" when the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1" when the processing of step S3013 is executed. ".

Returning to the description of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 52), in step S2809, the special figure changing process is executed. In the special figure change processing, it is determined whether or not the timing is before the final stop display during the duration of the game round, and if it is before the final stop display, the display mode of the pattern on the special figure display unit 37a is ruled. Execute the process to change the target. When it is time to display the final stop, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1, so that the numerical information of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the special figure changing process to the special figure fixing process. Update to one. In this embodiment, the final stop command is not transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound / light side CPU 163.

In step S2810, the process during the determination of the special figure is executed. In the process of determining the special figure, the display mode of the pattern on the special figure display unit 37a is set to the display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game round. Further, in the process during the determination of the special figure, it is determined whether or not the final stop period has elapsed, and if the period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs. If the transition to the open / close execution mode does not occur, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0". When the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1, so that the numerical information of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the special figure confirmation processing to the one corresponding to the special electric start processing. Update.

In step S2811, the special electric start processing is executed. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the special electric start processing.

In the special electric power start processing, when the processing for starting the opening period in the opening / closing execution mode of this time has not been executed yet (step S3101: NO), the setting processing of the opening period is executed (step S3102). In the set processing, the information of the opening period (for example, 5 sec) is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 65. Further, the opening command is transmitted to the sound / light side CPU 163 (step S3103).

When the sound / light side CPU 163 receives the opening command from the main side CPU 63, the sound / light side CPU 163 executes the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode by making an affirmative determination in step S2908 of the effect control process (FIG. 53) (step S2909). In the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode, the data table for the open / close execution mode is read from the sound light side ROM 164 to the sound light side RAM 165. Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the effect for the open / close execution mode is executed in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. After that, the opening command is transmitted to the display control device 82 (step S2910). By receiving the opening command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display effect for the open / close execution mode is executed.

The effect for the open / close execution mode includes an effect of the opening period that occurs when the open / close execution mode is started, an effect of the open / close period in which the opening / closing of the special electric winning device 32 is repeated after that, and an effect of the open / close execution mode ends. It includes the production of the ending period that occurs when doing so. For example, in the symbol display device 41, an image indicating that the opening / closing execution mode has been started is displayed in the effect of the opening period, and an image indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is opened / closed is displayed in the effect of the opening / closing period. In the production of the ending period, an image indicating that the open / close execution mode ends is displayed. Further, the opening command includes information indicating the type of the jackpot result that triggered the start of the opening / closing execution mode this time, and the sound / light side CPU 163 and the display control device 82 refer to the information to obtain the jackpot result. The effect for the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type is executed.

Returning to the description of the special electric power start process (FIG. 55), when the opening period has elapsed (step S3104: YES), the start process for starting the first round game is executed (step S3105). In the start processing, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and the end condition of the round game is set. When setting this end condition, the upper limit duration when the special electric winning device 32 in the first round game of this time is continued in the open state is set in the special electric special electric timer counter of the main RAM 65, and the first round of this time. In the game, the upper limit number of game balls that can be won in the special electric winning device 32 is set in the winning number counter provided in the main RAM 65. The upper limit duration set in the special figure special electric timer counter is updated by the timer update process (step S2711) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), and the upper limit number set in the winning number counter is the winning to the special electric winning device 32. Is subtracted by 1 each time. After that, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special electric power counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric power start processing to the one corresponding to the special electric power opening processing (step S3106).

Returning to the description of the special power special electric control process (FIG. 52), in step S2812, the special electric power open processing is executed. In the processing during the opening of the special electric power, it is determined whether or not the end condition of the round game is satisfied. If the end condition is satisfied, the special electric winning device 32 is closed. Then, if the round game ended this time is not the round game of the last execution time, the numerical information of the special electric counter is added by 1 to change the numerical information of the counter from the one corresponding to the special electric opening processing to the special electric closing processing. If the round game that ended this time is the round game of the last execution time, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is added by 2 to correspond to the processing while the special electric is open. Update from the one corresponding to the special train end processing.

In step S2813, the processing during closing of the special electric train is executed. In the special electric closed processing, it is determined whether or not the interval period between round games has elapsed. The interval period is set in the special electric timer counter of the main RAM 65 when the previous round game ends, and the set value is updated in the timer update process (step S2711) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51). To. When the interval period has elapsed, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and the end condition of the round game is set. Then, by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric closed processing to the one corresponding to the special electric opening processing.

In step S2814, the special electric power termination process is executed. In the special electric end processing, if the processing for starting the ending period in the opening / closing execution mode of this time has not been executed yet, the information of the ending period (for example, 5 sec) is set in the special electric special electric timer counter of the main RAM 65, and the special electric electric timer counter is set. The ending command is transmitted to the sound / light side CPU 163. When the sound light side CPU 163 receives the ending command from the main side CPU 63, the data table for the ending period is transferred from the sound light side ROM 164 to the sound light side RAM 165 in another process (step S2914) of the effect control process (FIG. 53). read out. Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the effect of the ending period is executed in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. After that, the ending command is transmitted to the display control device 82. By receiving the ending command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display effect of the ending period is executed.

Next, the ball entry detection process executed in step S2710 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51) in the main CPU 63 will be described.

First, the normal counter area 171, the open / close execution mode counter area 172, and the high frequency support mode counter area 173 provided in the main RAM 65 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. In each of these areas 171 to 173, the general winning counters 171a, 172a, 173a, the special electric winning counters 171b, 172b, 173b, the first operating counters 171c, 172c, 173c, the second operating counters 171d, 172d, 173d, and Out counters 171e, 172e, and 173e are provided. The general winning counters 171a, 172a, and 173a are counters for measuring the number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The special electric winning counters 171b, 172b, and 173b are counters for measuring the number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The first operation counters 171c, 172c, and 173c are counters for measuring the number of game balls entering the first operation port 33 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The second operation counters 171d, 172d, and 173d are counters for measuring the number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The out counters 171e, 172e, and 173e are counters for measuring the number of game balls entering the out port 24a from a predetermined measurement start trigger.

Each of the counters 171a to 171e of the normal counter area 171 is a target ball entry portion 24a, in a situation where the front door frame 14 is in a closed state and is neither an open / close execution mode nor a high frequency support mode. It is used to measure the number of game balls that have entered 31 to 34. Each of the counters 172a to 172e in the counter area 172 for the open / close execution mode enters the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34, which are the targets in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and the open / close execution mode is in the open / close execution mode. It is used to measure the number of game balls that have been balled. Each of the counters 173a to 173e in the counter area 173 for the high frequency support mode is a ball entry portion 24a, 31 to 34, which is a target in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and the counter area 173 is in the high frequency support mode. It is used to measure the number of game balls that have entered the door. The situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state is not subject to measurement because the game ball enters the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 with the front door frame 14 open. This is to exclude the number of balls entered from the measurement target when the ball is hit.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a ball entry detection process executed in step S2710 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51) in the main CPU 63.

In the ball entry detection process, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state (step S3201: YES), the normal ball entry detection process (step S3204), the ball entry detection process in the open / close execution mode (step S3205), and the ball entry detection process. None of the ball entry detection processes (step S3206) in the high frequency support mode is executed. Since the game area PA is formed by the space divided back and forth by the back surface of the window panel 52 provided on the front door frame 14 and the front surface of the game board 24, when the front door frame 14 is opened. Even if the game area PA is opened toward the front and the game ball is launched toward the game area PA in that situation, the game ball cannot normally flow down the game area PA. In addition, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state and the game ball enters the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34, the game hall manager may use it for maintenance and to solve the problem. This is a case where the front door frame 14 is opened and a game ball enters due to maintenance or the like. Since the entry of such a game ball is not the entry of a game ball in the normal game execution status, it is not necessary to manage the entry of such a game ball. Therefore, in the ball entry detection process, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state as described above, none of the processes of steps S3204 to S3206 is executed.

When the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is neither in the open / close execution mode nor the high frequency support mode (steps S3201 to S3203: NO), a normal ball entry detection process is executed (step S3204). Further, when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is in the open / close execution mode (step S3201: NO, step S3202: YES), the ball entry detection process in the open / close execution mode is executed (step S3205). Further, when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is in the high frequency support mode (step S3201: NO, step S3203: YES), the ball entry detection process in the high frequency support mode is executed (step S3206).

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a normal ball entry detection process in step S3204.

When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a (step S3301: YES), when it is determined that one game ball is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a (step S3301: YES). Step S3304: YES) or when it is determined that one game ball is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a (step S3307: YES), the value of the general winning counter 171a for normal use is added by 1 (step). S3302, step S3305, step S3308). Further, the value of the 10 prize ball counters of the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S3303, step S3306, step S3309). If the ball entry detection process is in the open / close execution mode, the value of the general winning counter 172a for the open / close execution mode is added by 1 as the process corresponding to step S3302, step S3305, and step S3308, and the entry in the high frequency support mode is entered. In the case of the ball detection process, the value of the general winning counter 173a for the high frequency support mode is added by 1 as the process corresponding to step S3302, step S3305, and step S3308.

When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a (step S3310: YES), after setting "1" to the special electric winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S3311), the special electric winning for normal use The value of the counter 171b is added by 1 (step S3312). Further, the value of the 15 prize ball counters of the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S3313). If the ball entry detection process is in the open / close execution mode, the value of the special electric winning counter 172b for the open / close execution mode is added by 1 as the process corresponding to step S3312, and if the ball entry detection process is in the high frequency support mode. As a process corresponding to step S3312, the value of the special electric winning counter 173b for the high frequency support mode is added by 1.

When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the first operation port detection sensor 46a (step S3314: YES), after setting "1" to the first operation winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S3315), The value of the first operation counter 171c for normal use is added by 1 (step S3316). Further, the value of the one prize ball counter of the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S3317). If the ball entry detection process is in the open / close execution mode, the value of the first operation counter 172c for the open / close execution mode is added by 1 as the process corresponding to step S3316, and the ball entry detection process is performed in the high frequency support mode. For example, as a process corresponding to step S3316, the value of the first operation counter 173c for the high frequency support mode is added by 1.

When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a (step S3318: YES), after setting "1" to the second operating winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S3319), The value of the second operation counter 171d for normal use is added by 1 (step S3320). Further, the value of the one prize ball counter of the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S3321). If the ball entry detection process is in the open / close execution mode, the value of the second operation counter 172d for the open / close execution mode is added by 1 as the process corresponding to step S3320, and the ball entry detection process is in the high frequency support mode. For example, as a process corresponding to step S3320, the value of the second operation counter 173d for the high frequency support mode is added by 1.

When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the out port detection sensor 48a (step S3322: YES), the value of the normal out counter 171e is added by 1 (step S3323). If the ball entry detection process is in the open / close execution mode, the value of the out counter 172e for the open / close execution mode is added by 1 as the process corresponding to step S3323, and if the ball entry detection process is in the high frequency support mode, the step is taken. As a process corresponding to S3323, the value of the out counter 173e for the high frequency support mode is added by 1.

When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a (step S3324: YES), "1" is set in the gate winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S3325).

By executing the ball entry detection process as described above, the number of game balls entered into the general winning opening 31 is measured using the general winning counters 171a, 172a, 173a, and the game to the special electric winning device 32 is performed. The number of balls entered is measured using the special electric winning counters 171b, 172b, 173b, and the number of game balls entered into the first operating port 33 is measured using the first operating counters 171c, 172c, 173c. , The number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 is measured using the second operation counters 171d, 172d, 173d, and the number of game balls entering the out port 24a is the out counters 171e, 172e, 173e. It is measured using. This makes it possible for the main CPU 63 to grasp the history of ball entry into each of the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34. Further, since the counter area 171 for normal use, the counter area 172 for open / close execution mode, and the counter area 173 for high frequency support mode are provided separately, the situation is that it is neither the open / close execution mode nor the high frequency support mode. It is possible for the main CPU 63 to grasp the history of ball entry into each of the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 by distinguishing between the situation of the open / close execution mode and the situation of the high frequency support mode.

Next, the check process executed in step S2706 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51) in the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 59.

When it is neither the display period of the check result nor the check waiting period (step S3401 and step S3402: NO), it is determined whether or not the check start instruction signal is received from the hall computer HC via the external terminal board 97 (step S3401 and step S3402: NO). Step S3403). As already explained, the check start instruction signal is a hole for instructing to execute the calculation of various parameters by using the ball entry history to each entry section 24a, 31 to 34 and to notify the calculation result. It is output from the computer HC. The opportunity for the hall computer HC to output the check start instruction signal is arbitrary. For example, the manager of the game hall performs a predetermined operation on the hall computer HC to check all the pachinko machines 10 in the game hall. The start instruction signal may be output, or the hall computer HC may output the check start instruction signal to all pachinko machines 10 at a predetermined time. The check start instruction signal may be output from the hall computer HC to all the pachinko machines 10 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the previous check start instruction signal was transmitted.

When the check start instruction signal is received (step S3403: YES), the game ball launch prohibition process is executed (step S3404). As a result, even if the launch operation device 28 performs an operation for launching the game ball in a situation where the game ball is normally stored in the upper plate 55a, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27. It will be in a state where it will not be damaged. The state in which the launch of the game ball is prohibited is released when the notification of the calculation results of various parameters using the ball entry history to each entry unit 24a, 31 to 34 is completed.

After that, the interruption processing of the game times is executed (step S3405). In the interruption process of the game round, if the game round is not executed, the start of a new game round and the new start of the demo display are prohibited. As a result, even if the reserved information is newly acquired in the situation where the game round is not executed, the start of the game round triggered by the reserved information is waited for, and the new start of the demo display is also waited for. It should be noted that the execution of step S2802 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 52) is blocked, so that a new start of the demo display is prohibited.

Further, in the game round interruption process, if the game round is being executed, the measurement of the duration of the game round measured by the main CPU 63 is stopped. Specifically, during the execution of the game round, the duration of the game round is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 65, and the value of this special special electric timer counter is the timer of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51). It will be updated periodically in the update process (step S2711), but the update of the special figure special electric timer counter by this timer update process is stopped. When the interruption process of the game times is executed, the process for starting the game times and the process for advancing the game times are not executed in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 52). However, even if the interruption process of the game round is executed, the hold information acquisition process (step S2803) in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 52) is executed.

After that, the interruption processing of the open / close execution mode is executed (step S3406). In the interrupt processing of the open / close execution mode, the start of a new open / close execution mode is prohibited if the open / close execution mode is not executed. Further, in the interrupt processing of the open / close execution mode, if the open / close execution mode is being executed, the measurement of the opening period, the upper limit duration of the round game, the interval period, or the ending period measured by the main CPU 63 is stopped. .. Specifically, during the opening period, the opening period is set in the special electric timer counter of the main RAM 65, and the upper limit duration of the special electric winning device 32 during the execution of the round game is the special electric timer of the main RAM 65. It is set in the counter, the interval period is set in the special electric timer counter of the main RAM 65 between a plurality of round games, and the ending period is set in the special electric timer counter of the main RAM 65 in the ending period. The value of this special figure special electric timer counter is periodically updated in the timer update process (step S2711) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), but the special figure special electric timer counter is updated by this timer update process. Stop. Further, in the interruption process of the open / close execution mode, if the special electric winning device 32 is in the open state, the special electric winning device 32 is closed. When the interruption process of the open / close execution mode is executed, the process for starting the open / close execution mode and the process for advancing the open / close execution mode are not executed in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 52). .. However, even if the interruption process of the open / close execution mode is executed, the hold information acquisition process (step S2803) in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 52) is executed.

After that, the interruption processing of the Fuzu Fuden control is executed (step S3407). In the interrupt processing of the normal map display unit 38a, if the normal power display unit 38a is not in the variable display state and the normal power display unit 34a is not in the normal power open state, a new variable display time of the normal map display unit 38a is performed. Prohibit the start. As a result, even if the value of the Fuden accessory opening counter C4 is newly acquired in the situation where the control of the Fuzu Fuden is not executed, the new fluctuation display time of the Fuzu display unit 38a triggered by the value is obtained. The start of is awaited. Further, in the interruption process of the normal map normal electric control, if the change display of the normal figure display unit 38a is in progress, the update of the timer of the main RAM 65 measuring the change display period is stopped. Further, in the interruption processing of the normal electric utility control, if the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the general electric accessory 34a is closed and the update of the opening time of the general electric accessory 34a is stopped. Even if the interruption process of the normal power control is executed, the value of the normal power charge opening counter C4 is stored in the normal power holding area 65c for the occurrence of the game ball entering the second operating port 34. The process is executed.

After that, the storage process of the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is executed (step S3408). In the storage process, the data indicating the current display content in the special figure display unit 37a is stored in the main RAM 65, and the data indicating the current display content in the normal figure display unit 38a is stored in the main RAM 65. After that, the start processing of the check waiting display of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is executed (step S3409). In the start processing of the check waiting display, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a are set to the display contents for notifying that the current state is the check waiting period. The check waiting period is a calculation of various parameters using the ball entry history to each ball entry unit 24a, 31 to 34 for the reception of the check start instruction signal after receiving the check start instruction signal from the hall computer HC. It is the waiting period until the notification of the result is started.

Here, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a will be described.

First, the special figure display unit 37a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 60 (a). FIG. 60A is a front view of the special figure display unit 37a. The special figure display unit 37a is provided with seven display segments 181 to 187. Each display segment 181 to 187 has an individual light source composed of LEDs, and by controlling the on / off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment 181 to 187. In addition, any combination of display segments 181 to 187 can be turned on. Since all of the above individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments 181 to 187, but the present invention is not limited to this. , Different colors may be displayed in each of the display segments 181 to 187, or a plurality of types of colors may be displayed in each of the display segments 181 to 187. The first to seventh display segments 181 to 187 are all linear display segments, and the first to seventh display segments 181 to 187 are arranged so as to be a so-called 7-segment display. As a result, the special figure display unit 37a can display a plurality of types such as numbers "1" to "9" and alphabets "H" and "L".

FIG. 60A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a. When a variable display of a pattern is performed on the special figure display unit 37a during the execution of the game, only the second display segment 182 and the fifth display segment 185 are lit in the special figure display unit 37a → No. 1 A series of lighting states in which only the display segment 181 is lit → only the third display segment 183 and the sixth display segment 186 are lit → only the seventh display segment 187 is lit are repeated. Further, in the special figure display unit 37a, only the fourth display segment 184 is lit as a stop result in the game round as a result of the disconnection, and "2" or "4" is displayed as the stop result in the game round as a low probability jackpot result. It becomes a lighting state, and "6" or "9" is displayed as a stop result in the game round of the low winning high probability jackpot result, and "L" or "L" or "L" or "" is displayed as the stop result in the game round of the most advantageous jackpot result. "H" is displayed and the lighting state is set.

On the other hand, during the check waiting period, all of the first to seventh display segments 181 to 187 are lit. The display content corresponding to this check waiting period does not match any of the display contents of the situation where the special figure display unit 37a displays the variation of the pattern during the execution of the game round, and further, the stop result of the game round. It does not match all the displayed contents that can be displayed as. As a result, the manager of the game hall can clearly grasp whether or not the current state is the check waiting period by visually observing the special figure display unit 37a.

After the check waiting period ends, the notification of the calculation results of various parameters using the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24a and 31 to 34 is executed using the special figure display unit 37a. At the time of this notification, the special figure display unit 37a is in a lighting state in which "3", "5" or "7" is displayed. The display content corresponding to the display period of these check results does not match any of the display contents of the situation where the special figure display unit 37a displays the variation of the pattern during the execution of the game round, and further, the display content of the game round It does not match all the display contents that can be displayed as a stop result. Further, the display content corresponding to the display period of the check result does not match the display content corresponding to the check waiting period. As a result, the manager of the game hall can not only clearly grasp whether or not the current state is the check waiting period by visually observing the special figure display unit 37a, but also the current state is the display period of the check result. It is possible to clearly grasp whether or not it is.

Next, the general drawing display unit 38a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 60 (b). FIG. 60B is a front view of the normal drawing display unit 38a. The normal map display unit 38a is provided with seven display segments 191 to 197. Each display segment 191 to 197 has an individual light source composed of LEDs, and by controlling the on / off of these individual light sources, only one arbitrary display segment 191 to 197 can be turned on. In addition, any combination of display segments 191 to 197 can be turned on. Since all of the above individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments 191 to 197, but the present invention is not limited to this. , Different colors may be displayed in each of the display segments 191 to 197, or a plurality of types of colors may be displayed in each of the display segments 191 to 197. The first to seventh display segments 191 to 197 are all linear display segments, and the first to seventh display segments 191 to 197 are arranged so as to be a so-called 7-segment display. As a result, it is possible to display a plurality of types such as numbers "1" to "9" and alphabets "H" and "L" on the general map display unit 38a.

FIG. 60B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the normal drawing display unit 38a. When the pattern is displayed in a variable manner on the normal figure display unit 38a, only the second display segment 192 and the fifth display segment 195 are lit on the normal figure display unit 38a → only the first display segment 191. Is lit → Only the third display segment 193 and the sixth display segment 196 are lit → Only the seventh display segment 197 is lit, and a series of lighting states are repeated. Further, in the normal drawing display unit 38a, only the fourth display segment 194 is lit as a result of stopping the variable display times that resulted in the deviation in the normal electric opening lottery, and the variable display that was the winning result in the general electric opening lottery. As a result of stopping the times, "H" is displayed and the lighting state is set.

On the other hand, during the check waiting period, all of the first to seventh display segments 191 to 197 are lit. The display content corresponding to this check waiting period does not match any of the display contents of the situation in which the pattern is variablely displayed on the normal map display unit 38a, and all that can be displayed as the stop result of the variable display times. It does not match the displayed contents of. As a result, the manager of the game hall can clearly grasp whether or not the current state is the check waiting period by visually observing the normal map display unit 38a.

Further, the display content corresponding to the check waiting period in the normal map display unit 38a matches the display content corresponding to the check waiting period in the special figure display unit 37a. That is, during the check waiting period, the same display content corresponding to the check is displayed on both the special map display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a. This makes it easier for the manager of the game hall to grasp whether or not the current state is the check waiting period.

After the check waiting period ends, the notification of the calculation results of various parameters using the ball entry history to each entry section 24a and 31 to 34 is executed not only by using the special figure display section 37a but also by using the normal map display section 38a. Will be done. In this case, "2", "3", or "4" is displayed on the normal map display unit 38a at the time of this notification. The display content corresponding to the display period of these check results does not match any of the display contents of the situation where the pattern variation display is performed on the normal map display unit 38a, and further, as a stop result after the pattern variation display. It does not match all the display contents that can be displayed. Further, the display content corresponding to the display period of the check result does not match the display content corresponding to the check waiting period. As a result, the manager of the game hall can not only clearly grasp whether or not the current state is the check waiting period by visually observing the normal map display unit 38a, but also the current state is the display period of the check result. It is possible to clearly grasp whether or not it is.

Returning to the description of the check process (FIG. 59), after the process of step S3409 is executed, the set process to the check wait counter is executed (step S3410). In the set processing, information corresponding to the check waiting period is set in the check waiting counter provided in the main RAM 65. Specifically, the check waiting period is set to 5 sec. During this time, after the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 in response to the operation of the launch operation device 28, the launched game ball is placed on any of the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 of the game area PA. It is sufficiently longer than the longest time required for the main CPU 63 to identify that the ball has entered and is detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a corresponding to the ball entry portions 24a and 31 to 34. It is set to the time. Then, as described above, when the check start instruction signal is received from the hall computer HC, the launch of the game ball is prohibited in step S3404. As a result, all the game balls flowing down the game area PA by the time the check waiting period elapses, and the ball entry history to each ball entry unit 24a, 31 to 34 by the time the check waiting period elapses. Is in the acquired state.

After that, "1" is set in the check waiting flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3411). The check waiting flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that it is a check waiting period. Further, in step S3412, the check start command is transmitted to the sound / light side CPU 163.

When the sound light side CPU 163 receives the check start command, it sets "1" in the end standby flag provided in the sound light side RAM 165 by making an affirmative determination in step S2911 of the effect control process (FIG. 53). Step S2912). The end waiting flag is a flag for the sound light side CPU 163 to specify that it is in the end waiting state, and when "1" is set in the end waiting flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S2901. It becomes. The details of the control in the end standby state will be described later. Further, in step S2913, the check display command is transmitted to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the check display command, the display control device 82 causes the symbol display device 41 to display an image corresponding to the end standby state. This display content will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of the check process (FIG. 59), the check wait period is set when "1" is set in the check wait flag of the main RAM 65 in step S3411. Therefore, an affirmative determination is made in step S3402, and the check waiting process is executed (step S3413). FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the check waiting process.

First, the value of the check waiting counter of the main RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S3501). Then, when the value of the check waiting counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3502: YES), the check waiting flag of the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3503). This ends the check waiting period.

After that, the aggregation process is executed (step S3504). In the aggregation process, the 7th parameter and the 8th parameter are calculated by using the various counters 171a to 171e of the normal counter area 171, and the 7th parameter is calculated by using the various counters 172a to 172e of the counter area 172 for the open / close execution mode. And the eighth parameter are calculated, and the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter are calculated by using various counters 173a to 173e in the high frequency support mode counter area 173. For details on these 7th and 8th parameters, the values of the out counters 171e, 172e, and 173e are set to K1, the values of the general winning counters 171a, 172a, and 173a are set to K2, and the values of the special electric winning counters 171b, 172b, and 173b. Is K3, the values of the first operation counters 171c, 172c, and 173c are K4, and the values of the second operation counters 171d, 172d, and 173d are K5.
7th parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "general""Number of prize balls for winning the prize opening 31" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Second operating port 34" Ratio of "number of prize balls for winning a prize") ・ Eighth parameter: K3 x "number of prize balls for winning a prize in the special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "for winning a prize in the general winning opening 31" Number of prize balls "+ K3 x" Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32 "+ K4 x" Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33 "+ K5 x" Number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34 "").

The seventh parameter and the eighth parameter calculated by using the various counters 171a to 171e of the normal counter area 171 are the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support mode in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. It becomes the 7th parameter and the 8th parameter in a situation other than that (hereinafter, also referred to as various parameters in normal times). Further, the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter calculated by using the various counters 172a to 172e of the counter area 172 for the opening / closing execution mode are the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and the opening / closing execution mode. It becomes the 7th parameter and the 8th parameter in (hereinafter, also referred to as various parameters in the open / close execution mode). Further, the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter calculated by using the various counters 173a to 173e in the high frequency support mode counter area 173 are in the high frequency support mode in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. It becomes the 7th parameter and the 8th parameter in a certain situation (hereinafter, also referred to as various parameters in the high frequency support mode).

Further, in the aggregation process, the same process as the parameter management process (FIG. 48) in the eleventh embodiment is performed by performing various parameters in the normal time, various parameters in the open / close execution mode, and various parameters in the high frequency support mode. Execute for. That is, when the value of the 7th parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the 8th parameter is 0.6 or less, it is assumed that the various calculated parameters are in the 1st range, and the value of the 7th parameter is 0. If only one of the conditions of exceeding 7 and the value of the 8th parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, it is assumed that the various calculated parameters are in the 2nd range, and the 7th parameter is used. When the value of the parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the 8th parameter exceeds 0.6, the determination process that the calculated various parameters are in the 3rd range is performed by the normal parameters. It is executed for each of the various parameters in the open / close execution mode and the various parameters in the high frequency support mode. Then, the information of the determination result is written in the main RAM 65.

After executing the aggregation process in step S3504, the check result display start process is executed (step S3505). In the check result display start processing, after the display of the display contents of the check waiting period in the special figure display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a is finished, the display corresponding to the result of the aggregation processing in step S3504 is displayed in the special figure display unit. It is started at 37a and the general drawing display unit 38a. In this case, the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a do not continue the same display during the check result display period, but display and open / close execution modes corresponding to the above determination results for various parameters in normal times. The display corresponding to the above judgment result for various parameters of time and the display corresponding to the above judgment result for various parameters in the high frequency support mode are sequentially displayed in this order, and the sequential display in this order is repeated. The special map display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a are displayed and controlled as described above.

Specifically, in the normal drawing display unit 38a, a display corresponding to the above-mentioned determination results for various parameters in the normal time, a display corresponding to the above-mentioned determination results for various parameters in the open / close execution mode, and a high-frequency support mode. A display indicating which of the displays corresponding to the above-mentioned determination results for the various parameters of the above is the display target is performed. As described above, the lighting state in which "2", "3", and "4" are displayed is set as the display contents corresponding to the display period of the check result in the normal map display unit 38a. Of these, when the display corresponding to the above-mentioned judgment results for various parameters in the normal time is to be displayed, "2" is displayed on the normal figure display unit 38a, and the above-mentioned judgment results for various parameters in the open / close execution mode are displayed. When the display corresponding to is the display target, "3" is displayed on the normal map display unit 38a, and when the display corresponding to the above determination result for various parameters in the high frequency support mode is the display target. Is displayed on the normal map display unit 38a.

Further, the special figure display unit 37a displays the various parameters in the normal state, the various parameters in the open / close execution mode, and the various parameters in the high frequency support mode corresponding to the above determination results. As described above, the lighting state in which "3", "5", and "7" are displayed is set as the display contents corresponding to the display period of the check result in the special figure display unit 37a. Of these, when the above determination result corresponds to the first range, "3" is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, and when the above determination result corresponds to the second range, the special figure display unit "5" is displayed on 37a, and "7" is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a when the above determination result corresponds to the third range.

When the check result display period is started, "2" is first displayed on the general map display unit 38a because the display corresponding to the above-mentioned determination results for various parameters in the normal time is displayed. In this normal target period, the special figure display unit 37a displays the above-mentioned determination results for various parameters in the normal time. That is, when the determination result corresponds to the first range, "3" is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, and when the determination result corresponds to the second range, the special figure display unit "5" is displayed on 37a, and "7" is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a when the determination result corresponds to the third range. For example, if the determination result is in the first range, "2" is continuously displayed on the normal map display unit 38a and "3" is continuously displayed on the special map display unit 37a during the normal target period. The target period is usually continued for 5 sec.

When the normal target period has elapsed, the display corresponding to the above-mentioned determination results for various parameters in the open / close execution mode is subsequently displayed, so that "3" is displayed on the normal map display unit 38a. During the open / close execution mode target period, the special figure display unit 37a displays the various parameters in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the above determination results. That is, when the determination result corresponds to the first range, "3" is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, and when the determination result corresponds to the second range, the special figure display unit "5" is displayed on 37a, and "7" is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a when the determination result corresponds to the third range. For example, if the determination result is in the second range, "3" is continuously displayed on the normal map display unit 38a and "5" is continuously displayed on the special figure display unit 37a during the opening / closing execution mode target period. .. The open / close execution mode target period is continued for 5 sec as in the normal target period.

When the open / close execution mode target period has elapsed, the display corresponding to the above determination results for various parameters in the high frequency support mode is subsequently displayed, so that "4" is displayed on the general map display unit 38a. .. During this high-frequency support mode target period, the special figure display unit 37a displays the various parameters in the high-frequency support mode corresponding to the above determination results. That is, when the determination result corresponds to the first range, "3" is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, and when the determination result corresponds to the second range, the special figure display unit "5" is displayed on 37a, and "7" is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a when the determination result corresponds to the third range. For example, if the determination result is in the third range, "4" is continuously displayed on the normal map display unit 38a and "7" is continuously displayed on the special map display unit 37a during the high frequency support mode target period. To. The high frequency support mode target period is continued for 5 sec in the same manner as the normal target period and the open / close execution mode target period.

The check result display period is set to a period in which each of the normal target period, the open / close execution mode target period, and the high frequency support mode target period occurs at least once. Specifically, the display period of the check result is set to 30 sec so that each of the normal target period, the open / close execution mode target period, and the high frequency support mode target period occurs twice. Then, in the check result display period, the change of the period of the normal target period → the open / close execution mode target period → the high frequency support mode target period is repeatedly executed.

After the process of step S3505 is executed in the check waiting process (FIG. 61), the information corresponding to the check result display period (specifically, 30 sec) is set in the display counter provided in the main RAM 65 (specifically, 30 sec). Step S3506). After that, "1" is set in the displaying flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3507). The display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that it is the display period of the check result.

When "1" is set in the display flag of the main RAM 65, an affirmative determination is made in step S2707 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51) of the main CPU 63. In this case, the processes of steps S2708 to S2719 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51) are not executed. For example, if the ball entry detection process (step S2710) is not executed, even if the game ball enters the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34, it is invalidated. However, as already explained, before the display period of the check result starts, the game ball that was normally launched does not exist in the game area PA, so the game ball that was normally launched is checked. During the display period of the result, the ball does not enter any of the entry portions 24a, 31 to 34. Further, when the special figure special electric control process (step S2714) is not executed, all the control of the special figure special electric power including the hold information acquisition process (step S2803) is stopped. Further, when the Fuzu Fuden control process (step S2715) is not executed, all the control of the Fuzu Fuden is stopped. Further, when the payout output process (step S2718) is not executed, all the payout instructions of the game ball to the payout side CPU 92 are stopped. However, the payout of the game ball based on the prize ball command for which the output to the payout side CPU 92 has already been completed is continued by the drive control by the payout side CPU 92.

In the check process (FIG. 59), when the display flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1", the check result display process is executed by making an affirmative determination in step S3401 (step S3414). FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the process during display of the check result.

First, the value of the display counter of the main RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S3601). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the display counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3602).

When the value of the displayed counter is not "0" (step S3602: NO), one of the normal target period, the open / close execution mode target period, and the high frequency support mode target period is the target period in the check result display period. It is determined whether or not it is the timing to end and switch to the target period of the next order (step S3603). Judgment as to whether or not the switching timing of the target period is performed is performed based on the value of the display counter. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3603, the display content update process is executed (step S3604). In the update process, the special figure display unit 37a and the normal target period are displayed so that the display contents correspond to the next target period with respect to the current target period among the normal target period, the open / close execution mode target period, and the high frequency support mode target period. Display control is performed on the figure display unit 38a. In this case, the display control is executed for the normal figure display unit 38a so that the display content corresponds to the target period of the switching destination, and the special figure display unit 37a is the total processing (step) of the check waiting process (FIG. 61). The display control is executed so that the display content of the determination result information written in the main RAM 65 in S3504) is the determination result information corresponding to the target period of the switching destination this time.

When it is determined in step S3602 that the value of the display counter of the main RAM 65 is "0", the display return processing of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is executed (step S3605). In the display restoration process, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a are the display contents stored in the main RAM 65 in step S3408 of the check process (FIG. 59). Display control is performed on the display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a. As a result, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a are restored to the display contents immediately before the check waiting period is started.

After that, the displaying flag of the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3606). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S2707 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), and the process returns to the state in which the processes of steps S2708 to S2719 are executed. Further, when the process of step S3606 is executed, the counters 171a to 171e of the normal counter area 171, the counters 172a to 172e of the counter area 172 for the open / close execution mode, and the counters 173a of the counter area 173 for the high frequency support mode are executed. Clear the value of ~ 173e to "0". As a result, the ball entry history of the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 is initialized, and the management of the ball entry history can be newly started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the process of step S3606 is executed, the counters 171a to 171e of the normal counter area 171, the counters 172a to 172e of the counter area 172 for the open / close execution mode, and the high frequency support are provided. The values of the counters 173a to 173e in the mode counter area 173 may be maintained as they are. In this case, the ball entry history of the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 is accumulated so as to straddle the execution times of the notification of the calculation result using the ball entry history a plurality of times. Further, in the configuration, based on the reception of the history erasing signal from the hall computer HC and the occurrence of the erasing operation using the operation unit provided in the pachinko machine 10, the ball entry history of the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 May be configured to be erased.

After that, the resumption process of the game times is executed (step S3607). As a result, a new start of the game round is allowed, and if the check waiting period is started during the execution of the game round, the progress of the temporarily stopped game round is restarted. Specifically, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a corresponding to the game times once stopped is resumed. In addition, by restarting the update of the special figure special electric timer counter, the measurement of the duration of the game times is restarted. In addition, in the process of resuming the game round, the state in which the new start of the demo display is prohibited is also canceled. That is, the state in which the execution of step S2802 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 52) is prohibited is released.

After that, the resumption process of the open / close execution mode is executed (step S3608). As a result, a new start of the open / close execution mode is allowed, and if the check waiting period is started during the execution of the open / close execution mode, the progress of the temporarily stopped open / close execution mode is restarted. Specifically, the update of the special figure special electric timer counter is restarted. Further, when the check waiting period is started during the execution of the round game, the special electric winning device 32 is opened. In this case, in the restarted round game, the upper limit continuation period of the open state of the special electric winning device 32 is not remeasured from the beginning, but the measurement is restarted from the remaining upper limit continuation period when the round game is temporarily stopped. do.

After that, the resumption process of the Fuzu Fuden control is executed (step S3609). As a result, the start of a new variable display time of the normal map display unit 38a is allowed, and if the check waiting period is started during the execution of the normal map normal control, the normal stop wait period is started. Progress is resumed. Specifically, when the check waiting period is started during the fluctuation display of the normal map display unit 38a, the display control of the normal map display unit 38a is restarted, and the measurement of the continuation period of the fluctuation display time is restarted. Will be done. Further, when the check waiting period is started in the situation where the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state. In this case, in the reopened open state, the upper limit continuation period of the open state of the general electric accessory 34a is not measured again from the beginning, but is measured from the remaining upper limit continuation period when the open state is temporarily stopped. resume.

After that, the firing prohibition release process of the game ball is executed (step S3610). As a result, by performing the launch operation of the game ball on the launch operation device 28 in the situation where the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, the state in which the launch of the game ball is executed is restored.

Next, a state in which the check waiting period and the check result display period progress while referring to the time chart of FIG. 63 will be described. FIG. 63 (a) shows the timing at which the check start instruction signal is output from the hall computer HC, FIG. 63 (b) shows the execution period of the game times, and FIG. 63 (c) shows the execution period of the open / close execution mode. 63 (d) shows the execution period of the normal signal control, FIG. 63 (e) shows the prohibition period of launching the game ball, FIG. 63 (f) shows the check waiting period, and FIG. 63 (g). ) Indicates the display period of the check result.

First, a case where an instruction signal for starting a check is output during execution of game times and general electric control will be described.

As shown in FIG. 63 (b), a hole is shown in FIG. 63 (a) at the timing of t1 during the execution of the game round and the execution of the normal power control as shown in FIG. 63 (d). When the check start instruction signal is output from the computer HC, the game rotation is interrupted as shown in FIG. 63 (b), and the normal power control is interrupted as shown in FIG. 63 (d). Further, at the timing of t1, the launch of the game ball is prohibited as shown in FIG. 63 (e), and the check waiting period is set as shown in FIG. 63 (f). In this case, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a are display contents for notifying that the check waiting period is in effect.

After that, at the timing of t2, the fixed T1 time elapses from the timing of t1, and the check waiting period ends. At the timing of t2, the calculation using the management result of the entry history to each entry unit 24a, 31 to 34 is executed. In this case, during the time of T1, after the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 in response to the operation of the launch operation device 28, the launched game ball is placed in any of the ball entry portions 24a of the game area PA. From the longest time required for the main CPU 63 to identify that the ball has entered 31 to 34 and has been detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a corresponding to the ball entry portions 24a and 31 to 34. Is also set for a long enough time. And, as already explained, the launch of the game ball is prohibited at the timing of t1. Therefore, all the game balls flowing down the game area PA by the time the check waiting period elapses, and the entry history to each ball entry unit 24a, 31 to 34 is recorded by the time the check waiting period elapses. All will be in the acquired state.

As shown in FIG. 63 (g), the check result display period starts at the timing of t2. In the display period of the check result, as described above, the display corresponding to the judgment result for various parameters in the normal time is executed by the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a, and the open / close execution mode. The display corresponding to the judgment results for various parameters at the time corresponds to the judgment result for various parameters in the open / close execution mode target period in which the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a are executed, and in the high frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode target period in which the display to be displayed is executed by the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a occurs in sequence.

After that, at the timing of t3, when the fixed time of T2 elapses from the timing of t2, the display period of the check result ends as shown in FIG. 63 (g). As a result, at the timing of t3, the state in which the launch of the game ball is prohibited is released as shown in FIG. 63 (e). Further, at the timing of t3, the game rotation is restarted as shown in FIG. 63 (b), and the normal power control is restarted as shown in FIG. 63 (d).

Next, a case where a check start instruction signal is output during the opening / closing execution mode and the execution of the normal power control will be described.

As shown in FIG. 63 (a), at the timing of t4 when the open / close execution mode is being executed as shown in FIG. 63 (c) and the normal power control is being executed as shown in FIG. 63 (d). When the check start instruction signal is output from the hall computer HC, the open / close execution mode is interrupted as shown in FIG. 63 (c), and the normal electric control is interrupted as shown in FIG. 63 (d). To. Further, at the timing of t4, the launch of the game ball is prohibited as shown in FIG. 63 (e), and the check waiting period is set as shown in FIG. 63 (f). In this case, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a are display contents for notifying that the check waiting period is in effect.

After that, at the timing of t5, the fixed T1 time elapses from the timing of t4, and the check waiting period ends. At the timing of t5, the calculation using the management result of the entry history to each entry unit 24a, 31 to 34 is executed. The time of T1 is the same as the time from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2.

As shown in FIG. 63 (g), the check result display period starts at the timing of t5. After that, at the timing of t6, when the fixed time of T2 elapses from the timing of t5, the display period of the check result ends as shown in FIG. 63 (g). The time of T2 is the same as the time from the timing of t2 to the timing of t3. Further, at the timing of t6, the state in which the launch of the game ball is prohibited is released as shown in FIG. 63 (e). Further, at the timing of t6, the open / close execution mode is restarted as shown in FIG. 63 (c), and the normal power control is restarted as shown in FIG. 63 (d).

Next, the main process of the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the main process, in steps S3701 to S3703 and steps S3705 to S3714, the same processes as those of steps S101 to S109 and steps S112 to S115 of the main process (FIG. 7) in the first embodiment are executed. On the other hand, in the main process in the present embodiment, when it is determined in step S3704 that "1" is set in the check waiting flag or the display flag of the main RAM 65, the RAM of the power supply / emission control device 78 in step S3705. The process of step S3706 is executed without executing the process of determining whether or not the erase switch is operated. That is, the operation of the RAM erase switch is invalidated during the check waiting period or the check result display period. As a result, when the check waiting period is started and the progress of the game is stopped, the manager of the game hall misunderstands that the situation is due to an abnormality of the pachinko machine 10, and the main RAM 65 is initialized. Even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and on while operating the RAM erase switch to execute the clearing process (step S3709), the clearing process of the main RAM 65 is not executed. Is possible. As in the first embodiment, the main RAM 65 receives power for memory retention from the power supply unit for power supply / emission control device 78 even when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF. Will be supplied.

On the other hand, even when "1" is set in the check waiting flag or the display flag of the main RAM 65, the processes of steps S3706 to S3708 are executed. That is, even during the check waiting period or the check result display period, if "1" is not set in the power failure flag (step S3706: NO), the main RAM 65 clear process is executed (step S3709). Even when the checksum calculation result is abnormal (step S3708: NO), the clearing process of the main RAM 65 is executed (step S3709). As a result, if the power failure process is not executed normally or if some abnormality occurs in the main RAM 65, the clear process of the main RAM 65 is executed even during the check waiting period or the check result display period. Then, it becomes possible to execute the initialization of the main RAM 65.

Next, the content of the execution control of the effect during the check waiting period or the display period of the check result and the display content of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

First, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 when the effect for game rounds is executed will be described. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing individual symbols displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a display surface of the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (j), the symbols which are a kind of symbols include nine kinds of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" and shell-shaped symbols. It is composed of a sub-design consisting of. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as an octopus are assigned numbers "1" to "9" to form a main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 66A, the symbol display device 41 is set with three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 in the upper row, the middle row, and the lower row as a plurality of display areas. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols. Then, in the symbol display device 41, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 66 (b), the symbol display device 41 is set with standby areas SA1 to SA9 so that three symbols are displayed for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and as a result, 3 × 3 A total of 9 symbols are displayed at the same time. By the way, each standby area SA1 to SA9 includes a stop position, and when the symbol is finally displayed as a stop, the symbol waiting in each standby area SA1 to SA9 stops at each stop position. Is displayed. Further, the symbol display device 41 is set with five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 so as to connect the three standby areas SA1 to SA9. Has been done. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state where a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on any of the effective lines. When the variable display of ~ Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the low probability jackpot result or the most advantageous jackpot result. In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when the most advantageous jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbol is used. The combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and when a low probability jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. Will be done.

In addition, in the case of a low winning high probability jackpot result, a predetermined combination of symbols that is not the same combination of symbols is stopped and displayed. Further, the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern to be variablely displayed by the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned symbol, and may be configured such that only numbers are variablely displayed as the symbol, for example.

More specifically about the content of the variation display of the symbols in each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3, when the effect for the game round is started, the symbols of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in the high-speed variation display which is a low identification mode. The variation display is started, and then the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are switched to the low-speed fluctuation display which is a high discrimination mode in a predetermined order, and the standby regions SA1 to SA9 on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in the predetermined order. The symbol is displayed in standby mode. Then, in a state where the symbols are standby and displayed in each standby area of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, after the symbols are oscillated over the oscillating display period, those symbols are still displayed as the final stop display. And the static display state is continued for the final stop period. In this case, the swing display means that the symbols waiting in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 swing in the same standby areas SA1 to SA9, and each symbol is in the corresponding standby areas SA1 to SA9. In the range including the stop position, each symbol swings in the range including the corresponding stop position. By performing the static display after the rocking display is performed in this way, when the symbol is finally statically displayed, the fluctuation display of the symbol in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 → the rocking display in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 → It is possible to make it a stepwise display such as a static display, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the symbol is finally displayed still.

When the display control device 82 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the sound / light side CPU 163, the display control device 82 reads a data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command from a ROM (not shown) provided in the display control device 82, and the symbol display device according to the data table. The display control of 41 is executed. In this case, this data table corresponds to the duration of the current game round, and by executing the display control of the symbol display device 41 according to the data table, high-speed fluctuation display → low-speed fluctuation in each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3. Display-> standby display-> static display will be performed. That is, the command for recognizing the switching timing from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, the switching timing from the low-speed fluctuation display to the standby display, the switching timing from the standby display to the static display, and the end timing of the static display is display control. Not transmitted to device 82. This makes it possible to reduce the number of commands transmitted from the sound / light side CPU 163 to the display control device 82. Further, when the static display is started in the symbol display device 41, the final stop display of the symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the current game round is also started in the special symbol display unit 37a, but this final stop display is also started. At the start of, the main CPU 63 does not send the corresponding command to the sound / light side CPU 163. This makes it possible to reduce the number of commands transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound / light side CPU 163.

It should be noted that, in a situation where the standby display is performed in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 and the low-speed fluctuation display is performed in the middle symbol row Z2, the symbols are different from the symbols displayed in the fluctuation display in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3. A reach effect using a character image may be executed. Since the start timing and the end timing of the reach effect are also defined in the above data table, it is not necessary to send a command from the sound / light side CPU 163 to the display control device 82 at the start and end of the reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 66 (b), the symbol display device 41 has a hold display area Ga set in the center of the lower part. The hold display area Ga is divided and displayed so that the same number of unit hold display areas Ga1, Ga2, Ga3, and Ga4 as the maximum number of hold information stored in the hold area RE are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. There is. Specifically, the maximum number of hold information is 4, and correspondingly, the hold display area Ga includes the first unit hold display area Ga1, the second unit hold display area Ga2, and the third unit hold display area. Ga3 and the fourth unit hold display area Ga4 are set. When the number of hold information stored in the hold area RE is 1, the predetermined hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area Ga1, and the hold information stored in the hold area RE is displayed. When the number of is two, a predetermined hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area Ga1 and the second unit hold display area Ga2, and the number of hold information stored in the hold area RE is In the case of three, a predetermined hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area Ga1, the second unit hold display area Ga2, and the third unit hold display area Ga3, and is stored in the hold area RE. When the number of reserved information is 4, a predetermined reserved image is displayed in all of the 1st unit reserved display area Ga1 to the 4th unit reserved display area Ga4. When the hold information is acquired, the sound and light side CPU 163 sends a command corresponding to the acquisition command to the display control device 82, so that a predetermined hold image is displayed. The number of unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4. Will increase. Further, when a new game round is started, a command corresponding to the shift command is transmitted from the sound / light side CPU 163 to the display control device 82, so that a predetermined hold image is displayed in the unit hold display area Ga1. ~ The number of Ga4 decreases.

Next, the content of the execution control of the effect during the check waiting period or the check result display period will be described.

As described above, when the check waiting period is started, the main CPU 63 transmits a check start command to the sound light side CPU 163 in step S3412 of the check process (FIG. 59). Then, when the sound light side CPU 163 receives the check start command, it sets the end standby state by setting the end wait flag of the sound light side RAM 165 to "1" in step S2912 of the effect control process (FIG. 53). .. Further, in step S2913, the check display command is transmitted to the display control device 82.

When the display control device 82 receives the check display command, the symbol display device 41 displays the notification image Gr indicating that it is the check waiting period or the check result display period. 67 (a) and 67 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 41 during the check waiting period or the check result display period. As shown in FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b), the notification image Gr “checking” is displayed in the lower left corner portion and the lower right corner portion of the symbol display device 41. As a result, the player paying attention to the symbol display device 41 can confirm that the notification image Gr is the current state of the check waiting period or the check result display period. 67 (a) and 67 (b) show the display contents of the symbol display device 41 in the situation where the effect for playing the game is being executed, but the open / close execution mode is being executed and the demo effect is being executed. In the check waiting period or the check result display period, the notification image Gr is displayed on the symbol display device 41. As a result, not only the situation in which the effect for the game round is being executed, but also the notification that the check waiting period or the check result display period is in effect even during the execution of the open / close execution mode and the execution of the demo effect is displayed. This can be done with the display device 41. The content of the notification image Gr is arbitrary, and for example, the notification may be performed by dimming the entire symbol display device 41.

When the display control device 82 receives the check display command, the display control device 82 executes not only the process for displaying the notification image Gr on the symbol display device 41 but also the process for continuing the execution of the display effect. Specifically, when a check display command is received in a situation where the demo effect is being executed, the symbol display device 41 is displayed and controlled so as to repeat a series of moving image displays for the demo effect.

If a check display command is received before the start of the final stop period in the game rotation effect while the game rotation effect is being executed, the timing at which the swing display is started in the game rotation effect and the timing of starting the swing display. Until then, the display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed according to the contents of the data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command received from the sound / light side CPU 163 at the start of the effect for this game round, but after the rocking display is started. Continues the oscillating display even when it is time to start the static display in the data table.

With reference to FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b), a mode in which the effect for game rounds is executed by the symbol display device 41 during the check waiting period or the check result display period will be described. As shown in FIG. 67 (a), in the situation where the variable display of the symbol is performed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the display area where the variable display of the symbol is performed and the position which does not overlap with the hold display area Ga. In, the notification image Gr indicating that it is the check waiting period or the check result display period is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), the symbols are oscillatedly displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, the symbols waiting in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 are displayed so as to swing in a vertical direction different from the horizontal direction, which is the fluctuation direction of the symbols, in the same standby areas SA1 to SA9. Then, this swing display is continued even when the original static display is started.

When the check display command is received during the final stop period of the effect for the game round, the symbol display device 41 is displayed and controlled so that the state in which the symbol is still displayed is continued. When a check display command is received during the opening period of the open / close execution mode, the symbol display device 41 is displayed and controlled so as to repeat a series of moving image displays during the opening period. When a check display command is received during the opening / closing period in which the opening / closing of the special electric winning device 32 is repeated in the opening / closing execution mode, the symbol display device 41 is displayed and controlled so as to repeat a series of moving images during the opening / closing period. When a check display command is received during the ending period of the open / close execution mode, the symbol display device 41 is displayed and controlled so as to repeat a series of operation displays during the ending period.

When the sound / light side CPU 163 is in the end standby state, an affirmative determination is made in step S2901 of the effect control process (FIG. 53). In this case, it is determined in step S2915 whether or not any of the effect commands has been received from the main CPU 63. The effect command is a command transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound / light side CPU 163 in order to instruct the start trigger of the effect, and specifically, the demo start command, the variation command, the opening command, and the ending command correspond to the effect command.

When any of the effect commands is received (step S2915: YES), the end waiting flag of the sound light side RAM 165 is cleared to "0" (step S2916). As a result, the end waiting state is released. After that, various effect determination processes at the time of canceling the end standby are executed (step S2917). In the various effect determination processes at the time of canceling the end wait, if the command received this time is a demo start command, the effect determination process for demo in step S2903 is executed, and if the command received this time is a variable command, the game in step S2906. If the command received this time is the opening command, the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode of step S2909 is executed, and if the command received this time is the ending command, the corresponding effect determination is executed. Execute the process.

After that, when the end waiting state ended this time is generated during the execution of the effect for the game round, and the standby display is performed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 (step S2918: YES). ), The final stop process is executed (step S2919). When the sound light side CPU 163 controls the execution of the effect for the game round, the data table is read from the sound light side ROM 164 to the sound light side RAM 165 as described above, but the data table does not enter the end standby state. In this case, data indicating the timing at which the standby display is started during the execution period of the effect for the game round is set.

In the final stop processing, the effect content is adjusted so that the symbol is statically displayed over the final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec) in the symbol display device 41 before the effect determined in step S2917. Specifically, after reading the data table for the final stop period as the data table for controlling the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 and executing the control based on the data table for the final stop period, step S2917 The control based on the data table corresponding to the content of the effect determined in is executed.

After that, the command transmission process at the time of canceling the end wait is executed (step S2920). In the command transmission process, the demo start command is transmitted to the display control device 82 when the demo production should be started this time, and it is determined when the game rotation production should be started this time. A fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the content of the effect is transmitted to the display control device 82, and if this time is the situation where the open / close execution mode should be started, an opening command is sent to the display control device 82, and this time the open / close execution is executed. When the ending period of the mode should be started, the ending command is transmitted to the display control device 82.

The display control device 82 controls the execution of the display effect on the symbol display device 41 as described above for the reception of each of the above commands, unless the situation is such that the swing display of the symbol is continued as the effect for the game round. I do. On the other hand, when the display control device 82 receives each of the above commands in a situation where the swing display of the symbol is continued as an effect for playing a game (specifically, it receives a demo start command, a variation command, or an opening command). In this case), after each symbol to be oscillated is displayed statically for the final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec), the display effect corresponding to the received command is started. In this case, if the display effect executed after the final stop period is a display effect having a fixed execution period such as an effect for game rounds and an effect for the opening period, the final stop period is generated first. Corresponding to, the execution period of the display effect to be executed after that is shortened by the final stop period.

Specifically, if the display effect executed after the final stop period is an effect for game rounds, the period of high-speed variable display in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is shortened by the final stop period. As a result, it is possible to generate a final stop period before the start of a new effect for the game, while suppressing the influence on the appearance of the effect for the game.

Further, if the display effect executed after the final stop period is the effect of the opening period, the timing for starting the effect of the opening period is delayed by the final stop period. In the production for the opening / closing execution mode, the production of the opening / closing period is started as it is after the production of the opening period is completed, but in the production of the opening / closing period, a series of moving images are repeatedly displayed. Therefore, even if the end timing of the effect of the opening period is interrupted until after the start of the opening / closing period, the effect on the appearance of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is small.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When a ball enters the ball entry units 24a and 31 to 34 as a predetermined event, the values of the corresponding counters 171a to 171e, 172a to 172e, and 173a to 173e are added by 1, and the information on the ball entry history is added. It is stored in various counters 171a to 171e, 172a to 172e, and 173a to 173e. Then, by executing the calculation using the information stored in the various counters 171a to 171e, 172a to 172e, and 173a to 173e, a predetermined parameter is derived as the calculation result, and the information of the derived calculation result is derived. Is notified. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the entry history of the game ball into the entry portions 24a, 31 to 34. Further, since the information on the ball entry history is stored and retained by the pachinko machine 10 itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access or modification to the information on the ball entry history. In this case, in a situation where various parameters are derived using the information of the ball entry history, the progress of the game is restricted. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a situation different from the situation in which a normal game is performed. Therefore, it is not necessary to parallel the progress of the normal game and the derivation of various parameters, and the processing load can be reduced.

In a situation where various parameters are derived, the progress of the game is restricted by limiting the execution of at least a part of the processes for advancing the game. This makes it possible to prevent the number of processes per unit time from being extremely increased in the situation where various parameters are derived.

When various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history, the calculation is performed after the launch of the game ball is prohibited. This makes it possible to calculate various parameters in a situation where the entry of the game ball into the entry units 24a, 31 to 34, which triggers the variation of various parameters, is restricted.

When various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history, from the time when the launch of the game ball is restricted until the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 enters the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34. Various parameters are calculated after a period longer than the maximum period assumed as the period required for the operation has elapsed. This makes it possible to calculate various parameters in a situation where the ball of the game ball does not surely enter the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34, which triggers the variation of various parameters.

In a situation where information is set to indicate that the situation is such that various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history and the calculation result is notified (that is, "1" is set for the check waiting flag or the displaying flag of the main RAM 65. Even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and off while the RAM erase switch is turned on, the clearing process of the main RAM 65 (step S3709) is prevented. As a result, when the progress of the game is restricted in the situation where various parameters are calculated, even if the above clear operation is mistakenly performed in an attempt to release the restricted situation, the main RAM 65 is cleared. It is possible to prevent the process from being executed.

When the main process (FIG. 64) is executed in a situation where "1" is not set in the power failure flag even in the situation where the execution of the clear process of the main RAM 65 for the clear operation is blocked as described above. If a checksum error occurs, the main RAM 65 is cleared. As a result, even when the progress of the game is restricted in the situation where various parameters are calculated, it is possible to leave room for the clear processing of the main RAM 65 to be executed.

The state in which the progress of the game is restricted in the situation where various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history is released when the predetermined check result display period elapses. This makes it possible to prevent the event of being left in a state where the progress of the game is restricted.

Even if the progress of the game is restricted in a situation where various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history, the execution of the effect on the symbol display device 41 is continued. This makes it possible to prevent the production from ending immediately even if the progress of the game is restricted due to an opportunity for the player to calculate various parameters during the game. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused when the progress of the game is restricted.

If the progress of the game is restricted due to an opportunity to calculate various parameters in the situation where the effect for the game round is being executed by the symbol display device 41, it is originally an opportunity to end the effect for the game round. Even if the duration of the game round has elapsed, the control for ending the effect for the game round is not executed. As a result, in the situation where the progress of the game is restricted, it is possible to keep the effect for the game round, and even in the situation where the progress of the game is restricted in the situation where various parameters are derived, the effect is produced. It is possible to make the player think that the execution of is continued.

In the situation where the progress of the game is restricted due to the calculation of various parameters, when the effect for the game is continued, there are commands for starting a new effect such as a variable command, an opening command, and a demo start command. It is released when it is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound / light side CPU 163. As a result, it is possible to cancel the state without transmitting a dedicated command for canceling the state in which the effect for the game round is continued from the main CPU 63 to the sound light side CPU 163.

When the effect for the game round is continued in the situation where the progress of the game is restricted due to the calculation of various parameters, the standby display in the stage before the symbol is stopped and displayed when the effect for the game round is terminated continues. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to make the player aware of the stop result of the symbol, and to continue the production for the game in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted. Further, when the restriction on the progress of the game is released and the effect for the game round is terminated, it is sufficient to switch from the standby display to the stop display at the timing when the restriction on the progress of the game is released. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly and quickly end the effect of playing the game against the release of the restriction on the progress of the game.

When the effect for playing the game is continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted in order to calculate various parameters, the corresponding notification is also executed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being confused by the fact that the production for the game is continued for a longer time than expected.

Notifications corresponding to the contents of various parameters calculated using the ball entry history are sent to the special map display unit 37a in which the variation display of the special map is executed and the normal map display unit 38a in which the variation display of the normal map is executed. Is executed. As a result, the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a can be used in combination as the display unit for performing the notification, and the configuration can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the dedicated display unit is provided. Will be.

When the notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters is executed using the special map display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a, the special map display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a display the normal map. Is interrupted. As a result, it becomes possible to clarify the content of the notification in the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a.

Further, when the notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters is completed by using the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a, the notification of the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a is started. It returns to the display contents just before. As a result, it is possible to resume the display of the special map on the special map display unit 37a and the display of the normal map on the normal map display unit 38a after the notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters is completed.

When the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a are used to perform notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters, the display mode used for displaying the special figure is the above-mentioned various parameters for the special figure display unit 37a. The display mode used for displaying the normal map is not used as the display mode of the notification corresponding to the contents of the above-mentioned various parameters for the normal map display unit 38a. This makes it possible for the manager of the game hall to clearly understand that the notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters is executed by using the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a.

When the notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters is executed by using the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a, the contents of different types of notification targets are sequentially switched and displayed. This makes it possible to display the contents of different types of notification targets using the same display units 37a and 38a.

<Another form of the thirteenth embodiment>
-When various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history to the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34, the game ball is prohibited from being launched, but the game ball is not limited to this. It may be configured so that the firing of is not prohibited. In this case, when the check start instruction signal is received, various parameters are calculated using the information of the ball entry history at that time, so that even if the launch of the game ball is continued thereafter. It is possible to calculate various parameters without being affected by it.

The device that performs notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters calculated by using the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24a and 31 to 34 is limited to the configuration of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a. The display and light emitting unit 53 provided on the front door frame 14 may be used in combination, or a dedicated display unit may be provided. By executing the above notification using the display light emitting unit 53 provided on the front door frame 14, it becomes possible to easily confirm the content of the notification. Further, by executing the above notification using the dedicated display unit, the device on which the above notification is executed becomes clear to the manager of the game hall.

Further, in the configuration in which the above notification is executed using the dedicated display unit, the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 is used when an opportunity such as reception of a check start instruction signal occurs. Then, various parameters are calculated and the notification content of the calculation result is updated, and the notification based on the updated notification content may be continued until the next update is performed. As a result, by checking the dedicated display unit at an arbitrary timing, it is possible to grasp the notification content corresponding to the immediately preceding calculation result. Further, the dedicated display unit may be configured so that its display surface is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52, and is provided in the board box of the main control device 60. It may be configured as a window.

-The trigger for executing the calculation using the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 is not limited to receiving the check start instruction signal from the hall computer HC of the game hall, for example. The trigger may be generated every time a predetermined time elapses, or the trigger may be generated every time the total period of the period during which the gaming ball is launched becomes the predetermined period. In some cases, the trigger may be generated when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, or the trigger may be generated when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In some cases, the trigger may be generated when the demonstration effect continues for a predetermined period or longer, or the trigger may be generated when a predetermined operation unit provided in the pachinko machine 10 is operated. The trigger may be generated when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while the predetermined operation unit is operated.

-When the calculation using the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 is executed, the payout of the game ball is not stopped in the above embodiment, but instead of this, the payout of the game ball is also performed. It may be configured to be stopped.

-Even when the calculation using the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24a and 31 to 34 is executed, the effect such as the effect for the game round, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the demo effect are displayed. The configuration is such that the speaker unit 54 and the symbol display device 41 continue as they are, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect may be temporarily interrupted. In this case, when the notification of the calculation result is completed, the effect is restarted from the temporarily interrupted state.

In a configuration in which the calculation using the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 and the notification of the calculation result are performed by a control unit different from the main CPU 63 as in the first embodiment. In a situation where the calculation and the notification of the calculation result are executed, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 may be stopped. Even in this case, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in the situation where the above calculation and the notification of the calculation result are executed.

-In a situation where the RTC is mounted on the main CPU 63 and the date and time measured by the RTC is outside the business hours of the game hall, even if the game ball enters the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34. It may be configured so that it is not reflected in the entry history. In this case, for example, even if an attempt is made to make an intentional result of the entry history to the entry units 24a, 31 to 34 outside the business hours of the game hall, it is possible to make it impossible.

-Even if a game ball enters the entry units 24a, 31 to 34 in a situation where the game ball is not launched, it may not be reflected in the entry history. In this case, when the act of caring for the game ball is performed in the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34, it is possible to prevent it from being reflected in the ball entry history.

-Although the game progress is restricted before the calculation using the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24a and 31 to 34 is started, the game may be configured to occur at the same time, and the calculation is executed. The progress of the game may not be restricted at such a timing, and the progress of the game may be restricted at the timing when the calculation result is notified thereafter.

-The state in which the progress of the game is restricted due to the execution of the calculation using the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 is canceled due to a factor different from the elapse of the check result display period. It may be configured as such. For example, it may be released when a check end instruction signal is received from the hall computer HC of the game hall, or it may be released by operating an operation unit provided in the pachinko machine 10.

-If an opportunity to execute a calculation using the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 occurs in a situation where the effect for the game round is being executed by the symbol display device 41, the game round during the execution. The effect is not limited to the configuration in which the effect for the game is waited in the standby display state, and for example, the effect for the next game round may be waited for after the stationary display is completed.

When the effect for the open / close execution mode is being executed by the symbol display device 41 and an opportunity to execute a calculation using the entry history to the entry units 24a, 31 to 34 occurs, the opening / closing during the execution is performed. The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the effect for the execution mode is continued, and the configuration may be temporarily interrupted at that point.

-In a configuration in which the progress of a game is restricted when it is detected that a fraudulent activity has occurred, even if a configuration is applied in which the execution of the effect is continued even under the situation where the progress of the game is restricted. good. Further, in the configuration in which the progress of the game is restricted when the state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a predetermined state, the configuration in which the execution of the effect is continued even under the situation where the progress of the game is restricted is applied. You may.

-In the configuration in which the final stop command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound light side CPU 163 at the end of the effect for the game round, the final stop command is the main side when the standby display is continued on the symbol display device 41. It may be configured to be released based on the transmission from the CPU 63 to the sound / light side CPU 163. Even in this case, it is not necessary to send a dedicated command from the main CPU 63 to the sound / light side CPU 163 for canceling the state in which the standby display is continued on the symbol display device 41.

-The values of various parameters as a result of calculation using the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 may be notified as they are. This enables the manager of the game hall to grasp various parameters in detail.

-The result calculated using the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 or the corresponding information is added to or replaced with the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a, and is a pattern display device. It may be the configuration displayed in 41. This makes it easier for the manager of the game hall to grasp the above calculation result.

<14th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the mode from the reception of the check start instruction signal to the start of the check waiting period is different from the thirteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a check process in the present embodiment.

When it is neither the display period of the check result nor the check waiting period (step S3801 and step S3802: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the end trigger waiting flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3801 and step S3802: NO). Step S3803). The end trigger waiting flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that it is in a state of waiting for the start of the check waiting period after receiving the check start instruction signal.

When "1" is not set in the end opportunity waiting flag (step S3803: NO), on condition that the check start instruction signal is received from the hall computer HC (step S3804: YES), the current game is played. It is determined whether or not is being executed, the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, or the normal signal control is being executed (step S3805). When the game is currently being executed, the open / close execution mode is being executed, or the normal power control is being executed (step S3805: YES), "1" is set in the end opportunity waiting flag of the main RAM 65. (Step S3806). As a result, it becomes an end opportunity waiting period waiting for the start of the check waiting period. On the other hand, when the game is not currently being executed, the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, or the Fuzu-fuden control is being executed (step S3805: NO), the processes of steps S3809 to S3814 are executed. Further, when "1" is set in the end trigger waiting flag of the main RAM 65 and the end trigger waiting period is set (step S3803: YES), the game is currently being executed, the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, and the general figure is normal. After clearing the end trigger wait flag of the main RAM 65 to "0" and ending the end trigger wait period (step S3808), on condition that neither of them is executing the electric control (step S3807: NO), the step The processes of S3809 to S3814 are executed.

For details of the processes of steps S3809 to S3814, first, a game ball launch prohibition process is executed in the same manner as in step S3404 of the check process (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment (step S3809). After that, in the same manner as in step S3408 of the check process (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment, the storage process of the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is executed (step S3810), and the above-mentioned first. Similar to step S3409 of the check process (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment, the check wait display start process of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a is executed (step S3811). Further, the setting process to the check waiting counter is executed in the same manner as in step S3410 of the check process (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment (step S3812), and the check process in the thirteenth embodiment (FIG. FIG. “1” is set in the check waiting flag of the main RAM 65 in the same manner as in step S3411 of 59) (step S3813), and the check is started in the same manner as in step S3412 of the check processing (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment. The command is transmitted to the sound / light side CPU 163 (step S3814). As a result, the check waiting period is started.

Here, in the present embodiment, when a check start instruction signal is received during the execution of the game round, the open / close execution mode, or the execution of the normal power control, the start of the check waiting period is waited for, and the game round is started. The check waiting period is started when it is no longer being executed, in the open / close execution mode, or when the normal signal control is not being executed. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity and the processing load because it is not necessary to execute the process for interrupting these situations and recovering them thereafter. Further, since it is not necessary to interrupt each situation in this way, in the present embodiment, at the start of the check waiting period, the game time interruption process (step S3405) and the opening / closing execution mode interruption as in the thirteenth embodiment are interrupted. The process (step S3406) and the interrupt process (step S3407) of the normal power control are not executed.

When the check wait flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" and the check wait period is reached, the check wait process is executed in step S3815 by making an affirmative determination in step S3802 of the check process. The processing content of the check waiting process is the same as the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. Further, when the check waiting process is executed and the check waiting period is switched to the check result display period, a positive judgment is made in step S3801 of the check process, so that the check result display process is performed in step S3816. To execute.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the process during display of the check result.

In the process of displaying the check result, first, the value of the displaying counter of the main RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S3901). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the display counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3902).

When the value of the displayed counter is not "0" (step S3902: NO), one of the normal target period, the open / close execution mode target period, and the high frequency support mode target period is the target period in the check result display period. It is determined whether or not it is the timing to end and switch to the target period of the next order (step S3903). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3903, the display content update process is executed (step S3904). In the update process, the special figure display unit 37a and the normal target period are displayed so that the display contents correspond to the next target period with respect to the current target period among the normal target period, the open / close execution mode target period, and the high frequency support mode target period. Display control is performed on the figure display unit 38a. The processing contents of these steps S3903 and S3904 are the same as the processing contents of steps S3603 and S3604 of the process during display of the check result (FIG. 62) in the thirteenth embodiment.

When it is determined in step S3902 that the value of the display counter of the main RAM 65 is "0", a special figure is displayed in the same manner as in step S3605 of the check result display processing (FIG. 62) in the thirteenth embodiment. The display return processing of the unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a is executed (step S3905). After that, the displaying flag of the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3906). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S2707 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), and the process returns to the state in which the processes of steps S2708 to S2719 are executed. After that, the launch prohibition release process of the game ball is executed in the same manner as in step S3610 of the check result display process (FIG. 62) in the thirteenth embodiment (step S3907).

Next, a state in which the end opportunity waiting period, the check waiting period, and the check result display period progress with reference to the time chart of FIG. 70 will be described. FIG. 70 (a) shows the timing at which the check start instruction signal is output from the hall computer HC, FIG. 70 (b) shows the execution period of the game times, and FIG. 70 (c) shows the execution period of the normal power control. 70 (d) shows a prohibition period for launching a game ball, FIG. 70 (e) shows a waiting period for ending opportunity, FIG. 70 (f) shows a waiting period for checking, and FIG. 70 (g) shows. Shows the display period of the check result.

As shown in FIG. 70 (b), a check start instruction signal is output from the hall computer HC as shown in FIG. 70 (a) at the timing of t1 during the execution of the game round. In this case, the game round is continued without interruption at the timing of t1. Further, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 70 (e), the end opportunity waiting period is set.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (c), the normal drawing control is started at the timing of t2 during the execution of the game round. Then, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), the game round ends at the timing of t3 during the execution of the Fuzu Fuden control. However, since the Fuzu Fuden control is still being executed, the waiting period for the end will continue.

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 70 (c), the normal electric control is completed. As a result, the situation is such that neither the game round is being executed, the open / close execution mode is being executed, nor the Fuzu-fuden control is being executed. Therefore, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIGS. 70 (e) and 70 (f), the end-triggered waiting period shifts to the check waiting period. In this case, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a are display contents for notifying that the check waiting period is in effect. Further, at the timing of t4, the launch of the game ball is prohibited as shown in FIG. 70 (d).

After that, at the timing of t5, the fixed T1 time elapses from the timing of t4, and the check waiting period ends. At the timing of t5, the calculation of various parameters using the ball entry history to each entry section 24a, 31 to 34 is executed. In this case, during the time of T1, after the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 in response to the operation of the launch operation device 28, the launched game ball is placed in any of the ball entry portions 24a of the game area PA. From the longest time required for the main CPU 63 to identify that the ball has entered 31 to 34 and has been detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a corresponding to the ball entry portions 24a and 31 to 34. Is also set for a long enough time. And, as already explained, the launch of the game ball is prohibited at the timing of t4. Therefore, all the game balls flowing down the game area PA by the time the check waiting period elapses, and the entry history to each ball entry unit 24a, 31 to 34 is recorded by the time the check waiting period elapses. All will be in the acquired state.

As shown in FIG. 70 (g), the check result display period starts at the timing of t5. In the display period of the check result, as described above, the display corresponding to the judgment result for various parameters in the normal time is executed by the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a, and the open / close execution mode. The display corresponding to the judgment results for various parameters at the time corresponds to the judgment result for various parameters in the open / close execution mode target period in which the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a are executed, and in the high frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode target period in which the display to be displayed is executed by the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a occurs in sequence.

After that, at the timing of t6, when the fixed time of T2 elapses from the timing of t5, the display period of the check result ends as shown in FIG. 70 (g). As a result, at the timing of t6, the state in which the launch of the game ball is prohibited is released as shown in FIG. 70 (d).

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, in a situation where the pachinko machine 10 is performing a specific operation such as a game rotation, an opening / closing execution mode, and a normal power control, there is an opportunity to calculate various parameters using the ball entry history. Even if it occurs, the progress of the game is not restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game machine, the opening / closing execution mode, and the execution of the normal electric control from being hindered by the occurrence of the calculation trigger of various parameters.

When the calculation trigger of various parameters occurs in the situation where any of the game times, the open / close execution mode, and the normal power control is performed in the pachinko machine 10, the specific operation to be executed is completed. Later, the progress of the game is restricted. As a result, it is possible to derive various parameters in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted in response to the occurrence of the calculation trigger of various parameters while not hindering the execution of the specific operation.

In the situation where the game is played, the progress of the game is not restricted even if the calculation trigger of various parameters occurs. This makes it possible to calculate various parameters in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted while not interrupting the game times.

In the situation where the open / close execution mode is performed, the progress of the game is not restricted even if the calculation triggers of various parameters occur. This makes it possible to calculate various parameters in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted while not interrupting the open / close execution mode.

When the special electric winning device 32 is open in the open / close execution mode, the execution of the calculation using the entry history to the entry units 24a, 31 to 34 and the restriction on the progress of the game are waited for, and the opening / closing execution is executed. Even in the mode, when the special electric winning device 32 is closed, the configuration may be such that the execution of the calculation using the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 and the restriction on the progress of the game are not waited for. ..

<Fifteenth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the management of the ball entry history to each ball entry unit 24a, 31 to 34, the calculation using the management result, and the notification of the calculation result are executed not by the main CPU 63 but by the sound light side CPU 163. It differs from the thirteenth embodiment in that it is different from the thirteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 201 provided in the MPU 162 of the voice emission control device 81. In addition to the input port 201, the MPU 162 is provided with an input port for receiving commands from the main CPU 63.

The input port 201 is provided with a plurality of buffers 202a to 202g. Specifically, the first to seventh buffers 202a to 202g are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to seventh buffers 202a to 202g through the signal paths 203a to 203g, and each of the first to seventh buffers 202a to 202g is an input target signal. When is at the LOW level, the information of "0" is stored as the first data, and when the signal to be input is at the HI level, the information of "1" is stored as the second data. The relationship between these LOW and HI and the first data and the second data may be reversed.

A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 202a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level first signal when a new game ball is not detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and one game is played by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a. When a sphere is detected, a first signal of HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the sound light side CPU 163 to specify that the first signal of the HI level is input to the first buffer 202a.

A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 202b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level second signal when a new game ball is not detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and one game is played by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. When a sphere is detected, a second signal of HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the sound light side CPU 163 to specify that the second signal of the HI level is input to the second buffer 202b.

A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 202c. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level third signal when a new game ball is not detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and one game is played by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. When a sphere is detected, a third signal of HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the sound light side CPU 163 to specify that the HI level third signal is input to the third buffer 202c.

A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 202d. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fourth signal when a new game ball is not detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a, and when one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. The HI level fourth signal is output over a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the sound light side CPU 163 to specify that the HI level fourth signal is input to the fourth buffer 202d.

A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first actuating port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 202e. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fifth signal when a new game ball is not detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a, and one game is played by the first operating port detection sensor 46a. When a sphere is detected, a fifth signal of HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the sound light side CPU 163 to specify that the HI level fifth signal is input to the fifth buffer 202e.

A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second actuating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 202f. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level sixth signal when a new game ball is not detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a, and one game is played by the second operating port detection sensor 47a. When a sphere is detected, a HI level sixth signal is output over a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the sound light side CPU 163 to specify that the HI level sixth signal is input to the sixth buffer 202f.

A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 202g. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level 7th signal when a new game ball is not detected by the out port detection sensor 48a, and one game ball is detected by the out port detection sensor 48a. In this case, the HI level 7th signal is output over a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the sound light side CPU 163 to specify that the HI level 7th signal is input to the 7th buffer 202g.

FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence area 204 provided in the sound / light side ROM 164. The correspondence area 204 has a one-to-one correspondence with the first to seventh buffers 202a to 202g provided in the input port 201 of the MPU 162 of the voice emission control device 81, and the first to seventh correspondence areas 204a to 204 g is provided.

In the first correspondence area 204a, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the first buffer 202a by the sound light side CPU 163, the information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is provided is the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10. It is stored in advance in. Further, in the first correspondence area 204a, along with the information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is used, the information on the number of gaming balls (10) to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 is also provided. It is stored in advance at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10. In the second correspondence area 204b, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the second buffer 202b by the sound light side CPU 163, the information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is used is the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10. It is stored in advance in. Further, in the second correspondence area 204b, along with the information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is used, the information on the number of gaming balls (10) to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 is also provided. It is stored in advance at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10. In the third correspondence area 204c, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the third buffer 202c by the sound light side CPU 163, the information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is provided is the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10. It is stored in advance in. Further, in the third correspondence area 204c, along with the information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is used, the information on the number of gaming balls (10) to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 is also provided. It is stored in advance at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10.

In the fourth correspondence area 204d, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the fourth buffer 202d by the sound light side CPU 163, the information indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is used is the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10. It is stored in advance in. Further, in the fourth correspondence area 204d, along with the information indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is used, the information on the number of gaming balls (15) to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the special electric winning device 32 is also provided. It is stored in advance at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10. In the fifth correspondence area 204e, the pachinko machine 10 is shipped with information indicating that it is the first operating port 33 as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the fifth buffer 202e by the sound light side CPU 163. It is pre-stored in the stage. Further, in the fifth correspondence area 204e, information indicating that the first operating port 33 is provided and information on the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the first operating opening 33 (one). ) Is also stored in advance at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10. In the sixth correspondence area 204f, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the sixth buffer 202f by the sound light side CPU 163, the information indicating that the second operating port 34 is shipped is the shipment of the pachinko machine 10. It is pre-stored in the stage. Further, in the sixth correspondence area 204f, information indicating that the second operating port 34 is provided and information on the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the second operating opening 34 (one). ) Is also stored in advance at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10. In the 7th correspondence area 204g, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the 7th buffer 202g by the management side CPU 112, the information indicating that the out port 24a is provided in advance at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10. It is stored.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the check process (step S2706) is executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), but the check process is not executed in the present embodiment. Along with this, in step S2707 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), not only the game is stopped but also the check result display period is determined. However, in the present embodiment, although the determination as to whether or not the game is stopped is executed, the determination as to whether or not it is the display period of the check result is not executed. Further, in the ball entry detection process in step S2710 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), the same process as the ball entry detection process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), the management output process is executed as the next process of the external information setting process in step S2719.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a management output process executed by the main CPU 63.

First, "7" is set in the managed counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S4001). The management target counter specifies in the main CPU 63 that there is a management target for which it has not yet been specified whether or not the signal output state to the sound / light side CPU 163 should be changed in this management output processing. At the same time, it is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the signal output state to the sound / light side CPU 163 should be changed for any management target. The management target for which the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the signal output state to the sound / light side CPU 163 should be changed in one management output process is the seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. Is. Therefore, first, "7" is set in the managed counter.

After that, it is determined whether or not the output state of the signal to the sound / light side CPU 163 for the management target corresponding to the value of the current management target counter is at the HI level (step S4002). When it is not the HI level (step S4002: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the managed counter (step S4003). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is "7" and corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first output flag. When the value of the managed counter is "6" and corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second output flag, and the value of the managed counter is determined. Is "5" and corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the third output flag, and the value of the managed counter is "4". Yes When the special electric detection sensor 45a is supported, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the fourth output flag, the value of the managed counter is "3", and the first operating port detection sensor 46a. If it corresponds to, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the fifth output flag, the value of the management target counter is "2", and it corresponds to the second actuating port detection sensor 47a. In that case, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the 6th output flag, and if the value of the managed counter is "1" and corresponds to the out port 24a, the 7th output flag is set to "1". It is determined whether or not "1" is set. It should be noted that these 1st to 7th output flags are set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 10) as in the first embodiment.

When "1" is set in the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter (step S4003: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the first to seventh signals is set to the HI level. (Step S4004). After that, the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is cleared to "0" (step S4005).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4002, it is determined whether or not an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level (step S4006). Specifically, has the HI output continuation period (specifically, 10 msec) elapsed after switching the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the first to seventh signals from the LOW level to the HI level? Judge whether or not. This HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting processing described later for executing the monitoring of the input port 201 in the sound light side CPU 163, and the signal switched from the LOW level to the HI level. It is a period during which the output state of can be reliably specified by the sound / light side CPU 163. When an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S4006: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to the LOW level (step S4006: YES). Step S4007).

When a negative determination is made in step S4003, when the process of step S4005 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S4006, or when the process of step S4007 is executed, the value of the managed counter of the main RAM 65 is set to 1. Subtract (step S4008). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the managed target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S4009). When the value of the managed target counter is 1 or more (step S4009: NO), the processes after step S4002 are executed for the managed target corresponding to the value of the new managed target counter.

Next, the effect control process of the present embodiment executed by the sound / light side CPU 163 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 74. The effect control process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec).

When the sound light side CPU 163 receives the opening command from the main side CPU 63 (step S4101: YES), "1" is set in the open / close execution mode flag provided in the sound light side RAM 165 (step S4102). The open / close execution mode flag is a flag for the sound / light side CPU 163 to specify that the open / close execution mode is in effect. After that, the effect setting process for the open / close execution mode is executed (step S4103). In the effect setting process for the open / close execution mode, the data table for the open / close execution mode is read from the sound light side ROM 164 to the sound light side RAM 165. Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the effect for the open / close execution mode is executed in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Further, the opening command is transmitted to the display control device 82. By receiving the opening command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display effect for the open / close execution mode is executed.

When the sound light side CPU 163 receives the ending command from the main side CPU 63 (step S4104: YES), the sound light side RAM 165 opens / close execution mode flag is cleared to "0" (step S4105). After that, the effect setting process for the ending is executed (step S4106). In the ending effect setting process, the ending data table is read from the sound / light side ROM 164 to the sound / light side RAM 165. Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the effect of the ending period is executed in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Further, the ending command is transmitted to the display control device 82. By receiving the ending command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display effect of the ending period is executed.

When the sound light side CPU 163 receives the high frequency start command from the main side CPU 63 (step S4107: YES), the high frequency support flag provided in the sound light side RAM 165 is set to "1" (step S4108). The high frequency start command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 when the high frequency support mode is started. Further, the high frequency support flag is a flag for the sound light side CPU 163 to specify that the high frequency support mode is set. After that, the effect setting process for high frequency support is executed (step S4109). In the effect setting process for high-frequency support, the data table for the high-frequency support mode is read from the sound-light side ROM 164 to the sound-light side RAM 165. Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the effect for the high frequency support mode is executed in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. In addition, a high-frequency start command is transmitted to the display control device 82. By receiving the high-frequency start command, the display control device 82 displays and controls the symbol display device 41 so that the display effect for the high-frequency support mode is executed.

When the sound light side CPU 163 receives the high frequency end command from the main side CPU 63 (step S4110: YES), the high frequency support flag of the sound light side RAM 165 is cleared to "0" (step S4111). The high-frequency end command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 when the high-frequency support mode ends. After that, the effect setting process for low frequency support is executed (step S4112). In the effect setting process for low frequency support, the data table for the low frequency support mode is read from the sound light side ROM 164 to the sound light side RAM 165. Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the effect for the low frequency support mode is executed in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. In addition, a high-frequency end command is transmitted to the display control device 82. The display control device 82 displays and controls the symbol display device 41 so that the display effect for the low frequency support mode is executed by receiving the high frequency end command.

When the sound light side CPU 163 receives the door opening command from the main side CPU 63 (step S4113: YES), "1" is set in the door opening flag provided in the sound light side RAM 165 (step S4114). The door opening command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 when the front door frame 14 is changed from the closed state to the open state. Further, the door opening flag is a flag for the sound light side CPU 163 to specify that the front door frame 14 is in the open state. After that, the notification start process is executed (step S4115). In the notification start processing, the data table for door opening notification is read from the sound light side ROM 164 to the sound light side RAM 165. Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 are notified that the front door frame 14 is in the open state. Further, the door opening command is transmitted to the display control device 82. Upon receiving the door opening command, the display control device 82 displays and controls the symbol display device 41 so that the notification indicating that the front door frame 14 is in the open state is executed.

When the sound light side CPU 163 receives the door closing command from the main side CPU 63 (step S4116: YES), the door opening flag of the sound light side RAM 165 is cleared to "0" (step S4117). The door closing command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 when the front door frame 14 is changed from the open state to the closed state. After that, the notification end process is executed (step S4118). In the notification end processing, the notification indicating that the front door frame 14 in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 is in the open state is terminated. Further, the door closing command is transmitted to the display control device 82. Upon receiving the door closing command, the display control device 82 displays and controls the symbol display device 41 so that the notification indicating that the front door frame 14 is in the open state is terminated.

After that, the history setting process is executed in step S4119, the check process is executed in step S4120, and then other processes are executed in step S4121. In other processing, processing such as when a variation command and a type command are received from the main CPU 63 is executed.

Next, the history setting process executed in step S4119 of the effect control process (FIG. 74) will be described.

First, the normal counter area 211, the open / close execution mode counter area 212, and the high frequency support mode counter area 213 provided in the sound / light side RAM 165 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. In each of these areas 211 to 213, the first counters 211a, 212a, 213a, the second counters 211b, 212b, 213b, the third counters 211c, 212c, 213c, the fourth counters 211d, 212d, 213d, and the fifth counters The 211e, 212e, 213e, the sixth counters 211f, 212f, 213f, and the seventh counters 211g, 212g, 213g are provided. The first counters 211a, 212a, and 213a store information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 202a is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The second counters 211b, 212b, and 213b store information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 202b is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The third counters 211c, 212c, and 213c store information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 202c is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourth counters 211d, 212d, and 213d store information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 202d is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fifth counters 211e, 212e, and 213e store information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 202e is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The sixth counters 211f, 212f, and 213f store information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 202f is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 7th counters 211g, 212g, and 213g store information on the number of times the output state of the 7th signal input to the 7th buffer 202g is changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a history setting process executed in step S4119 of the effect control process (FIG. 74) in the sound / light side CPU 163.

In the history setting process, when "1" is set in the door opening flag of the sound light side RAM 165, that is, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state (step S4201: YES), the normal history setting process is performed. (Step S4204), the history setting process in the open / close execution mode (step S4205), and the history setting process in the high frequency support mode (step S4206) are not executed. Since the game area PA is formed by the space divided back and forth by the back surface of the window panel 52 provided on the front door frame 14 and the front surface of the game board 24, when the front door frame 14 is opened. Even if the game area PA is opened toward the front and the game ball is launched toward the game area PA in that situation, the game ball cannot normally flow down the game area PA. In addition, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state and the game ball enters the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34, the game hall manager may use it for maintenance and to solve the problem. This is a case where the front door frame 14 is opened and a game ball enters due to maintenance or the like. Since the entry of such a game ball is not the entry of a game ball in the normal game execution status, it is not necessary to manage the entry of such a game ball. Therefore, in the history setting process, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state as described above, none of the processes of steps S4204 to S4206 is executed.

When "1" is not set in any of the door opening flag, opening / closing execution mode flag, and high frequency support flag of the sound light side RAM 165, that is, the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and the opening / closing execution mode and high frequency are set. When neither of the frequency support modes is used (steps S4201 to S4203: NO), a normal history setting process is executed (step S4204). In the normal history setting process, when it is confirmed that the first signal input to the first buffer 202a of the input port 201 has been switched to the HI level, the value of the normal first counter 211a is added by 1. When it is confirmed that the second signal input to the second buffer 202b has been switched to the HI level, the value of the second counter 211b for normal use is added by 1, and the third signal input to the third buffer 202c is added. When it is confirmed that the signal has been switched to the HI level, the value of the normal third counter 211c is added by 1, and it is confirmed that the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 202d has been switched to the HI level. In this case, the value of the 4th counter 211d for normal use is added by 1, and when it is confirmed that the 5th signal input to the 5th buffer 202e has been switched to the HI level, the 5th counter 211e for normal use is used. When the value is added by 1 and it is confirmed that the 6th signal input to the 6th buffer 202f has been switched to the HI level, the value of the 6th counter 211f for normal use is added by 1 to the 7th buffer 202g. When it is confirmed that the input 7th signal has been switched to the HI level, the value of the normal 7th counter 211g is added by 1.

When the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is in the open / close execution mode (step S4201: NO, step S4202: YES), the history setting process in the open / close execution mode is executed (step S4205). In the history setting process in the open / close execution mode, the value of the first counter 212a for the open / close execution mode when it is confirmed that the first signal input to the first buffer 202a of the input port 201 has been switched to the HI level. Is added by 1, and when it is confirmed that the second signal input to the second buffer 202b has been switched to the HI level, the value of the second counter 212b for the open / close execution mode is added by 1, and the third buffer 202c is added. When it is confirmed that the third signal input to the HI level has been switched to the HI level, the value of the third counter 212c for the open / close execution mode is incremented by 1, and the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 202d is input. When it is confirmed that the switch has been made to the HI level, the value of the 4th counter 212d for the open / close execution mode is added by 1, and it is confirmed that the 5th signal input to the 5th buffer 202e has been switched to the HI level. If this is the case, the value of the 5th counter 212e for the open / close execution mode is added by 1, and when it is confirmed that the 6th signal input to the 6th buffer 202f has been switched to the HI level, the open / close execution mode is set. 6 Add 1 to the value of the counter 212f, and add 1 to the value of the 7th counter 212g for the open / close execution mode when it is confirmed that the 7th signal input to the 7th buffer 202g has been switched to the HI level. ..

When the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is in the high frequency support mode (step S4201: NO, step S4203: YES), the history setting process in the high frequency support mode is executed (step S4206). In the history setting process during the high frequency support mode, when it is confirmed that the first signal input to the first buffer 202a of the input port 201 has been switched to the HI level, the first counter 213a for the high frequency support mode is confirmed. When it is confirmed that the second signal input to the second buffer 202b has been switched to the HI level, the value of the second counter 213b for the high frequency support mode is added by 1, and the first value is added. When it is confirmed that the third signal input to the 3 buffer 202c has been switched to the HI level, the value of the 3rd counter 213c for the high frequency support mode is added by 1 and input to the 4th buffer 202d. When it is confirmed that the 4th signal has been switched to the HI level, the value of the 4th counter 213d for the high frequency support mode is added by 1, and the 5th signal input to the 5th buffer 202e is switched to the HI level. When it is confirmed that the value has been changed, the value of the 5th counter 213e for the high frequency support mode is added by 1, and it is confirmed that the 6th signal input to the 6th buffer 202f has been switched to the HI level. When the value of the 6th counter 213f for the high frequency support mode is added by 1 and it is confirmed that the 7th signal input to the 7th buffer 202g has been switched to the HI level, the 7th for the high frequency support mode is used. The value of the counter 213g is added by 1.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a check process executed in step S4120 of the effect control process (FIG. 74) in the sound / light side CPU 163.

If it is not the check result display period (step S4301: NO), the processes of steps S4303 to S4308 are executed on condition that the check start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S4302: YES). The check start command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound / light side CPU 163 when the check start instruction signal is transmitted from the hall computer HC to the main CPU 63. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a check start command may be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound / light side CPU 163 when a predetermined period (for example, 30 sec) has elapsed from the start of the demo display. A check start command may be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound / light side CPU 163 when a predetermined operation unit provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is operated, and the main side may be configured when the predetermined time is reached. The check start command may be transmitted from the CPU 63 to the sound / light side CPU 163, and the check starts from the main side CPU 63 to the sound / light side CPU 163 every time a predetermined period (for example, 120 min) elapses from the transmission time of the previous check start command. The command may be sent. Further, the trigger for executing the processes of steps S4303 to S4308 is not limited to the configuration in which the command is received from the main CPU 63, and the event that triggered the transmission of the check start command as described above is not limited to the configuration. When the sound / light side CPU 163 grasps whether or not the event has occurred and the sound / light side CPU 163 grasps that the event has occurred, the processes of steps S4303 to S4308 may be executed.

In the processing of steps S4303 to S4308, first, normal arithmetic processing is executed (step S4303). In the normal arithmetic processing, by referring to the contents of the 1st to 7th correspondence areas 204a to 204g of the sound light side ROM 164, the same ball entry portion of the normal 1st to 7th counters 211a to 211g is used. The values of the counters corresponding to 24a, 31 to 34 are summed. Specifically, since the information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is stored in the first to third correspondence areas 204a to 204c as described above, these first to third correspondence areas 204a to 204a K2, which is the total value, is calculated by summing the values of the first to third counters 211a to 211c for normal use corresponding to 204c. On the other hand, information corresponding to the separate ball entry portions 24a and 32 to 34 are stored in the fourth to seventh correspondence areas 204d to 204g, respectively. In this case, the values of the 4th to 7th counters 211d to 211g for normal use are grasped as the values of the different ball entry portions 24a and 32 to 34, respectively. Specifically, the value of the 7th counter 211g for normal use is set to K1 corresponding to the out port 24a, the value of the 4th counter 211d for normal use is set to K3 corresponding to the special electric winning device 32, and the 5th counter for normal use is used. The value of 211e is K4 corresponding to the first operating port 33, and the value of the sixth counter 211f for normal use is K5 corresponding to the second operating port 34. Then, the parameter 7 and the parameter 8 are calculated in the same manner as the aggregation process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. After that, the same processing as the parameter management processing (FIG. 48) in the eleventh embodiment is executed for various parameters in the normal state. That is, when the value of the 7th parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the 8th parameter is 0.6 or less, it is assumed that the various calculated parameters are in the 1st range, and the value of the 7th parameter is 0. If only one of the conditions of exceeding 7 and the value of the 8th parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, it is assumed that the various calculated parameters are in the 2nd range, and the 7th parameter is used. When the value of the parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the 8th parameter exceeds 0.6, the determination process that the calculated various parameters are in the 3rd range is changed to the various parameters at the normal time. Execute against. Then, the information of the determination result is written in the main RAM 65.

After that, the arithmetic processing for the open / close execution mode is executed (step S4304). In the arithmetic processing for the open / close execution mode, K2, which is the total value, is calculated by summing the values of the first to third counters 212a to 212c for the open / close execution mode in the same manner as in the normal arithmetic processing (step S4303). .. Further, the value of the 7th counter 212g for the open / close execution mode is set to K1 corresponding to the out port 24a, and the value of the 4th counter 212d for the open / close execution mode is set to K3 corresponding to the special electric winning device 32, and is used for the open / close execution mode. The value of the fifth counter 212e is K4 corresponding to the first operating port 33, and the value of the sixth counter 212f for the open / close execution mode is K5 corresponding to the second operating port 34. Then, the parameter 7 and the parameter 8 are calculated in the same manner as the aggregation process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. After that, the same processing as the parameter management processing (FIG. 48) in the eleventh embodiment is executed for various parameters in the open / close execution mode. That is, when the value of the 7th parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the 8th parameter is 0.6 or less, it is assumed that the various calculated parameters are in the 1st range, and the value of the 7th parameter is 0. If only one of the conditions of exceeding 7 and the value of the 8th parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, it is assumed that the various calculated parameters are in the 2nd range, and the 7th parameter is used. When the value of the parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the 8th parameter exceeds 0.6, the determination processing that the calculated various parameters are in the 3rd range is performed in the open / close execution mode. Execute for parameters. Then, the information of the determination result is written in the main RAM 65.

After that, the arithmetic processing for the high frequency support mode is executed (step S4305). In the arithmetic processing for the high-frequency support mode, K2, which is the total value, is obtained by summing the values of the first to third counters 213a to 213c for the high-frequency support mode as in the normal arithmetic processing (step S4303). calculate. Further, the value of the 7th counter 213g for the high frequency support mode is set to K1 corresponding to the out port 24a, and the value of the 4th counter 213d for the high frequency support mode is set to K3 corresponding to the special electric winning device 32. The value of the fifth counter 213e for the mode is K4 corresponding to the first operating port 33, and the value of the sixth counter 213f for the high frequency support mode is K5 corresponding to the second operating port 34. Then, the parameter 7 and the parameter 8 are calculated in the same manner as the aggregation process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. After that, the same processing as the parameter management processing (FIG. 48) in the eleventh embodiment is executed for various parameters in the high frequency support mode. That is, when the value of the 7th parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the 8th parameter is 0.6 or less, it is assumed that the various calculated parameters are in the 1st range, and the value of the 7th parameter is 0. If only one of the conditions of exceeding 7 and the value of the 8th parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, it is assumed that the various calculated parameters are in the 2nd range, and the 7th parameter is used. When the value of the parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the 8th parameter exceeds 0.6, the determination process that the calculated various parameters are in the 3rd range is performed in the high frequency support mode. Execute for various parameters. Then, the information of the determination result is written in the main RAM 65.

After that, the display start processing of the calculation result is executed (step S4306). In the display start process, the determination result command corresponding to the information of each determination result derived in each arithmetic process of steps S4303 to S4305 is transmitted to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the determination result command, all the information of each determination result derived in each calculation process of steps S4303 to S4305 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. As a result, an image showing whether the various parameters in the normal state correspond to the first range, the second range, or the third range, and the various parameters in the open / close execution mode are the first range, the second range, and the first range. An image showing which of the three ranges is supported and an image showing whether the various parameters in the high frequency support mode correspond to the first range, the second range, or the third range are displayed as symbols. It is displayed on the device 41. In this case, the image corresponding to the information of these determination results corresponds to various parameters in the normal time, various parameters in the open / close execution mode, and various parameters in the high frequency support mode in the corner portion of the symbol display device 41. Each of these images is displayed in such a manner that the manager of the game hall can recognize whether or not the image is being played.

After that, the information corresponding to the display period (specifically, 30 sec) of the check result is set in the display counter provided in the sound / light side RAM 165 (step S4307). The value set in the display counter is periodically (for example, 4 msec cycle) subtracted. Further, "1" is set in the displaying flag provided in the sound / light side RAM 165 (step S4308). The display flag is a flag for the sound light side CPU 163 to specify that it is the display period of the check result.

When "1" is set in the display flag of the sound / light side RAM 165, an affirmative determination is made in step S4301. In this case, the value of the display counter of the sound / light side RAM 165 is subtracted by 1 (step S4309). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the display counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S4310). When the value of the display counter is "0" (step S4310: YES), the operation result display end processing is executed (step S4311). In the display end process, a display end command is transmitted to the display control device 82 so that the display of the image corresponding to the information of each determination result in the symbol display device 41 is terminated. By receiving the display end command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display of the image corresponding to the information of each determination result is terminated.

After that, the displaying flag of the sound / light side RAM 165 is cleared to “0” (step S4312). Further, when the process of step S4312 is executed, the counters 211a to 211g of the normal counter area 211, the counters 212a to 212g of the counter area 212 for the open / close execution mode, and the counters 213a of the counter area 213 for the high frequency support mode are executed. Clear the value of ~ 213g to "0". As a result, the ball entry history of the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 is initialized, and the management of the ball entry history is newly started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the process of step S4312 is executed, the counters 211a to 211g of the normal counter area 211, the counters 212a to 212g of the counter area 212 for the open / close execution mode, and the high frequency support are provided. The values of the counters 213a to 213g in the mode counter area 213 may be maintained as they are. In this case, the ball entry history of the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 is accumulated so as to straddle the execution times of the notification of the calculation result using the ball entry history a plurality of times. Further, in the configuration, based on the reception of the history erasing signal from the hall computer HC and the occurrence of the erasing operation using the operation unit provided in the pachinko machine 10, the ball entry history of the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 May be configured to be erased.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the accumulation of the ball entry history of the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34, the calculation using the ball entry history, and the notification of the calculation result are not on the main side CPU 63 but on the sound light side. It is executed by the CPU 163. As a result, while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the main CPU 63 that centrally manages the progress of the game, the ball entry history of the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 is accumulated, and the calculation using the ball entry history is performed. , And the notification of the calculation result can be executed.

The ball entry results of the ball entry units 24a and 31 to 34 are sounded from the main CPU 63 using a dedicated signal path provided separately from the signal path for transmitting a command from the main CPU 63 to the sound light side CPU 163. It is transmitted to the optical side CPU 163. As a result, it is possible to transmit the ball entry result of the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 from the main side CPU 63 to the sound light side CPU 163 without increasing the number of commands.

Information indicating which signal path the entry result of the entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 corresponds to, and corresponding to each signal path. Information on the number of prize balls of the game ball is stored in advance in the sound light side ROM 164. As a result, processing for grasping which signal path corresponds to the entry result of which entry section 24a, 31 to 34, and information on the number of prize balls of the game ball corresponding to each signal path are obtained. There is no need to transmit from the main CPU 63 to the sound / light side CPU 163.

It should be noted that the ball entry results of the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 are limited to the configuration in which the ball entry results are transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound light side CPU 163 using a dedicated signal path different from the command signal path. However, for example, it may be configured to be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound light side CPU 163 by using a signal path for a command. In this case, the command corresponding to the type of each ball entry unit 24a, 31 to 34 may be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound light side CPU 163. In the configuration, each command may include information on the number of prize balls corresponding to each entry unit 24a, 31 to 34, and the information on the number of prize balls corresponding to each command is ROM 164 on the sound / light side. It may be a configuration stored in advance in.

<16th Embodiment>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the notification of the calculation result of various parameters using the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24a and 31 to 34 is executed by using the special figure display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a. However, in the present embodiment, the display unit for executing this notification is different. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

In the present embodiment, the notification display device 215 to 217 is provided on the main control board 61 of the main control device 60. First, the main control device 60 will be described. 78 is a front view of the main control device 60, and FIG. 79 is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 78.

As shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 housed in a board box 60a. As shown in FIG. 79, the MPU 62 is mounted on the element mounting surface 61a, which is one of the plate surfaces of the main control board 61. The substrate box 60a is transparently formed so that the MPU 62 housed in the substrate box 60a can be visually recognized from the outside of the substrate box 60a. Although the substrate box 60a is formed to be colorless and transparent, it may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 62 housed in the substrate box 60a can be visually recognized from the outside of the substrate box 60a. The main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 so that the facing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface 61a of the main control board 61 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10 in the board box 60a. Therefore, by opening the gaming machine main body 12 to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 to expose the back surface of the resin base 21, it becomes possible to visually recognize the facing wall portion 60b of the substrate box 60a. It becomes possible to visually check the MPU 62 through the facing wall portion 60b.

The substrate box 60a is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies 60c and 60d back and forth, and the plurality of case bodies 60c and 60d are separated from each other as shown in FIG. 78. A connecting portion 60e is provided for blocking and leaving a trace of the case bodies 60c and 60d when they are separated. A plurality of connecting portions 60e are arranged side by side on one side of the substrate box 60a having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. As a result, even if the partial joints 60e are destroyed and the case bodies 60c and 60d are separated in a state where the separation of the case bodies 60c and 60d is prevented by using the partial joints 60e, the case bodies 60c and 60d are subsequently separated. By setting another coupling portion 60e in the coupling state, it is possible to prevent the case bodies 60c and 60d from being separated again. Further, when the case bodies 60c and 60d are separated, the joint portion 60e is destroyed and a trace thereof remains. Therefore, by visually checking the joint portion 60e, it is possible to check whether the case bodies 60c and 60d are separated illegally. It becomes possible to grasp. Further, in the substrate box 60a, a sealing seal 60f is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies 60c and 60d on the side opposite to the side on which the connecting portions 60e are arranged side by side. When the seal seal 60f is peeled off, an adhesive layer remains on the case bodies 60c and 60d. As a result, when the sealing seal 60f is peeled off when the case bodies 60c and 60d are separated, it is possible to leave a trace thereof.

In the main control device 60 having the above configuration, the main control board 61 is provided with a plurality of notification display devices 215 to 217 as shown in FIG. 78. Specifically, a first notification display device 215, a second notification display device 216, and a third notification display device 217 are provided. The first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 are all segment display devices in which seven display segments by LEDs are arranged, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a single multicolor light emitting type is used. It may be a light emitter, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. The first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 are all installed so that their display surfaces face the direction in which the element mounting surface 61a of the main control board 61 faces. This makes it possible to visually check the display surface of the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 housed in the board box 60a from the outside of the board box 60a. Further, as described above, the main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 in the board box 60a so that the facing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface 61a of the main control board 61 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to third are passed through the facing wall portion 60b. It becomes possible to visually check the notification display device 215 to 217.

In the first notification display device 215, various parameters (seventh parameter and eighth parameter) in the normal state specified in the aggregation process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment are performed. The judgment result of is displayed. In this case, when the determination result of the various parameters is in the first range, the characters, symbols, numbers or colors corresponding to the first range are displayed on the first notification display device 215, and the determination result of the various parameters is displayed. Is in the second range, characters, symbols, numbers or colors corresponding to the second range are displayed on the first notification display device 215, and when the determination result of the various parameters is in the third range, Characters, symbols, numbers or colors corresponding to the third range are displayed on the first notification display device 215.

In the second notification display device 216, various parameters (seventh parameter and eighth parameter) in the open / close execution mode specified in the aggregation process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment are performed. The judgment result of the parameter) is displayed. In this case, when the determination result of the various parameters is in the first range, the characters, symbols, numbers or colors corresponding to the first range are displayed on the second notification display device 216, and the determination result of the various parameters is displayed. When is in the second range, the characters, symbols, numbers or colors corresponding to the second range are displayed on the second notification display device 216, and when the determination result of the various parameters is in the third range, The second notification display device 216 displays characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the third range.

In the third notification display device 217, various parameters (seventh parameter and seventh parameter) in the high frequency support mode specified in the aggregation process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment are performed. The determination result of 8 parameters) is displayed. In this case, when the determination result of the various parameters is in the first range, the characters, symbols, numbers or colors corresponding to the first range are displayed on the third notification display device 217, and the determination result of the various parameters is displayed. Is in the second range, characters, symbols, numbers or colors corresponding to the second range are displayed on the third notification display device 217, and when the determination result of the various parameters is in the third range, Characters, symbols, numbers or colors corresponding to the third range are displayed on the third notification display device 217.

Incidentally, the display of each determination result in the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 is checked in the same manner as the display of each determination result in the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a in the thirteenth embodiment. It starts when the result display period is reached and ends when the check result display period ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 may be configured to constantly display the immediately preceding determination results. Further, when the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 is detected by the sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine main body 12, the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 immediately before. The display of each determination result is started, and when it is detected by the sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 that the gaming machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the first to third The display of each determination result on the notification display device 215 to 217 may be terminated. In this case, it is possible to limit the period during which the display is performed on the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217.

In the substrate box 60a, a blocking sheet 60g is provided in the facing region facing the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 on the facing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface 61a of the main control board 61. The blocking sheet 60g is provided in the substrate box 60a to make the inside of the substrate box 60a, more specifically, the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217, invisible through the region where the blocking sheet 60g is provided. ing. Specifically, the hologram sheet is provided as the blocking sheet 60 g, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a reflective sheet or a diffused reflective sheet may be provided. Since the blocking sheet 60g is provided, even if the area where the blocking sheet 60g is provided is visually observed from the front in the substrate box 60a, the presence of the blocking sheet 60g causes the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217. It becomes impossible to see visually. As a result, when the game machine main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 for the purpose of maintenance or the like in a situation where the game is being played in the pachinko machine 10, the first to third players are allowed to play the game. The possibility that the notification display device 215 to 217 is visually inspected is reduced.

On the other hand, since the blocking sheet 60g is provided in a part of the facing wall portion 60b, the facing wall portion 60b can be visually observed diagonally toward the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217. The display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 60a. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can visually check the notification contents of each determination result in the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 from the outside of the board box 60a.

Incidentally, the blocking sheet 60g is not provided in the region facing the MPU 62 in the facing wall portion 60b. As a result, even if the blocking sheet 60 g is provided, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the MPU 62 from being deteriorated at the time of visual confirmation.

In addition, instead of the blocking sheet 60g, a member for reducing the visibility of the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 may be provided. For example, a sheet that is colored and transparent but has low transparency may be provided in place of the blocking sheet 60 g. In this case, when the sheet is viewed from the front, the display surface of the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 can be visually recognized, but the display content on the display surface becomes difficult to see.

<17th embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, an example in which the configuration for managing the game history is adopted in the pachinko machine 10 is shown, but in the present embodiment, an example in which the configuration for managing the game history is adopted in the slot machine 310 is shown. First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 310 will be described. 80 is a front view of the slot machine 310, FIG. 81 is a perspective view of the slot machine 310 with the front door 312 open, and FIG. 82 is a front view of the housing 311.

As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the slot machine 310 includes a housing 311 that forms its outer shell. The housing 311 is formed in a box shape that is open to the front as a whole by fixing a plurality of wooden panels.

As shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, a front door 312 is attached to the front side of the housing 311. The front door 312 is supported by the housing 311 so as to be able to open and close the internal space of the housing 311 with the shaft portion 312a provided on the left side thereof as a rotating shaft. The front door 312 is locked so that it cannot be opened by the locking device 312b provided on the back surface thereof, and this locked state is released by an unlocking operation with a predetermined key to the key cylinder 313.

As shown in FIG. 80, a game panel 314 is provided near the center of the front door 312. The game panel 314 is formed so that three vertically long display window portions 315L, 315M, and 315R are arranged side by side. The display window portions 315L, 315M, and 315R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 310 can be visually recognized through the display window portions 315L, 315M, and 315R.

As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the inside of the housing 311 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 311a, and a reel unit 316 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 311a. The reel unit 316 includes a left reel 316L, a middle reel 316M, and a right reel 316R, which are formed in a cylindrical shape, respectively. Each reel 316L, 316M, 316R is rotatably supported so that its central axis is the rotation axis of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R. The rotation axes of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R are arranged on the same axis extending in the substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 316L, 316M, 316R correspond one-to-one with the display window portions 315L, 315M, 315R. There is. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 316L, 316M, 316R is visible through the corresponding display window portions 315L, 315M, 315R, respectively. Further, when the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R rotate in the forward direction, the surfaces of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are projected as if they are moving from top to bottom through the display window portions 315L, 315M, and 315R.

As shown in FIG. 80, a start lever 321 operated to start the rotation of each reel 316L, 316M, 316R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 314. When the start lever 321 is operated while a game medium such as a medal is bet, the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R start to rotate all at once.

On the right side of the start lever 321 are stop buttons 322, 323, 324 operated to individually stop the rotating reels 316L, 316M, 316R. Each stop button 322, 323, 324 is arranged directly below the display window portions 315L, 315M, 315R corresponding to the reels 316L, 316M, 316R to be stopped. Each stop button 322, 323, 324 is in a state where it can be stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of rotation of the left reel 316L.

The rotation of each reel 316L, 316M, 316R is started based on the operation of the start lever 321 and the rotation of each reel 316L, 316M, 316R is stopped based on the operation of each stop button 322, 323, 324, and the game medium. It corresponds to one game (game times) until the execution of various processes such as the granting of the reels and the management of the game state is completed.

On the lower right side of the display window portions 315L, 315M, and 315R, a medal insertion slot 325 for inserting a medal as an investment value is provided. As shown in FIG. 81, the medals inserted from the medal slot 325 are guided to the hopper device 318 by the selector 317 provided on the back surface of the front door 312 when reception is permitted, and when reception is prohibited. The medal ejection port 312c provided at the lower part of the front surface of the front door 312 leads to the medal tray 312d (see FIG. 80). The hopper device 318 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal tray 312d through the medal discharge port 312c when a prize corresponding to the granting of the game medium is established on the effective line. There is.

Below the medal slot 325, as shown in FIG. 80, a return button 326 that is pressed when the medal inserted in the medal slot 325 is jammed in the selector 317 is provided. Further, on the lower left side of the display window 315L, 315M, 315R, a first credit insertion button 327 for inserting the maximum number of credited virtual medals that can be bet at one time, and two virtual medals at a time are inserted. A second credit insertion button 328 for inserting a virtual medal and a third credit insertion button 329 for inserting one virtual medal at a time are provided.

A checkout button 331 is provided on the left side of the start lever 321. That is, the slot machine 310 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until the predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the settlement button 331 is operated under the condition of being stored and stored, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal ejection port 312c as a real medal.

As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, a power supply device 319 is provided inside the housing 311. The power supply device 319 includes a power switch 319a that is operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 319b for resetting various states of the slot machine 310, and setting states of the slot machine 310 from "setting 1" to "setting 1". A setting key insertion hole 319c that is operated to change within the range of "setting 6" is provided.

Next, the symbols attached to the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R will be described.

FIG. 83 shows the design arrangement of the left reel 316L, the middle reel 316M, and the right reel 316R. As shown in the figure, 20 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 316L, 316M, 316R. Further, the numbers are assigned from "0" to "19" corresponding to each reel 316L, 316M, 316R, and these numbers are in a state where the main control device 340 can be visually recognized from the display window unit 315L, 315M, 315R. It is a number for recognizing the symbol, and is not actually attached to the reels 316L, 316M, 316R. However, in the following description, the number will be used.

The symbols include a "bell" symbol (for example, the 19th of the left reel 316L), a "watermelon" symbol (for example, the 18th of the left reel 316L), a "cherry" symbol (for example, the 17th of the left reel 316L), and " "Replay" symbol (eg, 16th on left reel 316L), "BAR" symbol (eg, 15th on left reel 316L), "LUCKY" symbol (eg, 13th on left reel 316L), "Red 7" symbol (eg, 13th on left reel 316L) For example, there are eight types: the 12th of the left reel 316L) and the "white 7" symbol (for example, the 10th of the left reel 316L). As shown in FIG. 83, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different in each reel 316L, 316M, 316R.

FIG. 84 is a front view of the display window portions 315L, 315M, and 315R. Each display window portion 315L, 315M, 315R is formed so that three of the 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reels 316L, 316M, 316R can be visually recognized as a whole. Therefore, when each reel 316L, 316M, 316R is stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized via the display window portion 315L, 315M, 315R.

In the slot machine 310, one main line ML is set so as to connect the positions where the symbols of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R can be visually recognized. The main line ML is a line connecting the middle symbol of the left reel 316L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 316M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 316R. If the rotation of each reel 316L, 316M, 316R is started with the specified number of medals bet and the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, the profit of paying out the medals and the replay Either the benefit or the transition of the gaming state is given.

That is, in the slot machine 310, only one main line ML is set as a line on which a prize can be established. The main line ML is set as a line extending in a straight line. Therefore, the sub-line SUL1 connecting the upper design of the left reel 316L, the middle design of the middle reel 316M and the lower design of the right reel 316R, and the upper design of the left reel 316L, the upper design of the middle reel 316M and the upper design of the right reel 316R Subline SUL2 connecting the connected subline SUL2 and the lower symbol of the left reel 316L, the lower symbol of the middle reel 316M and the lower symbol of the right reel 316R, and the lower symbol of the left reel 316L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 316M and the right reel 316R. Even if a combination of symbols to be won is established on a line extending in a straight line such as the sub line SUL4 connecting the upper symbols, the prize is not established.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 85, the correspondence between the combination of the symbols to be won and the privilege given when the prize is won will be described. FIG. 85 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the combination of the symbols to be won and the privilege given when the prize is won.

The small winning combination prizes for which medals are paid out include the first supplementary prize, the second supplementary prize, the third supplementary prize, the bell prize, the first watermelon prize, the second watermelon prize, and the cherry prize. Specifically, on the mainline ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is either the "BAR" symbol or the "white 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is the "bell" symbol, and the right reel 316R. If the stop symbol is a "bell" symbol, it will be the first supplementary prize. Further, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is either a "watermelon" symbol or a "LUCKY" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is a "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is. If it is a "bell" symbol, it will be the second supplementary prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML. It will be the third supplementary prize. In the case of any of the first supplementary prize to the third supplementary prize, the number of game media to be granted is "1".

If the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the bell is won. Will be. If the bell is won, the number of game media to be granted will be "9".

When the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is the "watermelon" symbol on the main line ML, the first It will be a watermelon prize. If the first watermelon wins, the number of game media to be granted will be "7".

When the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML, the second It will be a watermelon prize. If the second watermelon wins, the number of game media to be granted will be "7".

When the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is the "cherry" symbol on the main line ML, the cherry prize is won regardless of whether the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M or the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is. In the case of a cherry prize, the number of game media to be granted is "2".

Normal replay prize, 1st RT replay prize, 2nd RT replay prize, 1st fall replay are given as prizes that can be played in the next game without betting medals (or virtual medals). There is a prize and a second fall replay prize. Specifically, on the mainline ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is the "replay" symbol. In that case, it is usually a replay prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the first RT It will be a replay prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the second RT It will be a replay prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the first It will be a fall replay prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is the "watermelon" symbol on the main line ML, the second It will be a fall replay prize.

If any of the above replay prizes are won, it is possible to play the next game while eliminating the need for bets on both medals and virtual medals. Specifically, if one of the replay prizes is won in a game in which three medals are bet, the game of the next game can be started in the state of three bets while eliminating the need for bets on both medals and virtual medals. It will be possible.

Of the various replay prizes mentioned above, the 1st RT replay prize, the 2nd RT replay prize, the 1st fall replay prize, and the 2nd fall replay prize not only serve as an opportunity to grant the benefits of the replay prize, but also as an opportunity to shift the game state. Become. In this slot machine 310, a plurality of types of gaming states are set so that the types of winning combinations to be drawn and the winning probabilities of each winning combination are different in the winning combination lottery process, and the transition between these gaming states is the transition of the gaming states. Occurs when a trigger replay prize is established.

There are a first BB prize and a second BB prize as a state transition prize in which only the transition of the gaming state is performed. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is the "red 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is the "red 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is the "red 7" symbol. If it is a symbol, it will be the first BB prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is the "white 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is the "white 7" symbol on the main line ML. , The second BB prize. When the first BB prize or the second BB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

The BB state is a gaming state in which the expected number of game media to be granted per unit number of games is higher than in the normal mode described later and the non-AT state (this state is also referred to as a normal gaming state). Furthermore, the BB state is a gaming state in which the expected number of game media to be granted per unit game number is higher than any of the gaming states other than the BB state. Specifically, the winning combination that enables the winning of the bell is won with a higher probability (for example, about 1 / 1.1) than in other gaming states, and if the winning combination is won, each reel 316L. , 316M, 316R, and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324 with respect to the rotation positions of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R, the bell winning is established. The BB state continues over a plurality of games and ends when the end condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of an event according to the execution content of the game. The end condition is arbitrary, but in this slot machine 310, it is set as an end condition that the total number of game media given after the BB state is started is equal to or more than the end reference number (for example, "350"). There is.

Next, a device for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

As shown in FIG. 80, an upper lamp 332 and a speaker 333 are provided on the upper part of the front door 312, and an image display device 334 is provided. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 310, the upper lamp 332 is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and is also controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Further, the upper lamp 332 is controlled to emit light so as to perform a light emitting effect corresponding to the display effect in the image display device 334. The speakers 333 are provided as a pair on the left and right, and when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 310, the sound output is controlled so that the sound or voice corresponding to the abnormality is output, and the sound or voice corresponding to the winning result is output. Sound output is controlled so that is output. Further, the speaker 333 is sound output controlled so that the sound output effect corresponding to the display effect in the image display device 334 is performed.

The image display device 334 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. It may be another display device having a display surface, or it may be a dot matrix display. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 310, the display is controlled so that the image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. Further, the image display device 334 is controlled so that an image corresponding to the winning result of the winning combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game is displayed on the display surface.

The game panel 314 of the front door 312 has a credit display unit 335 that displays the number of virtual medals stored and stored at a position below the display window units 315L, 315M, and 315R, and is a target for granting a small winning combination. Each is provided with a grant number display unit 336 that displays the number of game media. These display units 335 and 336 are composed of a 7-segment display, and a monochromatic light emitting type LED such as green is used for each segment.

The slot machine 310 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 82, a main control device 340 is provided above the reel unit 316. The main control device 340 is attached to a back plate 311b that raises the back surface portion of the housing 311. The main control device 340 is configured such that the main control board 341 is housed in the board box 345.

The MPU 342 is mounted on the element mounting surface, which is one of the plate surfaces of the main control board 341. The substrate box 345 is transparently formed so that the MPU 342 housed in the substrate box 345 can be visually recognized from the outside of the substrate box 345. Although the substrate box 345 is colorless and transparent, it may be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 342 housed in the substrate box 345 can be visually recognized from the outside of the substrate box 345. The main control device 340 is mounted on the back surface of the back plate 311b of the housing 311 so that the facing wall portion 345a facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 341 faces the front of the slot machine 310 in the board box 345. Therefore, by opening the front door 312 in front of the slot machine 310 with respect to the housing 311 to expose the internal space of the housing 311, it becomes possible to visually check the facing wall portion 345a of the board box 345. The MPU 342 can be visually observed through the facing wall portion 345a.

The substrate box 345 is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies in the front-rear direction, and the plurality of case bodies are used to prevent the case bodies from being separated and to leave a trace thereof when the case bodies are separated. A coupling portion 345b is provided. A plurality of connecting portions 345b are arranged side by side on one side of the substrate box 345 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. As a result, even if the case body is separated by destroying the part of the joint portion 345b in a state where the separation of the case body is prevented by using a part of the joint portion 345b, another joint portion 345b is subsequently separated. It is possible to prevent the separation of the case body again by putting the case in a bonded state. In addition, when the case body is separated, the joint portion 345b is destroyed and its trace remains, so that it is possible to grasp whether or not the case body is illegally separated by visually checking the joint portion 345b. Become. Further, in the substrate box 345, a sealing seal 345c is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies on one side different from the one side on which the connecting portions 345b are arranged side by side. When the seal seal 345c is peeled off, an adhesive layer remains on the case body. As a result, when the seal seal 345c is peeled off when the case body is separated, it is possible to leave a trace thereof.

In the main control device 340 having the above configuration, the main control board 341 is provided with a plurality of notification display devices 346 to 348. Specifically, a first notification display device 346, a second notification display device 347, and a third notification display device 348 are provided. The first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 are all segment display devices in which seven display segments by LEDs are arranged, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a single multicolor light emitting type is used. It may be a light emitter, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. The first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 are all installed so that their display surfaces face the same direction as the element mounting surface of the main control board 341. This makes it possible to visually check the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 housed in the board box 345 from the outside of the board box 345. Further, as described above, the main control device 340 is mounted on the back plate 311b of the housing 311 so that the facing wall portion 345a facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 341 faces the front of the slot machine 310 in the board box 345. Therefore, when the front door 312 is opened to the front of the slot machine 310 with respect to the housing 311 to expose the internal space of the housing 311 to the front of the slot machine 310, the first to first doors are passed through the facing wall portion 345a. 3 It becomes possible to visually check the notification display devices 346 to 348. The management result of the game history is notified by using the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348. This will be described in detail later.

The visual confirmation of the main control device 340 is performed by opening the front door 312 in front of the slot machine 310 with respect to the housing 311. Lighting devices 349a and 349b are provided in the housing 311 in order to improve the visibility of the visual confirmation of the main control device 340 performed by opening the front door 312. One lighting device 349a and one 349b are provided on the back surface of the left side plate 311c and the back surface of the right side plate 311d of the housing 311 so as to form a pair on the left and right. The lighting devices 349a and 349b are provided with a high-intensity LED as a light emitting body, and are installed so that the irradiation direction of the light is the main control device 340. The light irradiation range IR by the lighting devices 349a and 349b includes a range facing the MPU 342 in the facing wall portion 345a of the main control device 340. This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the MPU 342. Further, the irradiation range IR includes a range facing the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 on the facing wall portion 345a of the main control device 340. This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348. Further, the irradiation range IR includes a range in which the coupling portion 345b is provided and a range in which the sealing seal 345c is provided in the substrate box 345 of the main control device 340. This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the joint portion 345b and the sealing seal 345c.

The irradiation of light from the lighting devices 349a and 349b is performed according to the opening angle of the front door 312 with respect to the housing 311, which will be described in detail later. In order to detect the opening angle of the front door 312, an opening angle sensor 312e is provided on the back surface of the front door 312 at a position adjacent to the shaft portion 312a as shown in FIG. 81. The opening angle sensor 312e can detect whether or not the front door 312 is closed with respect to the housing 311, and when the front door 312 is open, the opening angle is a predetermined opening angle. It is possible to detect whether or not it exceeds. The method of detecting the opening angle of the front door 312 by the opening angle sensor 312e is arbitrary, but for example, when the front door 312 is in the closed state, it is in a pressed state and the front door 312 is in the open state. The detection unit that releases the pressed state and the detection unit that does not enter the pressed state until the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds the predetermined opening angle to enter the pressing state and the opening angle of the front door 312 reaches the predetermined opening angle. A configuration having each of and is conceivable.

The slot machine 310 is provided with an effect control device 350 as shown in FIG. 81 in addition to the main control device 340. The effect control device 350 is arranged on the front door 312 so as to be overlapped behind the image display device 334. The effect control device 350 controls the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334 based on the command received from the main control device 340. In the effect control device 350, the control board is housed in the board box as in the main control device 340.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 310 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The main control device 340 includes a main control board 341 that controls the main control of the game. The MPU 342 is mounted on the main control board 341. The MPU 342 is a ROM 343 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 342, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 343 is executed. A certain RAM 344, a clock circuit, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are built-in. It is not essential that the ROM 343 and the RAM 344 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 342, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 342 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. On the input side of the MPU 342, a reel unit 316, a start detection sensor 321a that detects the operation of the start lever 321, a stop detection sensor 322a, 323a, 324a that individually detects the operation of each stop button 322, 323, 324, and a medal are inserted. The insertion medal detection sensor 325a that detects the medals inserted from the mouth 325, the credit insertion detection sensors 327a, 328a, 329a that individually detect the operation of each credit insertion button 327, 328, 329, and the operation of the settlement button 331 are detected. The settlement detection sensor 331a, the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 318, the sensor that detects the operation of the reset button 319b provided in the power supply device 319, and the setting key inserted in the setting key insertion hole 319c provided in the power supply device 319. Various sensors such as a sensor for detecting the above and an opening angle sensor 312e for detecting the opening angle of the front door 312 are connected, and signals from these sensors are input to the MPU 342.

On the output side of the MPU 342, the reel unit 316, the selector drive unit 317a provided in the selector 317, the payout motor of the hopper device 318, the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348, the lighting devices 349a and 349b, and The effect control device 350 and the like are connected. In each game, the rotation drive control of each reel 316L, 316M, 316R of the reel unit 316 is performed by the MPU 342. As described above, the selector 317 detects the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 325 by the insertion medal detection sensor 325a when the reception is permitted, and then guides the medal to the hopper device 318. It has a function of discharging to the medal tray 312d without being detected by the detection sensor 325a. The selector drive unit 317a has a function for switching the state of the selector 317 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state. Specifically, the passage switching piece provided in the selector 317 is positioned for reception permission. And operate between the reception prohibited position. The MPU 342 switches the state of the selector 317 between the acceptance permitted state and the acceptance prohibited state by switching the output state and the stop state of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 317a.

Further, the MPU 342 executes the drive control of the hopper device 318 when the small winning combination is established and the medal is paid out. Further, the MPU 342 starts the display for notifying the management result of the game history on the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 342 is started, and also starts the display of the game history. The display contents are updated every time the management result is updated. Further, the MPU 342 executes light emission control of the lighting devices 349a and 349b according to the opening angle of the front door 312. Further, the MPU 342 transmits a command to the effect control device 350 at each timing of each game, and also transmits a command to notify the effect control device 350 of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R in the image display device 334. ..

A power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply device 319 is connected to the input side of the MPU 342 (not shown). The power supply device 319 includes a power supply unit and a power failure monitoring circuit that supply drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 310 including the main control device 340, and the power failure monitoring circuit is applied from an external power source to the power supply unit. The voltage is monitored, and when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the reference voltage, a power failure signal is output to the MPU 342. The MPU 342 executes the power failure processing by receiving the power failure signal, and makes it possible to return to the processing state before the power failure after the power is restored. Further, the power supply device 319 is provided with a power supply unit during power failure to supply backup power to RAM 344 as power during power failure in a situation where the supply of operating power from an external power source is cut off. As a result, even if the supply of operating power from the external power supply is cut off, the data is stored and retained in the RAM 344 in the situation where the backup power can be supplied in the power supply unit during the power failure (for example, 1 day or 2 days). Will be done. However, the data stored and held in the RAM 344 is initialized by turning on the power of the slot machine 310 while pressing the reset button 319b provided on the power supply device 319.

The effect control device 350 includes an effect control board 351 for controlling various notifications and execution of various effects. The MPU 352 is mounted on the effect control board 351. The MPU 352 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a ROM 353 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 352 and a control program stored in the ROM 353. A RAM 354 is built in, and a clock circuit, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are built in. It is not essential that the ROM 353 and the RAM 354 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 352, and each may be individually chipped. Further, the RAM 354 is configured such that the backup power is not supplied from the power supply unit during the power failure of the power supply device when the supply of the operating power from the external power supply is cut off, but the backup power is supplied to the RAM 354. good.

The MPU 352 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. As described above, the MPU 342 of the main control device 340 is connected to the input side of the MPU 352, and various commands are received from the MPU 342. An upper lamp 332, a speaker 333, and an image display device 334 are connected to the output side of the MPU 352. The MPU 352 executes various notifications and various effects by executing light emission control of the upper lamp 332, sound output control of the speaker 333, and display control of the image display device 334 based on the command received from the MPU 342 of the main control device 340. To be done.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 342, ROM 343, and RAM 344 of the main control device 340 are referred to as the main side MPU 342, the main side ROM 343, and the main side RAM 344, respectively, and the effect control device 350 MPU 352, ROM 353, and RAM 354 are referred to as the effect side, respectively. It is called MPU352, production side ROM 353, and production side RAM 354.

Next, the process executed by the main MPU 342 will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the main MPU 342.

In the main process, the initialization process is first executed (step S4401). In the initialization process, interrupts by timer interrupt processing are permitted, and various initial settings are made for the register group in the main MPU 342, the I / O device, and the like. After the initialization process is completed, the display start process is executed (step S4402). In the display start processing, the display on the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 is started. In this case, if the main RAM 344 stores information on the management result of the game history immediately before the previous power failure, the first to third notification display devices 346 to display the information corresponding to the information. 348 display control is executed. On the other hand, if the main RAM 344 does not store the information on the management result of the game history immediately before the previous power failure, or if the regular information is not stored as the information, a predetermined initial display (for example, all lighting) is performed. ) Is performed, the display control of the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 319c and the power is turned on (step S4403). If the power is turned on with the setting key inserted (step S4403: YES), and if the reset button 319b is not turned on when the power is turned on (step S4404: NO), the winning probability is as it is. The setting process is executed (step S4406). On the other hand, if the reset button 319b is turned on when the power is turned on (step S4404: YES), the winning probability setting process is executed after the clear process (step S4405) is executed (step S4406).

In the clear process, the entire area in the main RAM 344 is initialized. In this case, in the main RAM 344, an area for storing the set value of the slot machine 310, an area for storing data indicating whether or not the slot machine is in the BB state, and data indicating the total number of gaming media in the BB state are stored. Area, area where data indicating whether or not it is in AT state is stored, area where data for specifying the end condition of AT state is stored, data indicating the type of lottery mode described later, management result of game history Clear each area of the main RAM 344 including the area in which the information of the above is stored, the total number of games counter 344a, and the advantageous game number counter 344b. As a result, when the clear process is executed, the normal game state is set regardless of the state before the power cutoff, and the state before the power cutoff is in a state where the progress of the game is restricted due to the occurrence of an abnormality. If there is, the abnormal state is canceled.

In the winning probability setting process, the current setting value is read on condition that the setting key is inserted and the ON operation is performed, and the current setting value is displayed on the credit display unit 335 provided on the game panel 314. When the clearing process (step S4405) of the main RAM 344 is executed, the credit display unit 335 is displayed corresponding to "setting 1" at the start of the winning probability setting process, and the clearing process (step S4405) is performed. If is not executed, the display corresponding to the set value in the state before the power is cut off is displayed. In the winning probability setting process, the set value is updated by 1 each time the reset button 319b is operated, and the updated set value is displayed on the credit display unit 335. If the reset button 319b is operated while the set value is "setting 6", the set value is updated to "setting 1". When the ON operation of the setting key is canceled after the start lever 321 is operated, the winning probability setting process is terminated. In this case, the display of the set value on the credit display unit 335 ends. After executing the winning probability setting process, the process proceeds to the normal process (step S4407). The normal processing will be described in detail later.

If the setting key is not turned on in the main process (step S4403: NO), the power recovery process after step S4408 is executed. The power recovery process is a process for returning the state of the slot machine 310 to the state before the power is cut off. In the power recovery process, it is determined whether or not the set value of the slot machine 310 is normal by checking the main RAM 344 (step S4408). Specifically, when the set value is any one of "setting 1" to "setting 6", it is determined to be normal, and when it is "0" or "7" or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the set value is normal, it is confirmed whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag (step S4409). The power failure flag is provided in the main RAM 344, and when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 342 is stopped and the predetermined power failure processing is normally executed, the power failure flag is set to "1". Will be set. When "1" is set in the power failure flag, it is confirmed whether or not the RAM determination value is normal (step S4410). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 344 is checked, and it is confirmed whether or not the value is normal.

When an affirmative judgment is made in all of steps S4408 to S4410, it means that the power failure processing at the time of the previous power failure was normally executed. In this case, the value of the stack pointer stored in the main RAM 344 is written to the stack pointer of the main MPU 342, and the data saved in the main RAM 344 is returned to the register of the main MPU 342, so that the register of the main MPU 342 The state is returned to the state before the power was cut off (step S4411). Further, the power failure flag of the main RAM 344 is cleared to "0" (step S4412). After that, after transmitting a power recovery command for recognizing the execution of the power recovery process to the effector MPU352 (step S4413), the process returns to the address before the power is cut off (step S4414).

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in any of steps S4408 to S4410, the operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, the execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is prohibited (step S4415), and all the actuators connected to the output port are cleared by clearing all the output ports of the main MPU 342. Is set to the OFF state (step S4416), and an error notification process for notifying the hall manager and the like of the occurrence of an error is executed (step S4417). And it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing the clear process (step S4405).

Next, the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 342 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is started every 1.49 msec, for example.

In the register save process (step S4501), the values of all the registers in the main MPU 342 used in the normal process described later are saved in the main RAM 344. In step S4502, it is confirmed whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag, and if "1" is set in the power failure flag, the process proceeds to step S4503 to execute the power failure processing.

The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply device 319 is input to the main MPU 342. In the power failure processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed, and if the transmission is not completed, the main processing is terminated and the timer interrupt processing is restored, and the command transmission is terminated. When the transmission of the command is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 342 is stored in the main RAM 344. After that, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 342 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a determination value for determining whether or not the data in the main RAM 344 is normal is calculated and stored in the main RAM 344, and subsequent RAM access is prohibited. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the fact that the power supply is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

If "1" is not set in the power failure flag in step S4502, various processes after step S4504 are performed. In step S4504, the watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction is performed. In step S4505, an interrupt end declaration process is performed so that the next timer interrupt can be set for the main MPU 342 itself. In step S4506, in order to rotate each reel 316L, 316M, 316R, a stepping motor control process for driving a stepping motor provided on each of these reels 316L, 316M, 316R is performed. In step S4507, the state of various sensors connected to the input port is read, and a sensor monitoring process for monitoring whether or not the read result is normal is performed.

In step S4508, a timer calculation process for subtracting the values of each counter and timer is performed. In step S4509, counter processing is performed to output the result of counting the number of bets on medals and the number of payouts to the outside. In step S4510, a command output process for transmitting various commands to the effect side MPU352 is performed. In step S4511, a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port is performed. In step S4512, the value of each register saved in the main RAM 344 in the previous step S4501 is returned to the corresponding register in the main MPU 342. In step S4513, a management process for managing the game history and displaying the display corresponding to the management result on the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 is executed. In step S4514, a lighting process for controlling light emission of the lighting devices 349a and 349b is executed according to the opening angle of the front door 312. After that, in step S4515, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated. The details of the management process in step S4513 and the lighting process in step S4514 will be described later.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing a normal process executed by the main MPU 342.

In the normal process, the start wait process is first executed (step S4601). In the start waiting process, if any of the replay prizes has occurred in the previous game, an automatic input process is performed so that the same number of game media as the number of bets in the previous game are bet. Further, in the start waiting process, when a medal is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a, if the current number of bets is not "3" or more, which is the maximum specified number, the number of bets is added by 1 and the number of bets is increased. If is 3 or more, which is the maximum specified number, the value of the credit counter provided in the main RAM 344 is added by 1. The credit counter is a counter for specifying the number of virtual medals stored and stored in the main MPU 342.

In the start waiting process, when the automatic input process is not executed and any of the credit input buttons 327 to 329 is operated, the credit for setting the bet number corresponding to the operation. Executes the input response process. In the credit insertion processing, when the first credit insertion button 327 is operated, the maximum amount of game media that can be bet at that time is bet, and the second credit insertion button 328 or the second credit insertion button 328 or the second. 3 When the credit insertion button 329 is operated, the bet state corresponding to the operation is set. In this case, when a virtual medal is used for the bet, the value corresponding to the number of the bet virtual medals is subtracted from the credit counter. In addition, if the number of virtual medals required to set the number of bets corresponding to the operated credit insertion buttons 327 to 329 is not stored and stored, it is possible to bet in relation to the stored and stored virtual medals. The maximum amount of game media is bet.

In the start waiting process, when the number of bets is equal to or greater than the maximum specified number and the value of the credit counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit storage number (specifically, "50"), the acceptance prohibition process is executed. In the reception prohibition process, the selector 317 is set to the reception prohibition state by stopping the output of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 317a. As a result, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 325, the medal is not detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 325a and is ejected to the medal tray 312d. On the other hand, if the number of bets is less than the maximum specified number or the value of the credit counter is less than the upper limit storage number, the acceptance permission process is executed. In the acceptance permission process, the selector 317 is set to the acceptance permission state by starting the output of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 317a. As a result, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 325 are collected by the hopper device 318 after being detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 325a. In the start waiting process, when the settlement button 331 is operated and the automatic insertion process is not executed, medals corresponding to the total number of bets and the value of the credit counter are issued via the medal ejection port 312c. The hopper device 318 is driven and controlled so as to be discharged to the medal tray 312d. As a result, the internally stored game medium is paid out to the player as an actual medal.

After executing the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not the number of bets on the medal has reached the specified number (“3” in the present embodiment) (step S4602), and if the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process is started. The process returns to the wait process (step S4601). When the number of bets has reached the specified number, it is determined whether or not the start lever 321 has been operated (step S4603). If the start lever 321 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S4601). On the other hand, when the start lever 321 is operated, the reception prohibition process is executed after the main line ML is activated (step S4604). As a result, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 325, the medal is discharged to the medal tray 312d without being detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 325a. After that, a lottery process for drawing a winning combination in the current game is executed (step S4605), and each reel 316L, 316M, 316R is driven and controlled in an manner corresponding to the result of the current lottery process (step S4605). (Step S4606).

After that, the medal payout process is executed (step S4607). In the medal payout process, when a small winning combination is established in this game, a process for granting a player a number of medals or virtual medals corresponding to the small winning combination is executed. Specifically, when granting a virtual medal, the value corresponding to this small winning combination is added to the credit counter, and if the value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit storage number, the upper limit storage number is exceeded. The hopper device is driven and controlled so that only a few minutes of medals are paid out to the medal tray 312d.

After that, a corresponding process at the end of the game is executed to enable the setting of the game state corresponding to the result of the current game (step S4608). Then, the reception permission process is executed (step S4609). As a result, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 325 are collected by the hopper device after being detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 325a.

The lottery process executed in step S4605 of the normal process (FIG. 83) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 90.

First, a random number used when determining whether or not a combination is correct is acquired (step S4701). In the slot machine 310, when the start lever 321 is operated, the hard circuit is configured to latch the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and the main MPU 342 stores the value latched by the hard circuit in the main RAM 344 after confirming the operation of the start lever 321. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire random numbers at the timing when the start lever 321 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hard circuit of the slot machine 310 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 321 is operated.

After acquiring the random numbers, the lottery table for determining the winning or failing of the winning combination is read from the main ROM 343 (step S4702). Here, in this slot machine 310, six stages of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 319c to perform an ON operation and a predetermined operation. By performing the above, it is possible to set which winning probability the lottery process is to be executed based on. It should be noted that "setting n + 1" has a more advantageous winning probability for the player than "setting n". Further, there are three types of lottery modes in which the lottery tables are different in the main MPU 342 even if the set values are set at the same stage: a normal mode, a first RT mode, and a second RT mode. Further, as a game state, a BB state exists in addition to the state of each of these lottery modes. In step S4702, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current set value and the current gaming state is selected.

The lottery table corresponding to each of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode will be described by taking the case of "setting 3" as an example. First, the lottery table for the normal mode selected in the normal mode will be described. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery table for a normal mode. In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG. 92 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 91, an index value IV is set in the lottery table for the normal mode, and each index value IV is associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery combination in relation to the maximum value (“65535”) of the free run counter.

Specifically, the bell winning data and the first supplementary winning data are set in the index value IV = 1. When winning with an index value IV = 1, as shown in FIG. 92, when the first stop (the reel on which the stop command is first generated) is the left reel 316L, the second stop target and the third stop target are selected. The bell prize is surely generated regardless of the type of the reel and the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, and in other cases, the first supplementary prize is surely generated.

In this slot machine 310, reel control capable of sliding up to four symbols after the stop buttons 322 to 324 are operated is performed for each reel 316L, 316M, 316R. In other words, reel control is performed for each reel 316L, 316M, 316R to stop the reels until a predetermined time (190 msec) elapses after the stop buttons 322 to 324 are operated. By performing such reel control, it becomes possible to easily establish a prize corresponding to the winning combination, and it is possible to prevent the winning corresponding to the winning combination from being established. It becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R that can be slid is limited as described above, a combination of symbols for establishing a prize is formed in one reel 316L, 316M, 316R. If there are 5 or more symbols between the constituent symbols, it may happen that the constituent symbols do not stop on the main line ML depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 322 to 324 (the event is also called "missing"). Say). The first supplementary prize to the third supplementary prize, the bell prize, and various replay prizes are prize modes in which the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are stopped in the corresponding order, and the first watermelon prize and the second watermelon prize are not missed. The watermelon winning, cherry winning, first BB winning, and second BB winning are winning modes in which the stop buttons 322 to 324 may be missed depending on the stop operation timing of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R.

As shown in FIG. 91, the bell winning data and the second supplementary winning data are set in the index value IV = 2. When winning with an index value IV = 2, as shown in FIG. 92, when the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the types of reels to be stopped second and third to be stopped, and each stop button 322 to 324. The bell prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of, and in other cases, the second supplementary prize is surely established.

As shown in FIG. 91, the bell winning data and the third supplementary winning data are set in the index value IV = 3. When winning with an index value IV = 3, as shown in FIG. 92, when the first stop is the right reel 316R, the types of reels to be stopped second and third to be stopped, and each stop button 322 to 324. The bell prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of, and in other cases, the third supplementary prize is surely established.

As shown in FIG. 91, only the first watermelon winning data is set in the index value IV = 4. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 4, as shown in FIG. 92, the first watermelon winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, the first watermelon winning may not be established.

As shown in FIG. 91, only the second watermelon winning data is set in the index value IV = 5. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 5, as shown in FIG. 92, the second watermelon winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, the second watermelon winning may not be established.

As shown in FIG. 91, only the cherry winning data is set in the index value IV = 6. When winning with an index value IV = 6, as shown in FIG. 92, a cherry prize can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 322 with respect to the rotation position of the left reel 316L, there is a possibility that the cherry winning will not be established.

As shown in FIG. 91, the first BB winning data is set in the index value IV = 7. When winning with an index value IV = 7, as shown in FIG. 92, the first BB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, the first BB prize may not be established. Further, as shown in FIG. 91, the second BB winning data is set in the index value IV = 8. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 8, as shown in FIG. 92, the second BB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, the second BB prize may not be established.

Here, the winning data other than the 1st BB winning data and the 2nd BB winning data are deleted in the winning game regardless of whether or not the winning is established, and are held in the subsequent games of the winning game. Not over. On the other hand, in the first BB winning data and the second BB winning data, the corresponding BB winning is established even in the next and subsequent games of the winning game, except when the main RAM 344 is cleared. Is stored until. In this case, in the game in which the first BB winning data or the second BB winning data is carried over, the first BB winning data and the index value IV corresponding to the second BB winning data are excluded from the lottery target. This makes it possible to prevent the BB winning data from being newly stored even though the first BB winning data or the second BB winning data is already stored, and a plurality of BB winning data are accumulated. It is possible to prevent it from being memorized.

As shown in FIG. 91, the index values IV = 9 to 12 are set to the normal replay winning data and the first RT replay winning data. In this case, when winning with an index value IV = 9, as shown in FIG. 92, the first stop is the middle reel 316M, and the second stop (the reel on which the second stop command is generated) is the left reel 316L. When the third stop (the reel for which the stop command was last generated) is the right reel 316R, the first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, and in other cases. The normal replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 10, each stop button 322 when the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the left reel 316L. The first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 324, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 11, each stop button 322 when the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the middle reel 316M. The first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 324, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 12, each stop button 322 when the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the middle reel 316M, and the third stop is the left reel 316L. The first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 324, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324.

When the lottery table for the normal mode of FIG. 91 is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 1, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 2, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 3 are selected. The probability of winning is about 1 / 5.0, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 4 is about 1/131, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 5 is about 1. / 187, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 6 is about 1/423, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 7, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 8. The probabilities are about 1/218, respectively, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 9, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 10, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 11. And the probability of winning when the index value IV = 12 is about 1 / 28.0, respectively.

Here, as described above, in the lottery table for the normal mode, the first RT replay winning data is set in addition to the normal replay winning data as the winning data having the index value IV = 9 to 12 (see FIG. 91). The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 9 to 12 is about 1 / 7.0. Then, when the reel is won with any of the index values IV = 9 to 12, the stop order of the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R corresponds to the winning combination. When the order is reached, the first RT replay winning is established, and the lottery mode shifts from the normal mode to the first RT mode. When the mode shifts to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 90) becomes the lottery table for the first RT mode.

Next, the lottery table for the first RT mode selected in the case of "setting 3" and the first RT mode will be described. 93 and 94 are explanatory views for explaining the lottery table for the first RT mode.

In the 1st RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 93, the winning combination data set in each of the index values IV = 1 to 8 and the winning probability of each index value IV are set in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. It is the same as 91). In this case, the index value IV = 1 to 6 is set to a combination that enables the addition of the game medium, and the winning combination data and each winning probability set in each of the index values IV = 1 to 6 are set. By being the same, the types of combinations that enable the addition of the game medium and the winning probabilities of those combinations are the same in each of the normal mode and the first RT mode. Further, the index value IV = 7 to 8 is set with the BB winning data as in the normal mode lottery table, and the winning probability is the same as that of the normal mode lottery table. That is, the probability of winning either BB combination in the normal mode and the first RT mode is the same.

The winning combination data set after the index value IV = 9 is different from the normal mode. Specifically, in the lottery table for the first RT mode, as shown in FIG. 93, the second RT replay winning data is set as the winning data having the index value IV = 9 to 12, in addition to the normal replay winning data. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 9 to 12 is about 1 / 10.1. When winning with an index value IV = 9, as shown in FIG. 94, when the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the right reel 316R. The second RT replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 10, the second stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the left reel 316L. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 11, the second RT replay winning is won when the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the middle reel 316M. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 12, the second stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the middle reel 316M, and the third stop is the left reel 316L. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324. In the 1st RT mode, any of the index values IV = 9 to 12 is won, and the stop order of the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R corresponds to the winning combination. When becomes, the second RT replay winning is established and the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the second RT mode. When the mode shifts to the second RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 90) becomes the lottery table for the second RT mode.

As shown in FIG. 93, in the lottery table for the first RT mode, the first fall replay winning data is set as the winning data having the index value IV = 13 to 18, in addition to the normal replay winning data. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 13 to 18 is about 1 / 10.9.

When the lottery table for the first RT mode is won with an index value IV = 13, as shown in FIG. 94, the first stop is the left reel 316L, the second stop is the middle reel 316M, and the third stop is. When the right reel is 316R, the normal replay prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324, and in other cases, the first fall replay prize is at the operation timing of each stop button 322-324. It will definitely occur regardless. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 14, the first stop is the left reel 316L, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the middle reel 316M. The stop buttons 322 to 324 are surely generated regardless of the operation timing, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 15, the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the right reel 316R. The stop buttons 322 to 324 are surely generated regardless of the operation timing, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 16, the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the left reel 316L. The stop buttons 322 to 324 are surely generated regardless of the operation timing, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 17, the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the middle reel 316M. The stop buttons 322 to 324 are surely generated regardless of the operation timing, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 18, the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the middle reel 316M, and the third stop is the left reel 316L. The stop buttons 322 to 324 are surely generated regardless of the operation timing, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324. When the first fall replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the normal mode. When the mode shifts to the normal mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 90) becomes the lottery table for the normal mode.

In the lottery table for the first RT mode, only the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV = 19. The probability of winning at an index value IV = 19 is set higher than the probability of winning another combination, and specifically, the probability of winning is about 1 / 6.7. Then, when the winning is achieved with this index value IV = 19, the normal replay winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R and the stop operation timing of each reel 316L, 316M, 316R. ..

The lottery table for the first RT mode is set with an index value IV = 9 to 19 to enable the establishment of a replay prize. Since the winning probabilities of these winning combinations are set to the probabilities already explained, the winning probabilities of the winning combinations (hereinafter, also referred to as replay probabilities) that enable the establishment of the replay winning in the first RT mode are about 1. It is /2.9. On the other hand, the replay probability in the normal mode is about 1 / 7.0. That is, the first RT mode is in a gaming state in which the replay probability is higher than that in the normal mode.

Next, the lottery table for the second RT mode selected in the case of "setting 3" and the second RT mode will be described. 95 and 96 are explanatory views for explaining the lottery table for the second RT mode.

In the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 95, the winning combination data set in each of the index values IV = 1 to 8 and the winning probability of each index value IV are set in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 91) and the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 93) are the same. In this case, the index value IV = 1 to 6 is set to a combination that enables the addition of the game medium, and the winning combination data and each winning probability set in each of the index values IV = 1 to 6 are set. By being the same, the types of combinations that enable the addition of the game medium and the winning probabilities of those combinations are the same in each of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. Further, BB winning data is set at the index value IV = 7 to 8 as in the normal mode lottery table and the first RT mode lottery table, and the winning probability is the normal mode lottery table and the first RT mode lottery. It is the same as the table. That is, the probability of winning any BB combination in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode is the same.

The winning combination data set after the index value IV = 9 is different from the normal mode and the first RT mode. Specifically, in the lottery table for the second RT mode, as shown in FIG. 95, as the winning data of the index value IV = 9 to 14, the second falling replay winning data is set in addition to the normal replay winning data. .. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 9 to 14 is about 1 / 5.5.

When the lottery table for the second RT mode is won with an index value IV = 9, as shown in FIG. 96, the first stop is the left reel 316L, the second stop is the middle reel 316M, and the third stop is. When the right reel is 316R, the normal replay prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324, and in other cases, the second fall replay prize is at the operation timing of each stop button 322-324. It will definitely occur regardless. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 10, the first stop is the left reel 316L, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the middle reel 316M. The stop buttons 322 to 324 are surely generated regardless of the operation timing, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 11, the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the right reel 316R. The stop buttons 322 to 324 are surely generated regardless of the operation timing, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 12, the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the left reel 316L. The stop buttons 322 to 324 are surely generated regardless of the operation timing, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 13, the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the middle reel 316M. The stop buttons 322 to 324 are surely generated regardless of the operation timing, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 14, the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the middle reel 316M, and the third stop is the left reel 316L. The stop buttons 322 to 324 are surely generated regardless of the operation timing, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324. If the second fall replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode. When the mode shifts to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 90) becomes the lottery table for the first RT mode.

In the lottery table for the second RT mode, only the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV = 15. The probability of winning at an index value IV = 15 is set higher than the probability of winning another combination, and specifically, the probability of winning is about 1 / 6.3. Then, when the winning is achieved with this index value IV = 15, the normal replay winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R and the stop operation timing of each reel 316L, 316M, 316R. ..

The lottery table for the second RT mode is set with an index value IV = 9 to 15 to enable the establishment of a replay prize. Since the winning probabilities of these winning combinations are set to the probabilities already explained, the winning probabilities of the winning combinations (hereinafter, also referred to as replay probabilities) that enable the establishment of the replay winning in the second RT mode are about 1. It is /2.9. On the other hand, the replay probability in the normal mode is about 1 / 7.0. That is, the second RT mode is in a gaming state in which the replay probability is higher than that in the normal mode. On the other hand, the replay probability in the first RT mode is about 1 / 2.9. That is, the replay probability of the second RT mode is the same as that of the first RT mode. However, the replay probability in the first RT mode is not limited to the same configuration as the replay probability in the second RT mode. For example, although the replay probabilities are slightly different between the first RT mode and the second RT mode, they are substantially the same. It may be a configuration in which the second RT mode has a higher replay probability than the first RT mode, and the first RT mode may have a higher replay probability than the second RT mode.

The lottery table for the normal mode, the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the lottery table for the second RT mode are set in a one-to-one correspondence with each of "setting 1" to "setting 6", and the set value is high. The more the winning probability of the BB combination is, the higher the winning probability is, but the replay probability set in each lottery mode is the same or substantially the same regardless of the set value. In addition, in the situation where one of the BB combinations is won, the first BB combination and the second BB are selected regardless of whether the normal mode, the first RT mode, or the second RT mode is used so that the BB combination is not won twice. The role is excluded from the lottery. In addition to the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table, the main ROM 343 has a BB lottery referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 90) when it is in the BB state. The table is remembered. In the BB lottery table, only three types of winning roles, a bell role, a first watermelon role, and a second watermelon role, are set as lottery target roles, and the winning probability of the bell role is set to about 1 / 1.1. , The winning probability of the first watermelon combination is set to about 1/100, and the winning probability of the second watermelon combination is set to about 1/100. As a result, in the BB state, the expected number of game media to be granted per unit game number is higher than in other game states.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery process (FIG. 90), after selecting the lottery table (step S4702), the index value IV is set to "1" (step S4703), and the determination value DV used when determining the winning or losing of the winning combination is set. (Step S4704). In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random number value acquired in step S4701 is used as the current determination value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV “1” is added to this random number value. A new determination value DV is used.

After that, it is determined whether or not the combination corresponding to the index value IV is appropriate (step S4705). In the winning / failing determination of the combination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds "65535". If it exceeds "65535", the winning data acquisition process for setting the data of the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 344 is executed (step S4706). In the winning data acquisition process, all of the winning data set for the index value IV this time in the lottery table to be referred to is set in the main RAM 344. In the state where the winning data is set, if the winning data is winning data other than the BB winning data, "0" is cleared after the end of this game regardless of whether or not the winning data corresponding to the winning data is established, and the BB is set. If it is winning data, "0" is cleared when the prize is established.

When the determination value DV does not exceed "65535" (step S4705: NO), it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is added by 1 (step S4707), and it is determined whether or not there is a role corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined as to whether or not the index value IV is correct (step S4708). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the added index value IV exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S4704 and the determination of the winning / failing of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S4704, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the determination value DV (that is, the current determination value DV) used for the determination of whether or not the previous combination is successful to obtain a new determination value DV. In step S4705, the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is performed based on the determination value DV.

When the process of step S4706 is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S4708, it means that the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed. In this case, after executing the stop information setting process for setting the stop information for reel stop control (step S4709), the game start command is set as the transmission target to the effect side MPU352 (step S4710). The game start command is a command for causing the production side MPU352 to recognize that a new game has started, and the current game state is any of the normal game state, the BB state, and the AT state in the game start command. Information indicating the existence and information corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 90) in this game are included.

When the production side MPU352 receives the game start command, it grasps the outline contents of the production in this game based on the contents of the game start command, and the details of the production in the manner corresponding to the grasped outline contents of the production. The content of is decided by lottery. Then, a data table corresponding to the determined content of the effect is read from the effect side ROM 353 to the effect side RAM 354, and according to the read data table, the light emission control of the upper lamp 332, the sound output control of the speaker 333, and the display of the image display device 334 are performed. Take control.

Next, the reel control process executed in step S4606 of the normal process (FIG. 89) will be described.

In the reel control process, the rotation of each reel 316L, 316M, 316R is started in the situation where the rotation of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R is not started. In this case, the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are driven and controlled so as to rotate at a constant speed after a predetermined acceleration period. The operation of each stop button 322 to 324 is invalid until the constant speed rotation is achieved.

In the reel control process, the stop buttons 322 to 324 corresponding to the reels 316L, 316M, 316R that are rotating after each reel 316L, 316M, 316R starts to rotate at a constant speed are operated. The reels 316L, 316M, 316R corresponding to the stop buttons 322 to 324 are stopped. In this case, in the information for stop control corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (step S4605) in this game, and in the reels 316L, 316M, 316R which are the targets of the stop operation at the timing when the stop operation is performed. The number of slips until the symbol is actually stopped is determined based on the symbol existing at a predetermined position (for example, the lower row). Then, the reels 316L, 316M, 316R are stopped at the timing when the reels 316L, 316M, 316R to be stopped are moved in the rotation direction by the determined number of slips. The number of slips is any one of "0", "1", "2", "3" and "4". In addition, the number of slips makes it possible to stop on the main line ML of the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination as much as possible, while ensuring that the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the main line ML. It is set to avoid. Further, since the index value IV after IV = 1 to 3 and IV = 9 has a configuration in which the winning combination changes according to the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R, such an index value IV is won. If this is the case, the information for stop control is changed according to the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R. Further, in the reel control process, when all the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are stopped, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the main line ML. Then, if any of the replay prizes is established, the privilege of the replay is given, and if any of the prizes corresponding to the grant of the game medium is established, the prize is dealt with. Make settings so that a number of game media are given.

Next, the corresponding processing at the end of the game executed in step S4608 of the normal processing (FIG. 89) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 97.

In the corresponding processing at the end of the game, the value of the total number of games counter 344a (see FIG. 86) provided in the main RAM 344 is added by 1 (step S4801). The total number of games counter 344a is a counter for measuring the number of games digested regardless of whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the BB state, the AT state, or the ART state. The AT state is more for the player than the case where the stop order of the stop buttons 322 to 324 is the correct answer order and the combination of the symbols corresponding to the stop order is established on the main line ML. In the situation where the lottery combination that is advantageous is won, the stop order that is the correct answer order is notified. The lottery combination corresponding to the stop order can be won in both the non-AT state and the AT state, but the stop order that is the correct answer order is not notified in the non-AT state, whereas the stop order that is the correct answer order is not notified in the AT state. Since the order is notified, the AT state is more advantageous to the player than the non-AT state. Specifically, when the index value IV of the winning combination is won according to the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R at the index value IV = 1 to 3 and the index value IV = 9 or later, in the AT state. If there is, the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R for establishing the winning of the winning combination that is advantageous to the player is notified, and if it is in the non-AT state, the notification of such stop order is not executed. Further, in the notification of the stop order, when the lottery process (FIG. 90) of the winning combination is executed, the game start command corresponding to the lottery result is transmitted from the main side MPU 342 to the production side MPU 352, and the production side is based on the game start command. By controlling the display of the image display device 334 by the MPU 352, the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are started before the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R can be stopped in the game corresponding to the execution times of the lottery process (FIG. 90) of the winning combination. Further, the ART state is a gaming state in which the player stays in the first RT mode or the second RT mode in the AT state. In the ART state, the probability of winning the replay prize increases, and as described above, the expected number of game media to be granted in one game increases. Therefore, it is possible to make the ART state an advantageous gaming state.

In the corresponding process at the end of the game, if any of the BB combinations is in the winning state or the BB state (step S4802: YES), the BB process is executed (step S4803). In the BB process, if one of the BB roles has been won, it is determined whether or not the BB prize corresponding to the winning BB role has occurred in this game, and the BB prize is generated. If so, by setting "1" to the BB state flag provided in the main RAM 344, the game state is shifted to the BB state. As a result, the BB lottery table will be referred to in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 90) in the next and subsequent games. Further, by transmitting a command indicating the transition to the BB state to the effect side MPU 352, the effect for the BB state is started in the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334. By deleting the BB winning data from the main RAM 344 when the state is shifted to the BB state, the state of winning the BB combination is released. In addition, the same BB state is obtained regardless of whether the first BB prize or the second BB prize occurs.

In the BB process in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the game medium has been granted in this game, and if the game medium has been granted, the total number of grant counters provided in the main RAM 344 is displayed. Add up the number of game media given in this game. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the total number of grant counters after the addition is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the end reference number. If it is less than the value corresponding to the end reference number, the BB process is terminated as it is. If it is equal to or more than the value corresponding to the end reference number, the BB state is terminated by clearing the BB status flag of the main RAM 344 to "0". Further, by transmitting a command indicating that the BB state has ended to the effect side MPU 352, the ending image is displayed on the image display device 334, and then for the BB state on the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334. End the production of.

When the BB state ends, the lottery mode becomes the normal mode regardless of which mode the lottery mode is before the start of the BB state. Further, when the BB state is started in the AT state, the ART preparation state processing described later is executed after the end of the BB state regardless of the state before the start of the BB state.

When a negative determination is made in step S4802, or when the process of step S4803 is executed, it is determined whether or not the state is AT (step S4804). If it is not in the AT state (step S4804: NO), the RT mode transition process (step S4805) and the transition chance management process (step S4806) are executed. When the stop operation for the middle reel 316M or the right reel 316R is performed first in the game in a state that is neither the BB state nor the AT state, the notification indicating that the stop operation should be performed is executed from the left reel 316L. However, no penalty is given to limit the granting of profits in subsequent games.

In the RT mode transition process (step S4805), if it is specified that the first RT replay prize has occurred in this game, the game shifts to the first RT mode, and the second RT replay prize occurs in this game. If it is specified that the game is present, the game shifts to the second RT mode. In addition, in the RT mode transition process, if it is specified that the second fall replay prize has occurred in this game, the game is shifted to the first RT mode, and the first fall replay prize is generated in this game. If it is specified that it is, it shifts to the normal mode.

In the transition chance management process (step S4806), as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 98, it is determined whether or not the special combination has been won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 90) in this game (step S4901). The special role is one of the index values IV = 4 to 6. When the special combination is won (step S4901: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the advantageous regulation flag provided in the main RAM 344 (step S4902). The advantageous regulation flag is a flag for the main MPU 342 to specify that the transition to the AT state (that is, the ART state) is prohibited. The processing when "1" is set in the advantageous regulation flag will be described later.

When "1" is not set in the advantageous regulation flag (step S4902: NO), the transition lottery table corresponding to the content of the stock privilege is read from the main side ROM 343 to the main side RAM 344. The stock privilege can be accumulated when the special combination is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 90) in the normal gaming state when the advantage regulation flag of the main RAM 344 is set to "1". It is a privilege. Six stages of "0" to "5" are set for the stock privilege, and the stock privilege is "0" when there is no accumulated privilege. In the transition lottery table corresponding to the stock privilege being "0", if the index value IV = 4 wins, there is a 5% probability that the AT transition wins and the index value IV = 5 wins. In that case, the AT transition is won with a probability of 10%, and if the index value IV = 6 is won, the AT transition is won with a probability of 15%. The contents of the transition lottery table referred to when the stock privilege is "1" to "5" will be described later.

After reading the transition lottery table in step S4903, the AT transition lottery process is executed (step S4904). In the AT transition lottery process, the value of the transition lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, 1.49 msec cycle) is read out in the main RAM 344, and the value of the read transition lottery counter is referred to the transition lottery table. Match.

When the AT transition is won in the transition lottery process to the AT state (step S4905: YES), the initial game number lottery table corresponding to the content of the stock privilege is read from the main side ROM 343 to the main side RAM 344 (step S4906). In the initial game number lottery table corresponding to the stock privilege being "0", the probability that 50 games are selected is 90%, the probability that 100 games are selected is 9%, and 200 games are selected. The probability of being played is 1%. The contents of the initial game number lottery table referred to when the stock privilege is "1" to "5" will be described later.

After reading the initial game number lottery table in step S4906, the initial game number lottery process is executed (step S4907). In the initial game number lottery process, the value of the game number lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 1.49 msec cycle) updated in the main RAM 344 is read, and the value of the read game number lottery counter is used as the initial game number. Collate against the lottery table. Then, the initial number of games corresponding to the collation result is set in the ART game number counter provided in the main RAM 344 (step S4908).

After that, it is determined whether or not the current RT mode is the second RT mode (step S4909). In the case of the second RT mode (step S4909: YES), since it is not necessary to wait for promotion to the second RT mode in the AT state, the transition chance management process is terminated as it is. As a result, the gaming state is the AT state and the ART state, which is the second RT mode. In this case, a command indicating that the ART state has been started is transmitted to the effect side MPU352. By receiving the command, the effect side MPU 352 causes the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334 to perform an effect indicating that the ART state has started, and then performs an effect corresponding to the ART state. It is performed by the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334. After that, the value of the stock privilege counter provided in the main RAM 344 is cleared to "0" (step S4909). The stock privilege counter is a counter for specifying the presence / absence of the stock privilege and the value of the stock privilege on the main MPU 342.

If it is not in the second RT mode (step S4910: NO), it is necessary to wait for promotion to the second RT mode as the ART preparation state, so "1" is set in the ART preparation state flag provided in the main RAM 344. (Step S4911). The ART preparation status flag is a flag for the main MPU 342 to specify that it is in the ART preparation status.

Returning to the explanation of the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 97), when the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 344 is 1 or more, or when "1" is set in the ART preparation status flag of the main RAM 344. , A positive determination is made in step S4804. In this case, the ART preparation state processing is executed (step S4808) on condition that "1" is set in the ART preparation state flag of the main RAM 344 (step S4807: YES).

In the ART preparation state processing, it is determined whether or not the promotion to the second RT mode has occurred, and if the promotion to the second RT mode has occurred, the ART preparation state flag of the main RAM 344 is cleared to "0". As a result, the gaming state shifts from the AT state to the ART state. In addition, a command indicating that the ART state has been started is transmitted to the effect side MPU352. By receiving the command, the effect side MPU 352 causes the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334 to perform an effect indicating that the ART state has started, and then performs an effect corresponding to the ART state. It is performed by the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334.

If the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more, the player wins at any of the index values IV = 1 to 3 regardless of whether or not "1" is set in the ART preparation status flag. In this case, the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R for enabling the establishment of the bell winning is notified. When the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more, the lottery table for normal mode (FIG. 91) or the lottery for the first RT mode is used regardless of whether or not the ART preparation status flag is set to "1". When the index value IV = 9 to 12 in the table (FIG. 93) is won, the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R for establishing the first RT replay winning or the second RT replay winning is notified. .. Further, when the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more, the index value IV in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 93) = regardless of whether or not "1" is set in the ART preparation status flag. If any of 13 to 18 is won, the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R for establishing the normal replay winning is notified.

If a negative determination is made in step S4807, ART state processing is executed (step S4809). FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing ART state processing.

First, the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b (see FIG. 86) provided in the main RAM 344 is added by 1 (step S5001). The advantageous game number counter 344b is a counter for measuring the number of games consumed from the time when the transition to the ART state occurs until the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 344 becomes “0”. The value of the advantageous game number counter 344b is maintained without being cleared even if the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 344 becomes "0" after the transition to the ART state occurs. .. That is, the advantageous game number counter 344b is used to measure the total number of games generated in a plurality of ART states.

After that, the transition process of the RT mode is executed (step S5002). In the RT mode transition process, when it is specified that the 1st RT replay winning has occurred, it is shifted to the 1st RT mode, and when it is specified that the 2nd RT replay winning has occurred, it is shifted to the 2nd RT mode, and the second When it is specified that the 1st fall replay winning has occurred, the mode is shifted to the normal mode, and when it is specified that the 2nd falling replay winning has occurred, the mode is shifted to the 1st RT mode.

After that, it is determined whether or not the special role has been won in the role lottery process (FIG. 90) in this game (step S5003). The special role is one of the index values IV = 4 to 6. When the special role is won (step S5003: YES), the lottery process for adding the number of continuous games is executed (step S5004). In the lottery process for adding the number of continuous games, it is determined whether or not to add the number of continuous games in the ART state, and if it is added, the number of additional games is determined. In the additional lottery process for the number of continuous games, the additional lottery table for the number of continuous games corresponding to each of the index values IV = 4 to 6 is read from the main ROM 343, and the main RAM 344 periodically (for example, 1.49 msec cycle). The value of the updated game number lottery counter is read out, and the value of the lottery counter is collated with the additional lottery table for the number of continuous games. The additional lottery table for the number of continuous games is set so that the probability that additional games will occur in the order of IV = 4 → IV = 5 → IV = 6 will increase, and the expected number of additional games will increase in that order. ing. When the additional game number is added and won in the additional lottery process (step S5005: YES), the number of additional games selected in the additional lottery process is added to the ART game number counter of the main RAM 344 (step S5006). ..

When a negative determination is made in step S5003, a negative determination is made in step S5005, or the process of step S5006 is executed, the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 344 is subtracted by 1 (step S5007). Then, when the value of the ART game number counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S5008: YES), the ART state termination process is executed (step S5009). In the termination process, a command indicating that the ART state has ended is transmitted to the effector MPU352. By receiving the command, the effect side MPU 352 has the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334 so that the effect corresponding to the normal gaming state is executed after the effect indicating that the ART state has ended is executed. Control each of them.

Returning to the explanation of the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 97), when the process of step S4806 is executed, the process of step S4808 is executed, or the process of step S4809 is executed, the game end command is issued to the effect side MPU352. (Step S4810). When the effecting side MPU 352 receives the game end command, it controls each of the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334 so that the effect executed in this game is terminated. After that, the game management process is executed (step S4811).

FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing a game management process.

In the game management process, when "1" is not set in the advantageous regulation flag of the main RAM 344 (step S5101: NO), the value of the total number of games counter 344a of the main RAM 344 is a value corresponding to the number of management trigger games. It is determined whether or not it is "3000" or more (step S5102). The number of management-triggered games is not limited to 3000 games, and may be, for example, 6000 games. In addition, the number of management opportunity games is not limited to the configuration set to less than the maximum number of games that can be consumed in one business day in the game hall, but is set to about the maximum number of games. It may be a configuration that is set to the maximum number of games or more. When the value of the total number of games counter 344a is equal to or greater than the number of management trigger games (step S5102: YES), the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b of the main RAM 344 to the value of the total number of games counter 344a is calculated (step S5102: YES). Step S5103). That is, the calculation is executed so that the calculation result = "value of the advantageous game number counter 344b" / "value of the total game number counter 344a".

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the calculation result exceeds the regulation target ratio (step S5104). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the result calculated in step S5103 exceeds the regulated ratio "0.7". That is, when the total number of games in all the gaming states including the normal gaming state, the BB state, the AT state, and the ART state reaches 3000 games, the ART state or the AT state after the ART state is started is digested. It is determined whether or not the total number of games exceeds 2100 games, which is 70% of 3000 games.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5104, the calculation process for the number of restricted games is executed (step S5105). In the calculation process of the number of regulated games, the number of regulated games that prohibit the transition to the AT state and the ART state is calculated in order to ensure that the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is lower than the ratio of the regulated target. Specifically, the number of regulated games = "value of advantageous game counter 344b"-"value of total game counter 344a" x "percentage of regulated targets (that is," 0.7 ")) +" number of additional games (specifically) In the meantime, "100") is calculated. Then, the calculated value of the regulated game number is set in the regulated game number counter provided in the main RAM 344 (step S5106). The regulated game number counter is a counter for specifying the number of games for which the transition to the AT state and the ART state is prohibited by the main MPU 342. Further, "1" is set in the advantageous regulation flag of the main RAM 344 (step S5107). This prohibits the transition to the AT state and the ART state.

After that, when "1" is set in the ART preparation status flag of the main RAM 344 (step S5108: YES), the ART preparation status flag is cleared to "0" as various clear processes, and the ART game of the main RAM 344 is performed. Clear the number counter to "0" (step S5109). As a result, when "1" is set in the advantageous regulation flag of the main RAM 344 in the ART preparation state, the ART preparation state ends without the transition to the ART state. In this case, since the AT state ends, the notification of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R for establishing the 1st RT replay winning or the 2nd RT replay winning is not executed, and the 1st fall replay is not executed. The notification of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R for avoiding the winning or the establishment of the second fall replay winning is not executed. After that, the normal return process is executed (step S5110). In the normal return process, a normal return command is transmitted to the effect side MPU352. When the effecting side MPU352 receives the normal return command, an effect indicating that the ART preparation state is completed and the normal game state is restored without the transition to the ART state occurs is executed, and then the normal game state is entered. Each of the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334 is controlled so that the corresponding effect is executed.

When "1" is not set in the ART preparation status flag of the main RAM 344 (step S5108: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 344 is 1 or more (step S5111). .. When the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more (step S5111: YES), that is, in the ART state, the value of the ART game number counter is cleared to "0" (step S5112). As a result, when "1" is set in the advantageous regulation flag of the main RAM 344 in the ART state, the ART state ends even if the number of continuous games in the ART state remains. In this case, since the AT state ends, the notification of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R for establishing the 1st RT replay winning or the 2nd RT replay winning is not executed, and the 1st fall replay is not executed. The notification of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R for avoiding the winning or the establishment of the second fall replay winning is not executed.

After that, the termination process of the ART state is executed (step S5113). In the end processing, a command indicating that the ART state has ended is transmitted to the effect side MPU352 as in step S5009 in the ART state processing (FIG. 99). By receiving the command, the effect side MPU 352 has the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334 so that the effect corresponding to the normal gaming state is executed after the effect indicating that the ART state has ended is executed. Control each of them. The effect executed in this case is executed when the process of step S5009 in the ART state process (FIG. 99) is executed, that is, when the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 344 becomes "0". It is the same as the production. As a result, when the ART state ends, when the ART state ends when "1" is set in the advantageous regulation flag of the main RAM 344 in the middle of the ART state, and the rest of the ART state. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize which of the cases where the ART state ends when the number of continuous games in the game becomes "0".

Here, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 101 (a), in the ART state, the image display device 334 has an index value IV = 1 to 3 and an index value IV = 9 or later in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 90). When the winning is achieved, the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R is notified. In FIG. 101A, an image G1 showing that the middle reel 316M is stopped first, an image G2 showing that the left reel 316L is stopped next, and an image G3 showing that the right reel 316R is finally stopped. Is displayed. In the situation where the image notifying the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R is displayed in this way, the ART of the main RAM 344 has been started in the upper left corner portion of the image display device 334 since the current ART state is started. A digested game number image G4 (specifically, an image of "30 games in progress") showing the number of games digested before the value of the game number counter becomes "0" is displayed. Further, a character image G5 "How long will it continue?" Is displayed at the lower part of the image display device 334.

However, the image notifying the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state this time, that is, the value set in the ART game number counter of the main RAM 344 is not displayed on the image display device 334. Further, the notification that enables the player to recognize the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state this time is not executed including the image display device 334. As a result, when the value of the total number of games counter 344a is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the number of managed games, the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b to the value of the total number of games counter 344a exceeds the regulated ratio. In that case, even if the ART state is forcibly terminated even in the middle of the ART state, the termination of the ART state is due to the forced termination, or the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state is "0". It is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether it is due to the fact that the value has become.

Returning to the explanation of the game number management process (FIG. 100), when the process of step S5110 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S5111, or when the process of step S5113 is executed, the total number of games counter of the main RAM 344 is executed. Clear each of the value of 344a and the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b of the main RAM 344 by "0" (step S5114). On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5102 or a negative determination is made in step S5104, the process of step S5114 is not executed. As a result, the total number of games counter 344a is managed by using the total number of games counter 344a and the advantageous game number counter 344b, provided that the value of the total number of games counter 344a becomes the number of management-triggered games and the execution of the AT state and the ART state is restricted. The existing game history will be cleared once by "0".

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the process of step S5114 may be executed even when a negative determination is made in step S5104. In this case, when the value of the total number of games counter 344a is equal to or greater than the number of management trigger games, the total number of games is set regardless of whether or not "1" is set in the advantage regulation flag of the main RAM 344. The game history managed by using the counter 344a and the advantageous game number counter 344b is temporarily cleared to "0".

When "1" is set in the advantageous regulation flag of the main RAM 344, an affirmative determination is made in step S4902 in the transition chance management process (FIG. 98). In this case, the stock privilege grant lottery process is executed (step S4912). Grant of stock benefits In the lottery process, it is determined whether or not to grant stock benefits. Specifically, in the stock privilege grant lottery process, the stock privilege grant lottery table corresponding to each of the index values IV = 4 to 6 is read from the main ROM 343 and periodically (for example, 1.49 msec) in the main RAM 344. The value of the stock privilege lottery counter updated in the cycle) is read out, and the value of the lottery counter is collated with the above-mentioned stock privilege grant lottery table. The lottery table for granting stock benefits is set so that the probability of winning the grant of stock benefits increases in the order of IV = 4 → IV = 5 → IV = 6. Grant of stock privilege When the grant is won in the lottery process (step S4913: YES), the value of the stock privilege counter provided in the main RAM 344 is added by 1 (step S4914).

Here, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 101 (b), when the value of the stock privilege counter is 1 or more, the stock privilege image G6 indicating that the stock privilege is given to the image display device 334 is displayed. Will be done. In addition, the same number of privilege number images G7 as the number of stock benefits granted is displayed. In the case of FIG. 101 (b), since the value of the stock privilege counter is "2", two privilege number images G7 are displayed. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the stock privilege is given, and it is possible to make the player recognize the number of the given stock privilege.

When the stock privilege is given, in step S4903 of the transition chance management process (FIG. 98), the transition lottery table corresponding to the value of the given stock privilege is read out. In this case, the larger the value of the stock privilege, the more advantageous the transition lottery table for the player is read. Specifically, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "0" as already explained, if the index value IV = 4 is won, there is a 5% probability that the AT transition will be won. If the index value IV = 5 wins, there is a 10% chance of winning the AT transition, and if the index value IV = 6 wins, there is a 15% chance of winning the AT transition. ing. On the other hand, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "1", if the index value IV = 4 is won, there is a 15% probability that the AT transition is won and the index value IV =. If you win at 5, there is a 20% chance that you will win the AT transition, and if you win at the index value IV = 6, you will have a 25% chance of winning the AT transition. In addition, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "2", if the index value IV = 4 is won, there is a 25% probability that the AT transition is won and the index value IV = 5 is won. If it becomes, there is a 30% probability that the AT transition will be won, and if the index value IV = 6 is won, there is a 35% probability that the AT transition will be won. In addition, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "3", if the index value IV = 4 is won, there is a 35% probability that the AT transition is won and the index value IV = 5 is won. If it becomes, there is a 40% probability that the AT transition will be won, and if the index value IV = 6 is won, there is a 45% probability that the AT transition will be won. In addition, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "4", if the index value IV = 4 is won, there is a 45% probability that the AT transition is won and the index value IV = 5 is won. If it becomes, there is a 50% probability that the AT transition will be won, and if the index value IV = 6 is won, there is a 55% probability that the AT transition will be won. In addition, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "5", if the index value IV = 4 is won, there is a 55% probability that the AT transition is won and the index value IV = 5 is won. If it becomes, there is a 60% probability that the AT transition will be won, and if the index value IV = 6 is won, there is a 65% probability that the AT transition will be won. With the above configuration, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the stock privilege, and even in the situation where "1" is set in the advantageous regulation flag of the main RAM 344. It is possible to increase the satisfaction of the player for winning the special role in the role lottery process (FIG. 90). Since the process of clearing the stock privilege counter of the main RAM 344 to "0" is executed when the AT transition is won in the AT transition lottery process, the AT transition is performed in the AT transition lottery process until the AT transition is won. The probability of winning does not decrease.

Further, when the stock privilege is given, in step S4906 of the transition chance management process (FIG. 98), the initial game number lottery table corresponding to the value of the given stock privilege is read out. In this case, the larger the value of the stock privilege, the more advantageous the initial game number lottery table for the player is read. Specifically, as described above, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "0", the probability that 50 games will be selected is 90%, and the probability that 100 games will be selected is 90%. It is 9% and the probability that 200 games will be selected is 1%. On the other hand, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "1", the probability that 50 games are selected is 80%, and the probability that 100 games are selected is 14%. , The probability that 200 games will be selected is 6%. Further, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "2", the probability that 50 games are selected is 70%, the probability that 100 games are selected is 19%, and 200 games are selected. Has an 11% probability of being selected. Further, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "3", the probability that 50 games are selected is 60%, the probability that 100 games are selected is 24%, and 200 games are selected. Is 16% likely to be selected. Further, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "4", the probability that 50 games are selected is 50%, the probability that 100 games are selected is 29%, and 200 games are selected. Has a 21% probability of being selected. Further, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "5", the probability that 50 games are selected is 40%, the probability that 100 games are selected is 34%, and 200 games are selected. Is 26% likely to be selected. With the above configuration, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the stock privilege, and even in the situation where "1" is set in the advantageous regulation flag of the main RAM 344. It is possible to increase the satisfaction of the player for winning the special role in the role lottery process (FIG. 90).

Returning to the description of the game management process (FIG. 100), when "1" is set in the advantageous regulation flag of the main RAM 344 (step S5101: YES), the value of the restricted game number counter of the main RAM 344 is subtracted by 1. (Step S5115). Then, when the value of the regulated game number counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S5116: YES), the advantageous regulation flag of the main RAM 344 is cleared to "0" (step S5117). As a result, the state in which the execution of the AT state and the ART state is restricted is released. Incidentally, the value of the regulated game number counter is not notified, and the notification indicating that the execution of the AT state and the ART state is released from the restricted state is not executed. This makes it impossible for the player to know at what timing the release of the regulation will occur.

Next, a management process executed by the main MPU 342 in order to manage the history of the game and notify the management result will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 102. The management process is executed in step S4513 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 88).

First, the value of the total number of games counter 344a of the main RAM 344 is grasped (step S5201), and the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b of the main RAM 344 is grasped (step S5202). Then, the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b of the main RAM 344 to the value of the total game number counter 344a is calculated (step S5203). That is, the calculation is executed so that the calculation result = "value of the advantageous game number counter 344b" / "value of the total game number counter 344a". Then, among the values obtained by multiplying the calculation result by 100, the 100th place is displayed on the first notification display device 346, the 10th place is displayed on the second notification display device 347, and the 1st place is the 1st place. 3 The display control of the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 is performed without going through another control device so that the notification display device 348 displays (step S5204). The above calculation result is notified as a percentage display. Specifically, if the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "35", "0" is displayed on the first notification display device 346 and "3" is displayed on the second notification display device 347. , "5" is displayed on the third notification display device 348. Further, for example, if the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "100", "1" is displayed on the first notification display device 346, "0" is displayed on the second notification display device 347, and the second notification display device 347 displays "0". 3 “0” is displayed on the notification display device 348.

By executing the management process as described above, the management result of the game history is always displayed on the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348, and the manager of the game hall is the front door 312. It is possible to grasp the management result of the game history by visually observing the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 in the open state. Further, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is executed in a cycle shorter than the shortest period required for digesting one game, and more specifically, the shortest time required from the end of one game to the start of the next one game. It is executed in a cycle shorter than the period. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can grasp the management result of the history of the game up to the game completed immediately before by visually observing the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348.

Next, the flowchart of FIG. 103 is shown with respect to the lighting process for executing the light emission control of the lighting devices 349a and 349b provided for the purpose of irradiating the main control device 340 with light when the front door 312 is in the open state. It will be explained with reference to it. The lighting process is executed in step S4514 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 88).

When no light is emitted from the lighting devices 349a and 349b (step S5301: NO), it is determined whether or not the front door 312 is in the open state based on the state of the signal input from the open angle sensor 312e. (Step S5302). When the front door 312 is in the open state (step S5302: YES), it is determined whether or not the opening angle of the front door 312 is within a predetermined angle range (step S5303). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds a predetermined opening angle based on the state of the signal input from the opening angle sensor 312e. This predetermined opening angle is set as an angle of 86% with respect to the maximum opening angle of the front door 312. Specifically, since the state where the front door 312 is opened 90 ° with respect to the housing 311 is the maximum opening angle of the front door 312, the state where the front door 312 is opened about 77 ° with respect to the housing 311 is predetermined. It is set to the opening angle of. When an affirmative determination is made in step S5303, that is, when the front door 312 is not in the closed state and the opening angle of the front door 312 is 77 ° or less, a drive signal is output to the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b (step). S5304). As a result, light is irradiated from the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b to the irradiation range IR including the main control device 340. Then, this light irradiation state is continued until the process of step S5306 described later is executed.

When light is emitted from the lighting devices 349a and 349b (step S5301: YES), the front door 312 is closed or the front door 312 is closed based on the state of the signal input from the opening angle sensor 312e. It is determined whether the opening angle exceeds a predetermined opening angle (step S5305). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5305, the output of the drive signal to the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b is stopped (step S5306). As a result, the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b are put into a non-lighting state, and the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b toward the irradiation range IR is stopped.

Here, the relationship between the opening angle of the front door 312 and the control state of the lighting devices 349a and 349b will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 104 (a) and 104 (b). FIG. 104A shows the state of the front door 312, and FIG. 104B shows the control state of the lighting devices 349a and 349b. Further, in the following description, FIGS. 105 (a) and 105 (b) will be referred to as appropriate. FIG. 105 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the lighting devices 349a and 349b when the front door 312 is in the open state and the opening angle is equal to or less than a predetermined opening angle, and FIG. 105 (b). ) Is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the lighting devices 349a and 349b when the opening angle of the front door 312 is the maximum opening angle exceeding a predetermined opening angle.

First, a case where the opening operation of the front door 312 is stopped when the opening angle of the front door 312 is equal to or less than a predetermined opening angle will be described.

As shown in FIG. 104 (a), when the front door 312 is in the closed state, the opening operation of the front door 312 is started at the timing of t1. In this case, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b is started at the timing of t1. After that, at the timing of t2, the opening operation of the front door 312 is stopped in a state before the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds a predetermined opening angle. In this state, as shown in FIG. 105A, light is emitted from the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b toward the main control device 340. As a result, the main control device 340 is brightly illuminated even when the front door 312 is slightly opened, so that the manager of the game hall can use the board box 345 of the main control device 340 and the first to third notifications. It is possible to visually confirm the display contents of the display devices 346 to 348. In this case, since it is not necessary to open the front door 312 to the end during the confirmation work, the confirmation work can be facilitated.

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (a), the closing operation of the front door 312 is started at the timing of t3, and the front door 312 is closed at the timing of t4. In this case, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b is stopped at the timing of t4.

Next, a case where the opening operation of the front door 312 is performed until the opening angle of the front door 312 reaches the maximum opening angle will be described.

As shown in FIG. 104 (a), when the front door 312 is in the closed state, the opening operation of the front door 312 is started at the timing of t5. In this case, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b is started at the timing of t5. After that, at the timing of t6, the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds a predetermined opening angle as shown in FIG. 104 (a). As a result, the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b is stopped at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 104 (b).

After that, the opening operation of the front door 312 is stopped in a state where the opening angle of the front door 312 reaches the maximum opening angle at the timing of t7. In this state, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b do not irradiate the main control device 340 with light. When the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds the predetermined opening angle, such as when the opening angle reaches the maximum opening angle, the inside of the housing 311 is illuminated by the light or sunlight of the lighting inside the game hall. .. In this case, if the main control device 340 is illuminated by the lighting devices 349a and 349b, there is a concern that the visibility of the main control device 340 and the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 will deteriorate. Will be done. On the other hand, when the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds a predetermined opening angle, the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b is stopped, which causes such an inconvenience. It is possible to avoid it.

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (a), the closing operation of the front door 312 is started at the timing of t8, and the opening angle of the front door 312 becomes equal to or less than the predetermined opening angle at the timing of t9. In this case, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b is started at the timing of t9. After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (a), the front door 312 is closed at the timing of t10. In this case, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b is stopped at the timing of t10.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The total number of games digested regardless of the game state is measured by the total number of games counter 344a of the main RAM 344, and the number of games digested in the ART state or the AT state after the ART state is started is the main. Accumulated and measured by the advantageous game number counter 344b of the side RAM 344. Then, the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is calculated, and when the calculated ratio is the ratio to be regulated, the progress of the game is restricted. This makes it possible to restrict the progress of the game according to the mode in which the ART state is generated, and if the mode in which the ART state is generated does not match the mode assumed in the design stage of the slot machine 310, it is possible to use it. It will be possible to deal with it.

When the progress of the game is restricted according to the calculation result of the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the progress of the game is restricted so that the ratio deviates from the regulated ratio. As a result, even if the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is the ratio subject to regulation, it is possible to make the ratio within the range assumed at the design stage of the slot machine 310. ..

When the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is the ratio to be regulated, the ART state is terminated even if the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 344 is not "0". As a result, when the above ratio becomes the regulated ratio, the ART state can be forcibly terminated, and the mode in which the ART state is generated does not match the mode assumed in the design stage of the slot machine 310. In such a case, it is possible to restrict the execution mode of the gaming state.

The total number of games measured by the total number of games counter 344a is greater than or equal to the number of games that can be initially set when the ART state is newly started, which is greater than the number of continuous games in the ART state. In such a situation, the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is calculated, and when the calculated ratio is the ratio to be regulated, the ART state is forcibly terminated. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the forced termination of the ART state occurs.

In the ART state, the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state is not notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the ART state is forcibly terminated because the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is the ratio subject to regulation.

When the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games becomes the ratio to be regulated, the transition to the ART state is regulated. As a result, it is possible to forcibly prevent the transition to the ART state according to the mode in which the ART state is generated, and the mode in which the ART state is generated does not seem to match the mode assumed in the design stage of the slot machine 310. In such a case, it is possible to restrict the execution mode of the gaming state.

The period during which the transition to the ART state is restricted varies depending on the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games. This makes it possible to prevent the limit of transition to the ART state from being set too small or too large regardless of the above ratio.

If the special role is won in the role lottery process (Fig. 90) in a situation where the transition to the ART state is prevented because the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is the ratio subject to regulation. , The process for deciding whether or not to shift to the ART state is not executed, but the stock privilege is given as an alternative privilege. As a result, the player does not think that it was useless when the special role was won in the role lottery process (FIG. 90) in the situation where the transition to the ART state is forcibly prevented. It becomes possible to do.

The more stock benefits granted, the better for the player. This makes it possible to maintain the player's expectation of winning a special role in the role lottery process (Fig. 90) even in a situation where the transition to the ART state is forcibly prevented. Become.

If a stock benefit is granted, the corresponding notification is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to continue the game from being lost even in a situation where the transition to the ART state is forcibly prevented.

When the stock privilege is given, the transition to the ART state is likely to occur after the state in which the transition to the ART state is forcibly blocked is released. This makes it possible to associate the granting of stock benefits with the transition to the ART state. Therefore, even if a special role is won in the role lottery process (FIG. 90) in a situation where the transition to the ART state is forcibly prevented, the player is notified of the transition to the ART state. It will be possible to expect.

By providing the lighting devices 349a and 349b for illuminating the main control device 340, it becomes easy to perform the confirmation work of the main control device 340 performed by opening the front door 312. In this case, when the front door 312 is closed, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are in a non-lighting state. This makes it possible to prevent the lighting devices 349a and 349b from being in a meaningless lighting state in a situation where the main control device 340 is not confirmed. Further, when the front door 312 is opened, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are naturally in the lighting state. This makes it easier to check the main control device 340 because it is not necessary to separately perform an operation for setting the lighting devices 349a and 349b to the lighting state.

The lighting devices 349a and 349b are provided in the housing 311 in which the main control device 340 is provided. This makes it easier to illuminate the main control device 340 by the lighting devices 349a and 349b in response to the opening operation of the front door 312.

Regardless of which open position the front door 312 is arranged, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are not in the illuminated state, but the lighting devices 349a and 349b are selectively illuminated in some open positions. It becomes a state. As a result, if the lighting devices 349a and 349b are set to the lighting state and the lighting devices 349a and 349b are set to the lighting state only in a favorable situation when checking the main control device 340, it is difficult to check the main control device 340. The lighting devices 349a and 349b can be put into a non-lighting state.

When the front door 312 is present in the maximum open position, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are in the non-illuminated state. As a result, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are in a non-lighting state when the main control device 340 is sufficiently brightly illuminated by the lighting of the game hall. Therefore, the main control device 340 is instead lit by the lighting by the lighting devices 349a and 349b. It is possible to prevent inconveniences such as difficulty in confirming.

<Another form of the 17th embodiment>
-The total number of games digested regardless of which game state is used and the total number of advantageous games digested in the ART state are stored as history information, and the number of advantageous games with respect to the total number of games is stored. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the number of winnings of the predetermined winning combination to be the target of the lottery and the total number of games are stored as history information in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 90). It may be configured to calculate the winning probability of the predetermined combination. In this case, there are a first predetermined combination and a second predetermined combination as the target predetermined combination, and the number of winnings is individually stored as history information for each of the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination, and the first The winning probability may be calculated for each of the predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination. In addition, the number of winnings may be individually stored as history information for each of all the winning combinations, and the winning probability may be calculated for each of the winning combinations. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the game hall of the winning probability of the role to be managed.

Further, the total number of game media granted and the total number of games may be stored as history information, and the number of game media granted per unit game may be calculated. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the game hall of the number of game media granted per unit game number. In addition, the combination of the total number of game media granted and the total number of games is individually stored as history information for each of the BB state, ART state, and normal game state, and the number of game media granted per unit game number is stored. It may be configured to calculate individually for each of the BB state, the ART state and the normal game state.

Further, the number of transitions to the BB state and the total number of games digested in the gaming state other than the BB state may be stored as history information, and the transition probability to the BB state may be calculated. Further, the number of transitions to the ART state and the total number of games digested in the gaming state other than the ART state may be stored as history information, and the transition probability to the ART state may be calculated. In addition, the total number of transitions to the BB state and the ART state and the total number of games digested in the game state other than the BB state and the ART state are stored as history information, and the transition probability to the BB state and the ART state is stored. It may be configured to calculate.

The display of each determination result in the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 may be configured to start when the check result display period is reached and end when the check result display period ends. .. Further, when it is detected by the sensor that detects the opening of the front door 312 that the front door 312 is opened with respect to the housing 311, each determination immediately before is made by the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348. The display of the result is started, and when it is detected by the sensor that detects the opening of the front door 312 that the front door 312 is closed with respect to the housing 311, the first to third notification display devices are displayed. The display of each determination result in 346 to 348 may be terminated. In this case, it is possible to limit the period during which the display is performed on the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348.

-Although the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state is not notified, the number of continuous games may be notified. In this case, if the ART state is forcibly terminated due to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the reason for the forced termination may be notified by the image display device 334. .. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being confused by the fact that the ART state is forcibly terminated even though the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state is not "0". Will be.

Further, if the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state is larger than the number of games in which the ART state is forcibly terminated in relation to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the ART state is forced. The number of remaining games until the game is terminated may be notified as the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state. In this case, even if the ART state is forcibly terminated, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Further, the ART state is terminated until the number of games for which the ART status is forcibly terminated due to the relationship between the number of continuous games remaining in the ART status or the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games reaches 10. The number of remaining games up to is not notified, and when the number of any of these games reaches 10, the number of remaining games until the end of the ART state may be notified. In this case, it is possible to make the player recognize that the ART state is 10 games or less remaining, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the ART state is forcibly terminated. It will be possible.

-If the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state is greater than or equal to the number of games for which the ART state is forcibly terminated due to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state is continued. Even if an opportunity to increase the number of games occurs, the addition may not occur.

-If the ART state is forcibly terminated in relation to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the next ART state is forcibly terminated in relation to the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state at the time when the forced termination occurs. It may be configured such that the advantage of is changed. For example, as the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state at the time of the forced termination is large, the number of initial continuous games may be large or likely to increase in the next ART state, and the number of continuous games in the next ART state may be large. The configuration may be such that addition is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to compensate for the forced termination of the ART state when the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state is large, according to the remaining number of continuous games.

The notification of the calculation result using the game history is not limited to the configuration performed by the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348, and for example, the credit display unit 335 and the grant number display unit 336 are used. It may be configured to be performed. As a result, the credit display unit 335 and the grant number display unit 336 can be used in combination as the display unit for notifying the calculation result. Further, in the configuration, when a plurality of types of events to be notified exist, the events to be notified of each type are sequentially switched and displayed as in the thirteenth embodiment. good. When the display is sequentially switched in this way, for example, the type of the event to be notified is displayed on the credit display unit 335, and the calculation result or the content of the calculation result for the event to be notified is displayed on the grant number display unit 336. The information corresponding to the above may be displayed. As a result, even when a plurality of types of events to be notified exist, it is possible to notify the events of the plurality of types of notification targets by using a small number of display units.

-A counter for measuring the game history up to the number of management-triggered games (specifically, 3000 games) and a counter for measuring the game history beyond the number of management-triggered games may be provided. In this case, the former counter is used to perform a calculation using the game history up to the number of management-triggered games, and the control corresponding to the calculation result is performed. Then, when the operation is performed, the former counter clears "0". On the other hand, the latter counter is configured to cumulatively store the game history without clearing "0" even if the above calculation is performed, and perform the calculation using the cumulative game history. This makes it possible to execute control corresponding to the calculation result each time the number of management-triggered games is reached, and to manage the game history in a range exceeding the number of management-triggered games.

-The target forcibly terminated in relation to the management result of the game history is not limited to an advantageous game state such as an ART state, and may be a disadvantageous game state.

Even when the front door 312 is in the open state, an operation unit operated to forcibly put the lighting devices 349a and 349b into the non-lighting state may be provided. In this case, when the lighting by the lighting devices 349a and 349b is unnecessary, the lighting devices 349a and 349b can be put into a non-lighting state. Further, the operation unit may be provided at a position where it can be operated even when the front door 312 is closed, and when the front door 312 is closed, it cannot be operated and the front door 312 is opened. It may be configured to be provided at a position where it can be operated.

When the front door 312 is in the open state, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are always in the lighting state, and when the front door 312 is in the closed state, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are always in the non-lighting state. It may be configured.

-Even if the front door 312 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are maintained in the non-lighting state until the predetermined opening angle is reached, and then the lighting device 349a and 349b are maintained at the predetermined opening angle or more for lighting. The devices 349a and 349b may be configured to be in the illuminated state. Further, in addition to the configuration, when the front door 312 is in the maximum open position as in the above embodiment, the lighting devices 349a and 349b may be in a non-illuminated state.

The intensity of the light emitted from the lighting devices 349a and 349b may be changed according to the opening angle of the front door 312. For example, when the front door 312 is closed, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are in a non-lighting state or a lighting state with a relatively weak intensity, the front door 312 is in an open state, and the opening angle of the front door 312 is a predetermined opening. If the angle is less than or equal to the angle, the lighting state may be set to a relatively strong intensity, and if the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds a predetermined opening angle, the lighting state may be set to a relatively weak intensity.

<18th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for managing the game history in the slot machine 310 is different from that of the 17th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the 17th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the 17th embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 106A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various areas provided in the main RAM 344.

Similar to the 17th embodiment, the main RAM 344 is provided with a total game number counter 344a and an advantageous game number counter 344b. Similar to the 17th embodiment, the total number of games counter 344a is a counter for measuring the number of games digested regardless of whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the BB state, the AT state, or the ART state. Is. Since the total number of games counter 344a measures the number of games of up to 3000 games, the total number of games counter 344a has a data capacity capable of measuring the number of games. Specifically, the total number of games counter 344a has a data capacity of 2 bytes. The total number of games counter 344a measures information on the number of games even when the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off unless the clearing process of the main RAM 344 is executed when the power is turned on thereafter. Hold.

Similar to the 17th embodiment, the advantageous game number counter 344b determines the number of games consumed from the time when the transition to the ART state occurs until the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 344 becomes “0”. It is a counter for measuring. The value of the advantageous game number counter 344b is maintained without being cleared even if the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 344 becomes "0" after the transition to the ART state occurs. That is, the advantageous game number counter 344b is used to measure the total number of games generated in a plurality of ART states. Since the advantageous game number counter 344b measures the number of games of 3000 games at the maximum, the advantageous game number counter 344b has a data capacity capable of measuring the number of games. Specifically, the advantageous game number counter 344b has a data capacity of 2 bytes. It should be noted that the advantageous game number counter 344b obtains information on the number of games measured even when the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off unless the clearing process of the main RAM 344 is executed when the power is turned on thereafter. Hold.

The main RAM 344 is provided with a total number of games counter 361. Similar to the total number of games counter 344a, the total number of games counter 361 is a counter for measuring the number of games digested regardless of whether the game state is the normal game state, the BB state, the AT state, or the ART state. be. However, the total number of games counter 361 maintains the measurement over the number of games exceeding 3000 games, and even when the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off, when the power is turned on thereafter. Information on the number of games being measured is retained unless the clearing process of the main RAM 344 is executed. The total number of games counter 361 has a data capacity capable of measuring the number of games over a plurality of business days without reaching the upper limit. Specifically, the total number of games counter 361 has a data capacity of 2 bytes. With a data capacity of 2 bytes, for example, if the maximum number of games that can be played in one business day is 8000 games, the total number of games counter 361 can continuously measure the number of games for 5 years or more. It will be possible.

The main RAM 344 is provided with a total cumulative buffer 362. FIG. 106 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters 362a to 362c provided in the total accumulation buffer 362. The total cumulative buffer 362 includes a total total payout counter 362a, a total advantageous middle counter 362b, and a total bonus middle counter 362c.

The total total payout counter 362a is a counter for measuring the total number of game media paid out to the player regardless of whether the game state is the normal game state, the BB state, the AT state, or the ART state. .. The total payout counter 362a is the total number of payouts of the game medium measured even when the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off unless the clearing process of the main RAM 344 is executed when the power is turned on thereafter. Hold information. The total total payout counter 362a has a data capacity capable of measuring the total number of game media without reaching the upper limit over a plurality of business days. Specifically, the total total payout counter 362a has a data capacity of 3 bytes. With a data capacity of 3 bytes, for example, if the maximum total payout number of game media in one business day is "120,000", the total payout counter 362a measures the total payout number of game media for 4 months or more. Can be done.

The total advantageous middle counter 362b measures the total number of game media paid out to the player from the time when the transition to the ART state occurs until the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 344 becomes “0”. It is a counter for. The value of the total advantageous middle counter 362b is maintained without being cleared even if the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 344 becomes "0" after the transition to the ART state occurs. That is, the total advantageous middle counter 362b is used to measure the total number of payouts of the game medium in a plurality of ART states. The total advantageous middle counter 362b is the total number of game media to be paid out, which is measured even when the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off, unless the clearing process of the main RAM 344 is executed when the power is turned on thereafter. Hold information. The total advantageous middle counter 362b has a data capacity capable of measuring the total number of game media without reaching the upper limit over a plurality of business days. Specifically, the total advantageous middle counter 362b has a data capacity of 3 bytes. If the data capacity is 3 bytes, for example, if the maximum total number of game media payouts in one business day is "120,000", the total number of game media payouts will be measured by the total advantage counter 362b for 4 months or more. Can be done.

The total bonus middle counter 362c is a counter for measuring the total number of game media paid out to the player in the BB state. The value of the counter 362c during the total bonus is maintained without being cleared to "0" even when the BB state ends. That is, the total bonus middle counter 362c is used to measure the total number of payouts of the game medium in a plurality of BB states. The total bonus middle counter 362c is the total number of game media to be paid out, which is measured even when the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off, unless the clearing process of the main RAM 344 is executed when the power is turned on thereafter. Hold information. The total bonus middle counter 362c has a data capacity capable of measuring the total number of game media without reaching the upper limit over a plurality of business days. Specifically, the total bonus middle counter 362c has a data capacity of 3 bytes. With a data capacity of 3 bytes, for example, if the maximum total payout number of game media in one business day is "120,000", the total bonus payout counter 362c measures the total payout number of game media for 4 months or more. Can be done.

The main RAM 344 is provided with a first cumulative buffer 363 and a second cumulative buffer 364. FIG. 106 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters 363a to 363c provided in the first cumulative buffer 363, and FIG. 106 (d) shows various types provided in the second cumulative buffer 364. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of the counters 364a to 364c. As shown in FIG. 106 (c), the first cumulative buffer 363 includes a first total payout counter 363a, a first advantageous middle counter 363b, and a first bonus middle counter 363c. Further, as shown in FIG. 106 (d), the second cumulative buffer 364 includes a second total payout counter 364a, a second advantageous middle counter 364b, and a second bonus middle counter 364c.

Like the total total payout counter 362a, the first total payout counter 363a and the second total payout counter 364a pay the player regardless of whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the BB state, the AT state, or the ART state. It is a counter for measuring the total number of game media issued. Since the first total payout counter 363a and the second total payout counter 364a measure the total number of game media paid out in a maximum of 6000 games, the data capacity capable of measuring the total number of the game media is It has become. Specifically, the first total payout counter 363a and the second total payout counter 364a each have a data capacity of 3 bytes. The first total payout counter 363a and the second total payout counter 364a measure even when the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off unless the main RAM 344 is cleared when the power is turned on thereafter. Holds information on the total number of payouts of the game media being played.

Similar to the total advantageous middle counter 362b, the first advantageous middle counter 363b and the second advantageous middle counter 364b are from the occurrence of the transition to the ART state until the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 344 becomes "0". It is a counter for measuring the total number of game media paid out to the player. The value of the first advantageous middle counter 363b and the value of the second advantageous middle counter 364b are "0" even if the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 344 becomes "0" after the transition to the ART state occurs. It is maintained without being cleared. That is, the first advantageous middle counter 363b and the second advantageous middle counter 364b are used to measure the total number of payouts of the game medium in a plurality of ART states. Since the first advantageous middle counter 363b and the second advantageous middle counter 364b measure the total number of game media paid out in a maximum of 6000 games, the data capacity capable of measuring the total number of the game media is It has become. Specifically, the first advantageous middle counter 363b and the second advantageous middle counter 364b each have a data capacity of 3 bytes. The first advantageous middle counter 363b and the second advantageous middle counter 364b measure even when the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off unless the main RAM 344 is cleared when the power is turned on thereafter. Holds information on the total number of payouts of the game media being played.

The first bonus middle counter 363c and the second bonus middle counter 364c are counters for measuring the total number of game media paid out to the player in the BB state, similarly to the total bonus middle counter 362c. The value of the first bonus middle counter 363c and the value of the second bonus middle counter 364c are maintained without being cleared to "0" even when the BB state ends. That is, the first bonus middle counter 363c and the second bonus middle counter 364c are used to measure the total number of payouts of the game medium in a plurality of BB states. Since the first bonus middle counter 363c and the second bonus middle counter 364c measure the total number of game media paid out in a maximum of 6000 games, the data capacity capable of measuring the total number of the game media is It has become. Specifically, the first bonus middle counter 363c and the second bonus middle counter 364c each have a data capacity of 3 bytes. The first bonus middle counter 363c and the second bonus middle counter 364c measure even when the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off unless the main RAM 344 is cleared when the power is turned on thereafter. Holds information on the total number of payouts of the game media being played.

As shown in FIG. 106 (a), the main RAM 344 is provided with a calculation area 365 for total accumulation, a calculation area 366 for the first accumulation, and a calculation area 367 for the second accumulation. The calculation area 365 for the total cumulative total is the total number of payouts of the game medium in the ART state with respect to the total number of payouts of the game medium by using the total total payout counter 362a provided in the total cumulative total buffer 362 and the total advantageous middle counter 362b. The game medium in the BB state with respect to the total number of payouts of the game medium by using the total total payout counter 362a provided in the total cumulative buffer 362 and the total bonus middle counter 362c while storing the information of the result of calculating the ratio The information of the result of calculating the ratio of the total number of payouts is stored. The calculation area 366 for the first cumulative total is a game medium for a continuous period over 6000 games by using the first total payout counter 363a and the first advantageous middle counter 363b provided in the first cumulative total buffer 363. The information of the result of calculating the ratio of the total number of payouts of the game medium in the ART state to the total number of payouts is stored, and the first total payout counter 363a and the first bonus middle counter 363c provided in the first cumulative buffer 363 are stored. The information of the result of calculating the ratio of the total number of payouts of the game medium in the BB state to the total number of payouts of the game medium in the continuous period over 6000 games is stored. The calculation area 367 for the second cumulative total is a game medium for a continuous period over 6000 games by using the second total payout counter 364a and the second advantageous middle counter 364b provided in the second cumulative total buffer 364. The information of the result of calculating the ratio of the total number of payouts of the game medium in the ART state to the total number of payouts is stored, and the second total payout counter 364a and the second bonus middle counter 364c provided in the second cumulative buffer 364 are stored. The information of the result of calculating the ratio of the total number of payouts of the game medium in the BB state to the total number of payouts of the game medium in the continuous period over 6000 games is stored.

As described above, since the first cumulative buffer 363 and the second cumulative buffer 364 are provided, the total number of game media payouts in the ART state with respect to the total number of game media payouts in a continuous period over 6000 games. It is possible to calculate the ratio and the ratio of the total number of game media payouts in the BB state to the total number of game media payouts in a continuous period over 6000 games. In this case, the first cumulative buffer 363 and the second cumulative buffer 364 are used so that the start and end of the period to be managed are offset from each other. Specifically, the total number of games managed by each cumulative buffer 363 and 364 is A (specifically 6000 games), and the number of cumulative buffers 363 and 364 is B (specifically two). In this case, the start and end of the period to be managed are different from each other by the number of A / B games (specifically, 3000 games). Further, when one management target period in the first cumulative buffer 363 ends, the next management target period in the first cumulative buffer 363 occurs from the next game, and the second cumulative buffer 363 is used. When one management target period ends in 364, the next management target period in the second cumulative buffer 364 occurs from the next game. Therefore, the period to be managed by the first cumulative buffer 363 and the period to be managed by the second cumulative buffer 364 repeatedly occur in a state where the start and end of those periods are deviated by a certain number of games. It becomes.

FIG. 107 is a time chart showing how the game history is managed in the present embodiment. FIG. 107 (a) shows the timing at which 3000 games elapse, FIG. 107 (b) shows the game execution timing, FIG. 107 (c) shows the update timing of the total cumulative buffer 362, and FIG. 107 (d) shows. Shows the update timing of the first cumulative buffer 363, FIG. 107 (e) shows the initialization timing of the first cumulative buffer 363, and FIG. 107 (f) shows the update timing of the second cumulative buffer 364. FIG. 107 (g) shows the initialization timing of the second cumulative buffer 364, and FIG. 107 (h) uses the management result calculated using the first cumulative buffer 363 and the second cumulative buffer 364. The timing of switching the display target in the notification display devices 346 to 348 from one of the management results calculated in the above to the other is shown.

The power ON operation of the slot machine 310 is performed at the timing of t1, and the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 342 is started. In this case, by executing the clearing process of the main RAM 344, as shown in FIG. 107 (e), the various counters 363a to 363c of the first cumulative buffer 363 are cleared to "0" and FIG. 107 (g). ), The various counters 364a to 364c of the second cumulative buffer 364 are cleared to "0". If the clearing process of the main RAM 344 is not executed even when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 342 is started, the first cumulative use is performed at the timing when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 342 is started. The various counters 363a to 363c of the buffer 363 and the various counters 364a to 364c of the second cumulative buffer 364 are not cleared to "0", and the values at the time of the previous power off of the slot machine 310 are maintained as they are.

After that, one game is executed at each of the timing of t2, the timing of t3, the timing of t4, the timing of t5, and the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 107 (b). Then, at the timing of t6, 3000 games elapse as shown in FIG. 107 (a). Assuming that the game medium is paid out in each of these games, the total cumulative buffer 362 is updated at each of the timings from t2 to t6, as shown in FIG. 107 (c). As shown in FIG. 107 (d), the update process of the first cumulative buffer 363 is executed. In the game in which the payout of the game medium does not occur, the update process of the total cumulative buffer 362 and the first cumulative buffer 363 is not executed. As shown in FIG. 107 (f), the update process of the second cumulative buffer 364 is not executed at each of the timing of t2 to the timing of t6. Since both the start and the end of the period to be managed in the first cumulative buffer 363 and the period to be managed in the second cumulative buffer 364 are different by 3000 games, these cumulative buffers 363 and 364 are used. When the initialization process is executed, the update process of the second cumulative buffer 364 is awaited until 3000 games elapse after the initialization process is executed.

After that, one game is executed at each of the timing of t7, the timing of t8, the timing of t9, and the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. 107 (b). Assuming that the game medium is paid out in each of these games, the total cumulative buffer 362 is updated as shown in FIG. 107 (c) at each of the timings from t7 to t10, and FIG. 107 is taken. As shown in (d), the update process of the first cumulative buffer 363 is executed, and as shown in FIG. 107 (f), the update process of the second cumulative buffer 364 is executed. In the game in which the payout of the game medium does not occur, the update processing of the total cumulative buffer 362, the first cumulative buffer 363, and the second cumulative buffer 364 is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 107 (a), the timing of t10 is the timing when 3000 games have elapsed from the timing of t6. That is, it is the timing at which 6000 games, which is a period to be managed, has elapsed since the first cumulative buffer 363 was updated. Therefore, the management result for 6000 games is calculated using the first cumulative buffer 363. This calculated management result is stored in the calculation area 366 for the first cumulative total. Then, after the management result is stored in the calculation area 366 for the first accumulation, the various counters 363a to 363c of the first accumulation buffer 363 are cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 107 (e).

Further, as shown in FIG. 107 (h), it is the switching timing of the display target. When the clearing process of the main RAM 344 is executed, the display contents corresponding to the management results of the cumulative buffers 363 and 364 in the notification display devices 346 to 348 become the initial display contents corresponding to none of the management results. Then, the initial display content is continued in the period in which the management result of the cumulative buffers 363 and 364 is to be displayed until the first management result is calculated using the first cumulative buffer 363. By storing the management result information calculated by using the first cumulative buffer 363 at the timing of t10 in the first cumulative calculation area 366, the cumulative buffers 363 in the notification display devices 346 to 348 are stored. The display content of the management result of 364 is the display content corresponding to the information of the management result stored in the calculation area 366 for the first cumulative total. This display content is the cumulative buffer 363 in the notification display devices 346 to 348 until the management result information calculated using the second cumulative buffer 364 is stored in the calculation area 367 for the second cumulative. It is maintained as the display content of the management result of 364.

After that, one game is executed at each of the timing of t11, the timing of t12, the timing of t13, and the timing of t14 as shown in FIG. 107 (b). Assuming that the game medium is paid out in each of these games, the total cumulative buffer 362 is updated as shown in FIG. 107 (c) at each of the timings from t11 to t14, and FIG. 107 is taken. As shown in (d), the update process of the first cumulative buffer 363 is executed, and as shown in FIG. 107 (f), the update process of the second cumulative buffer 364 is executed. In the game in which the payout of the game medium does not occur, the update processing of the total cumulative buffer 362, the first cumulative buffer 363, and the second cumulative buffer 364 is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 107 (a), the timing of t14 is the timing when 3000 games have elapsed from the timing of t10. That is, it is the timing at which 6000 games, which is a period to be managed, has elapsed since the second cumulative buffer 364 became the update target. Therefore, the management result for 6000 games is calculated using the second cumulative buffer 364. This calculated management result is stored in the calculation area 367 for the second cumulative total. Then, after the management result is stored in the calculation area 367 for the second cumulative total, the various counters 364a to 364c of the second cumulative total buffer 364 are cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 107 (g).

Further, as shown in FIG. 107 (h), it is the switching timing of the display target. By storing the management result information calculated by using the second cumulative buffer 364 at the timing of t14 in the second cumulative calculation area 367, the cumulative buffers 363 in the notification display devices 346 to 348 are stored. The display content of the management result of 364 corresponds to the information of the management result stored in the calculation area 367 for the second accumulation from the display content corresponding to the information of the management result stored in the calculation area 366 for the first accumulation. Switch to content. This display content is the cumulative buffer in the notification display devices 346 to 348 until the management result information calculated using the first cumulative buffer 363 is newly stored in the calculation area 366 for the first cumulative. It is maintained as the display content of the management result of 363 and 364.

After that, one game is executed at each of the timing of t15, the timing of t16, the timing of t17, and the timing of t18 as shown in FIG. 107 (b). Assuming that the game medium is paid out in each of these games, the total cumulative buffer 362 is updated as shown in FIG. 107 (c) at each of the timings from t15 to t18, and FIG. 107 is taken. As shown in (d), the update process of the first cumulative buffer 363 is executed, and as shown in FIG. 107 (f), the update process of the second cumulative buffer 364 is executed. In the game in which the payout of the game medium does not occur, the update processing of the total cumulative buffer 362, the first cumulative buffer 363, and the second cumulative buffer 364 is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 107 (a), the timing of t18 is the timing when 3000 games have elapsed from the timing of t14. That is, it is the timing when 6000 games have elapsed since the start of the new management target period using the first cumulative buffer 363. Therefore, the management result for 6000 games is calculated using the first cumulative buffer 363. This calculated management result is stored in the calculation area 366 for the first cumulative total. Then, after the management result is stored in the calculation area 366 for the first accumulation, the various counters 363a to 363c of the first accumulation buffer 363 are cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 107 (e).

Further, as shown in FIG. 107 (h), it is the switching timing of the display target. By storing the management result information calculated by using the first cumulative buffer 363 at the timing of t18 in the first cumulative calculation area 366, the cumulative buffers 363 in the notification display devices 346 to 348 are stored. The display content of the management result of 364 is the display corresponding to the management result information stored in the calculation area 366 for the first accumulation from the display content corresponding to the management result information stored in the calculation area 367 for the second accumulation. Switch to content. This display content is the cumulative buffer in the notification display devices 346 to 348 until the management result information calculated using the second cumulative buffer 364 is newly stored in the calculation area 367 for the second cumulative. It is maintained as the display content of the management result of 363 and 364.

Next, a processing configuration for enabling the management of the game history as described above will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing a game management process executed by the main MPU 342. The game management process is executed in step S4811 in the corresponding process (FIG. 97) at the end of the game.

First, the process for controlling the advantageous period is executed (step S5401). In the process for regulating the advantageous period, the same process as each process of steps S5101 to S5117 of the game management process (FIG. 100) in the 17th embodiment is executed. After that, it is determined whether or not the addition of the game medium has occurred in this game (step S5402). When the game medium is assigned (step S5402: YES), the value corresponding to the number of game media assigned this time is added to the total total payout counter 362a of the total cumulative buffer 362 (step S5403), and the first step is made. A value corresponding to the number of game media assigned this time is added to the first total payout counter 363a of the 1 cumulative buffer 363 (step S5404). Further, on condition that it is not the second cumulative waiting period, which is a period before 3000 games have elapsed since the clearing process of the main RAM 344 is executed (step S5405: NO), the second cumulative buffer 364 A value corresponding to the number of game media assigned this time is added to the second total payout counter 364a (step S5406).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S5405, or when the process of step S5406 is executed, whether or not the ART state is set by determining whether or not the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 344 is 1 or more. Is determined (step S5407). When an affirmative judgment is made in step S5407, a value corresponding to the number of game media assigned this time is added to the total advantageous middle counter 362b of the total cumulative buffer 362 (step S5408), and the first cumulative buffer 363 is the first. 1 Add the value corresponding to the number of gaming media assigned this time to the advantageous middle counter 363b (step S5409). Further, on condition that it is not the second cumulative waiting period, which is the period before 3000 games have elapsed since the clearing process of the main RAM 344 is executed (step S5410: NO), the second cumulative buffer 364 A value corresponding to the number of game media assigned this time is added to the second advantageous middle counter 364b (step S5411).

When a negative determination is made in step S5407, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the BB state (step S5412). When an affirmative judgment is made in step S5412, a value corresponding to the number of game media given this time is added to the total bonus middle counter 362c of the total cumulative buffer 362 (step S5413), and the first cumulative buffer 363 is the first. A value corresponding to the number of game media given this time is added to the 1 bonus middle counter 363c (step S5414). Further, on the condition that it is not the second cumulative waiting period, which is the period before 3000 games have elapsed since the clearing process of the main RAM 344 is executed (step S5415: NO), the second cumulative buffer 364 A value corresponding to the number of game media given this time is added to the counter 364c in the second bonus (step S5416).

When a negative judgment is made in step S5402, when a positive judgment is made in step S5410, when the process of step S5411 is executed, when a negative judgment is made in step S5412, when a positive judgment is made in step S5415, or When the process of step S5416 is executed, the calculation process for total accumulation is executed (step S5417). In the calculation process, the ratio of the total number of game media payouts in the ART state to the total number of game media payouts is calculated using the total total payout counter 362a provided in the total cumulative buffer 362 and the total advantageous middle counter 362b. The calculation result is stored in the calculation area 365 for total accumulation. Further, in the calculation process, the ratio of the total number of game media payouts in the BB state to the total number of game media payouts by using the total total payout counter 362a provided in the total cumulative buffer 362 and the total bonus middle counter 362c. Is calculated and the calculation result is stored in the calculation area 365 for total accumulation. When the display target in the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the total cumulative buffer 362 and the ratio is the ratio of the total number of game media to be paid out in the ART state, the former calculation result is notified and the notification display devices 346 to When the display target in 348 is the total cumulative buffer 362 and it is the ratio of the total number of payouts of the game media in the BB state, the latter calculation result is notified.

After that, the target switching process is executed in step S5418. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the target switching process. First, the value of the total number of games counter 361 of the main RAM 344 is added by 1 (step S5501). The total number of games counter 361 is used by the main MPU 342 to specify one management target period using the first cumulative buffer 363 and one management target period using the second cumulative buffer 364. It will be used. After that, in step S5502, it is determined whether or not the value of the total number of games counter 361 after 1 addition is 3000 × 2n (n is an integer of 1 or more). When the value of the total number of games counter 361 is 3000 × 2n, it means that one management target period using the first cumulative buffer 363 has ended. For example, when 6000 games have elapsed since the clearing process of the main RAM 344 has been executed, 12000 games have elapsed, 18,000 games have elapsed, and the like, one management target using the first cumulative buffer 363 is used. The period has ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5502, the calculation process for the first cumulative total is executed (step S5503). In the calculation process, the first total payout counter 363a and the first advantageous middle counter 363b provided in the first cumulative buffer 363 are used for the total number of payouts of the game medium in a continuous period over 6000 games. The ratio of the total number of game media to be paid out in the ART state is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the calculation area 366 for the first cumulative total. Further, in the calculation process, the total payout of the game medium in a continuous period over 6000 games is used by using the first total payout counter 363a and the first bonus middle counter 363c provided in the first cumulative buffer 363. The ratio of the total number of game media to be paid out in the BB state to the number is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the calculation area 366 for the first cumulative total. When the display target in the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the first cumulative buffer 363 and the ratio is the ratio of the total number of game media to be paid out in the ART state, the former calculation result is notified and the notification display device 346 is notified. When the display target in ~ 348 is the first cumulative buffer 363 and it is the ratio of the total number of payouts of the game media in the BB state, the latter calculation result is notified.

After that, "1" is set in the first cumulative display flag provided in the main RAM 344 (step S5504), and the second cumulative display flag provided in the main RAM 344 is cleared by "0" (step S5505). The first cumulative display flag and the second cumulative display flag are cases where the display target in the notification display devices 346 to 348 is a management result calculated by using the first cumulative buffer 363 or the second cumulative buffer 364. In addition, it is a flag for specifying which of these is to be displayed by the main MPU 342. When "1" is set in the first cumulative display flag and the value of the second cumulative display flag is "0", the management result calculated using the first cumulative display buffer 363 is displayed. When the value of the first cumulative display flag is "0" and the value of the second cumulative display flag is set to "1", the management result calculated using the second cumulative display buffer 364 is displayed. .. Further, when the values of both the first cumulative display flag and the second cumulative display flag are "0", the initial display contents corresponding to neither the first cumulative buffer 363 nor the second cumulative buffer 364 are displayed. Be the target.

After that, the clearing process of the first cumulative buffer 363 is executed (step S5506). As a result, the various counters 363a to 363c of the first cumulative buffer 363 are cleared to "0".

When a negative determination is made in step S5502, it is determined whether or not the value of the total number of games counter 361 after 1 addition is 3000 × (2n + 1) (n is an integer of 1 or more) (step S5507). When the value of the total number of games counter 361 is 3000 × (2n + 1), it means that one management target period using the second cumulative buffer 364 has ended. For example, when 9000 games have elapsed since the clearing process of the main RAM 344 has been executed, 15000 games have elapsed, 21000 games have elapsed, and the like, the second cumulative buffer 364 is used as one management target. The period has ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5507, the calculation process for the second cumulative total is executed (step S5508). In the calculation process, the second total payout counter 364a and the second advantageous middle counter 364b provided in the second cumulative buffer 364 are used with respect to the total number of game media payouts in a continuous period over 6000 games. The ratio of the total number of game media to be paid out in the ART state is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the calculation area 367 for the second cumulative total. Further, in the calculation process, the second total payout counter 364a provided in the second cumulative buffer 364 and the second bonus middle counter 364c are used to pay out the total amount of the game medium in a continuous period over 6000 games. The ratio of the total number of game media to be paid out in the BB state to the number is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the calculation area 367 for the second cumulative total. When the display target in the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the second cumulative buffer 364 and the ratio is the ratio of the total number of game media to be paid out in the ART state, the former calculation result is notified and the notification display device 346 is notified. When the display target in ~ 348 is the second cumulative buffer 364 and it is the ratio of the total number of payouts of the game media in the BB state, the latter calculation result is notified.

After that, the first cumulative display flag provided in the main RAM 344 is cleared to "0" (step S5509), and the second cumulative display flag provided in the main RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S5510). Further, the clearing process of the second cumulative buffer 364 is executed (step S5511). As a result, the various counters 364a to 364c of the second cumulative buffer 364 are cleared to "0".

Next, the management process executed by the main MPU 342 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is executed in step S4513 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 88).

First, it is determined whether or not it is the update timing of the display contents in the notification display devices 346 to 348 (step S5601). As the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348, the ratio of the total number of game media to be paid out in the total cumulative buffer 362 and the ART state, and the total number of game media to be paid out in the total cumulative buffer 362 in the BB state. , The ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the ART state of the first cumulative buffer 363, the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the first cumulative buffer 363 and the BB state, and the second. The ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the cumulative buffer 364 in the ART state, the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the second cumulative buffer 364 in the BB state, and the value of the total number of games counter 344a. There is a ratio of the values of the advantageous game number counter 344b. In the notification display devices 346 to 348, after the display content of one display target is displayed for a predetermined notification period (specifically, 5 seconds), the display content is changed to the next display target and the display content is changed. The display content of the display target is displayed over the above-mentioned predetermined notification period. In the notification display devices 346 to 348, each ratio of the total cumulative buffer 362 is first displayed, and then the timing at which the management target period of the first cumulative buffer 363 and the second cumulative buffer 364 ends. Each ratio for the nearest side is displayed, and then the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b to the value of the total game number counter 344a is displayed. Then, the flow of switching these display targets is repeated. Until the update timing of the display content is reached, the content set in the previous update timing continues to be displayed on the notification display devices 346 to 348.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5601, the display target counter is updated (step S5602). The display target counter is provided in the main RAM 344, and if the value of the display target counter is "0", the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the total cumulative buffer 362, which is the game medium in the ART state. It is the ratio of the total number of payouts, and if the value of the display target counter is "1", the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the total cumulative buffer 362, which is the ratio of the total number of payouts of the game media in the BB state. If the value of the display target counter is "2", the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the first cumulative buffer 363 or the second cumulative buffer 364, and the total number of game media to be paid out in the ART state. If the value of the display target counter is "3", the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the first cumulative buffer 363 or the second cumulative buffer 364, and the total payout of the game media in the BB state. If the value of the display target counter is "4", the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b to the value of the total game number counter 344a. If the value after adding 1 to the value of the display target counter is "5", the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0".

After that, by determining whether or not the value of the display target counter is "0" or "1", whether or not the display target in the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the ratio of the total cumulative buffer 362. Is determined (step S5603). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5603, the total cumulative type display setting process is executed (step S5604). In the setting process, if the value of the display target counter is "0", "0" is displayed on the first notification display device 346, and if the value of the display target counter is "1", the first notification is displayed. "1" is displayed on the display device 346. That is, in the present embodiment, the information corresponding to the type of the display target in the notification display devices 346 to 348 is displayed on the first notification display device 346. After that, the setting process of the total cumulative result display is executed (step S5605). In the setting process, if the value of the display target counter is "0", the total cumulative total buffer 362 stored in the total cumulative total calculation area 365 corresponds to the ratio of the total number of game media to be paid out in the ART state. The information to be displayed is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348. Further, if the value of the display target counter is "1", the information corresponding to the ratio of the total number of payouts of the game media in the BB state is the total cumulative buffer 362 stored in the total cumulative calculation area 365. It is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348. In these cases, the tens place is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the ones place is displayed on the third notification display device 348 after the ratio is displayed in%. In addition, since it becomes impossible to distinguish between 100% and less than 1% in the configuration, different indications may be made between the case of 100% and the case of less than 1%.

When a negative determination is made in step S5603, the display target in the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the first cumulative buffer by determining whether the value of the display target counter is "2" or "3". It is determined whether or not the ratio is for 363 or the second cumulative buffer 364 (step S5606). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5606, the type display setting process for a part of the period is executed (step S5607). In the setting process, if the value of the display target counter is "2", "2" is displayed on the first notification display device 346, and if the value of the display target counter is "3", the first notification is displayed. "3" is displayed on the display device 346.

After that, if "1" is set in the first cumulative display flag of the main RAM 344 (step S5608: YES), the setting process of the first cumulative result display is executed (step S5609). In the setting process, if the value of the display target counter is "2", it is the first cumulative buffer 363 stored in the calculation area 366 for the first cumulative, and the ratio of the total number of game media to be paid out in the ART state. The information corresponding to is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348. Further, if the value of the display target counter is "3", it is the first cumulative buffer 363 stored in the calculation area 366 for the first cumulative and corresponds to the ratio of the total number of payouts of the game media in the BB state. The information is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348.

When "1" is not set in the first cumulative display flag of the main RAM 344 and "1" is set in the second cumulative display flag (step S5610: YES), the setting process of the second cumulative result display is performed. Is executed (step S5611). In the setting process, if the value of the display target counter is "2", it is the second cumulative buffer 364 stored in the calculation area 367 for the second cumulative, and the ratio of the total number of game media to be paid out in the ART state. The information corresponding to is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348. Further, if the value of the display target counter is "3", it is the second cumulative buffer 364 stored in the calculation area 367 for the second cumulative and corresponds to the ratio of the total number of payouts of the game media in the BB state. The information is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348.

When "1" is not set in both the first cumulative display flag and the second cumulative display flag of the main RAM 344 (step S5610: NO), the initial display setting process is executed (step S5612). In the setting process, the display contents of the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348 are set to be the initial display contents regardless of the value of the display target counter. Specifically, the character "L", which is not a display target when displaying the ratio of other situations, is displayed on both the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348. However, even in this case, the content corresponding to the value of the display target counter is displayed on the first notification display device 346. As a result, when the initial display content is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348, the manager of the game hall can grasp which display target it corresponds to. It becomes possible to do.

When a negative determination is made in step S5606, it means that the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b to the value of the total game number counter 344a. In this case, first, the setting process of the type display of the advantageous period ratio is executed (step S5613). In the setting process, "4" corresponding to the value of the display target counter is displayed on the first notification display device 346. In addition, a process for setting the result display of the advantageous period ratio is executed (step S5614). In the setting process, the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b to the value of the total game number counter 344a is calculated, and the information corresponding to the calculation result is transmitted to the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348. To be displayed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The first cumulative buffer 363 and the second cumulative buffer 364 are provided, and the first cumulative buffer 363 is used to manage a continuous period over 6000 games, and the second cumulative buffer 364 is used. The continuous period is managed over 6000 games, and the period managed by using the first cumulative buffer 363 (hereinafter, also referred to as the first period) and the second cumulative buffer 364 are used. Part of the managed period (hereinafter also referred to as the second period) overlaps. This makes it possible to derive various ratios corresponding to the management results in the first period in the middle of one second period, and various ratios corresponding to the management results in the second period in the middle of one first period. It is possible to derive the ratio. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of deriving various ratios while guaranteeing the first period and the second period as the management period. Furthermore, even if the storage capacities of the first cumulative buffer 363 and the second cumulative buffer 364 are not excessively increased, various types are secured while ensuring the first period and the second period as the management period. It is possible to increase the frequency of deriving the ratio.

Since both the first period and the second period end when 6000 games have elapsed, the end conditions of the period are the same. As a result, it is possible to derive various ratios corresponding to a certain period even in a configuration in which management is performed using each of the first cumulative buffer 363 and the second cumulative buffer 364.

When one first period ends, a new first period is started following the first period, and when one second period ends, a new second period is started following the second period. Furthermore, the difference between the first period and the second period is constant. This makes it possible to derive various ratios corresponding to each of the first period and the second period while ensuring a state in which a certain deviation is caused.

When one first period ends, the first cumulative buffer 363 is cleared by "0", and when one second period ends, the second cumulative buffer 364 is cleared by "0". As a result, the capacity of the first cumulative buffer 363 that can store the game history corresponding to the first period is sufficient, and the second cumulative buffer 364 stores the game history corresponding to the second period. The capacity that can be used is sufficient. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while suppressing the capacities of the first cumulative buffer 363 and the second cumulative buffer 364.

When the first period elapses, the notification of various ratios corresponding to the first period is started, and when the second period elapses, the notification of various ratios corresponding to the second period is started. As a result, various ratios are notified with the passage of each of the first period and the second period, and it is possible to notify various ratios in a situation relatively close to the current situation.

<Another form of the eighteenth embodiment>
-The number of cumulative buffers 363 and 364 used to calculate various ratios in the period of 6000 games is not limited to two, the first cumulative buffer 363 and the second cumulative buffer 364, and is three. It may be 4, or 5 or more. If there are three, both the start and end of the period managed by each cumulative buffer will be off by 2000 games, and if there are four, the start and end of the period managed by each cumulative buffer will be. If there are 5 games, both the start and end of the period managed by each cumulative buffer will be off by 1000 games.

-The period of one management target by the first cumulative buffer 363 and the second cumulative buffer 364 is not limited to 6000 games, and the number of games may be less than 6000 games such as 4000 games, 8000. The number of games may be larger than 6000 games such as games. Further, the number of games is not limited to the number of games that can be divided by the number of cumulative buffers 363 and 364, such as 6000 games, and the number of games that cannot be divided by the number of cumulative buffers 363 and 364, such as 6001 games, may be used. If the number of games is not divisible, the total number of games managed by each cumulative buffer 363 and 364 is A (specifically 6001 games), and the number of cumulative buffers 363 and 364 is B (specifically). 2), the start and end of the period to be managed may be shifted by the number of games of quotient by A / B (specifically, 3000 games), and quotient by A / B may be used. The number of games added by 1 (specifically, 3001 games) may be configured so that both the start and end of the period to be managed are shifted.

A ring buffer such as the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 in the nineteenth embodiment described later may be used instead of the cumulative buffers 363 and 364. Then, the result of each game is stored as history information in each of the ring buffer corresponding to the first cumulative buffer 363 and the ring buffer corresponding to the second cumulative buffer 364, and the stored history information is used. It is configured to calculate various ratios as in the eighteenth embodiment. Even with this configuration, it is possible to calculate various ratios while partially overlapping each of the first period and the second period, which are periods spanning 6000 games.

The management target by the first cumulative buffer 363 and the second cumulative buffer 364 is not limited to the above-mentioned various ratios, for example, the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games (in the above-mentioned eighteenth embodiment). The ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b to the value of the total game number counter 344a) may be managed by these cumulative buffers 363 and 364.

<19th embodiment>
As in the eighteenth embodiment, the first cumulative buffer 363 and the second cumulative buffer 364 are used to partially overlap each management target period at a shorter cycle than the management target period. A configuration capable of notifying the management result in each management target period may be applied to the third embodiment. FIG. 111 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 in the present embodiment. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

As shown in FIG. 111, the management IC 66 has a management side I / F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, a management side RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, and a calculation result memory as in the third embodiment. 131 is provided. These functions are the same as those in the third embodiment.

In addition to the above, the management IC 66 is provided with a first history memory 371 and a second history memory 372. The first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 have the same configuration. Further, although the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 have different total data capacities, the basic configuration is the same ring buffer as the history memory 117 in the third embodiment. FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372.

The history memories 371 and 372 are provided with history areas 371a and 372a for sequentially storing history information. In the history areas 371a and 372a, a plurality of pointer information is set in sequence, and history information storage areas 371b and 372b are set in a one-to-one correspondence with each pointer information. In the history information storage areas 371b and 372b, a combination of RTC information and correspondence information can be stored. In this case, each history information storage area 371b, 372b has a data capacity of 2 bytes, and a data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, for storing correspondence information. One byte of data capacity is allocated as an area. When it becomes necessary to store correspondence information according to the signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o (actually, the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j of the pachinko machine 10). First, the date information and time information measured in the current RTC115 are stored in the area for storing the RTC information of the history information storage areas 371b and 372b corresponding to the pointer information currently being written. do. After that, the correspondence information corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o that triggered the information storage this time is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o in the correspondence memory 116, and the read correspondence information is read. Is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the history information storages 371b and 372b corresponding to the pointer information currently to be written.

The history information storage areas 371b and 372b are provided for several minutes so that all the history information when 30,000 game balls are fired can be stored. For example, if history information is generated up to 40,000 times in normal use before 30,000 game balls are fired, 40,000 or more history information storage areas 371b and 372b are provided. As a result, it is possible to store and retain the history information until at least 30,000 game balls are fired in the history memories 371 and 372.

The history memories 371 and 372 are provided with pointer areas 371c and 372c in addition to the history areas 371a and 372a. In the pointer areas 371c and 372c, information for specifying the pointer information currently to be written in the history memories 371 and 372 by the management side CPU 112 is stored. Specifically, at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, information for designating pointer information of "0" as a writing target is set in the pointer areas 371c and 372c. Then, every time one history information is newly stored in the history information storage areas 371b and 372b, the information in the pointer areas 371c and 372c is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1. To. When the pointer information in the last order is the write target and the history information is stored in the history information storage areas 371b and 372b corresponding to the pointer information in the last order, the pointer information of "0" is the write target. The information in the pointer areas 371c and 372c is updated. As a result, when the number of history information that can be stored is exceeded and an opportunity to store the history information occurs, the new history information is overwritten in order from the history information storage areas 371b and 372b in which the old history information is stored. It will be.

Further, when various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112 using the history memory 371 and 372 and the calculation result is stored in the calculation result memory 131, the history memory 371 and the reference target in the calculation are stored. For 372, the history information storage areas 371b and 372b are all cleared to "0", and the information in the pointer areas 371c and 372c is updated so that the pointer information of "0" is the writing target. This makes it possible to prevent the history information that was once read as the read target from being read again.

By providing the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372, various parameters using the history information in the period until 30,000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA can be calculated. Is possible. In this case, the start and end of the period to be managed of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 are mutually different from each other as in the cumulative buffers 363 and 364 in the eighteenth embodiment. It is used in this way. Specifically, the number of game balls to be managed by each history memory 371 and 372 is A (specifically 30,000), and the number of history memories 371 and 372 is B (specifically two). ), Both the start and end of the period to be managed are deviated by the number of A / B ejected game balls (specifically, 15,000). Further, when one management target period in the first history memory 371 ends, the next management target period in the first history memory 371 occurs from the discharge of the next game ball, and the second history When one management target period in the memory 372 ends, the next management target period in the second history memory 372 is generated from the discharge of the next game ball. Therefore, the period to be managed by the first history memory 371 and the period to be managed by the second history memory 372 are repeatedly generated in a state where both the beginning and the end of those periods are deviated by a certain number of discharged pieces. Will be done.

Next, a processing configuration for enabling management of the game history using the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 will be described. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing a history setting process executed by the management side CPU 112. The history setting process is executed in step S607 in the management process (FIG. 18).

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 (step S5701). Specifically, the number of correspondence-related areas in the correspondence-related memory 116 in which information other than the information indicating that the correspondence-related areas 123a to 123o are blank is stored is specified and specified. Set the information of the specified number in the confirmation target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, information other than the information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is blank is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j as described above. Therefore, in step S5701, "10" is set in the confirmation target counter. do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the contents of the buffers corresponding to the current values of the confirmation target counters among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are the contents of the history information writing trigger (step S5702). Specifically, when the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is changed from "0" to "1". It is determined that a write trigger has occurred. When the value of the current confirmation target counter is "8" to "10", the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current confirmation target counter value is changed from "1" to "0". If it is, it is determined that a write trigger has occurred.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5702, the RTC information which is the date information and the time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S5703). Then, the writing process to the first history memory 371 is executed (step S5704). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 371a currently being written is specified by referring to the pointer area 371c of the first history memory 371, and the pointer information to be written is used. The RTC information read in step S5703 is written in the history information storage area 371b of the corresponding history area 371a. Further, the correspondence relation information is read from the correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter, and the correspondence relation information is written in the history information storage area 371b corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, when the correspondence information is any one of the information indicating that the open / close execution mode is set, the information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set, and the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is used, the above Not only the correspondence information but also the start information or the end information is written in the history information storage area 371b corresponding to the pointer information to be written.

After that, the target pointer update process is executed (step S5705). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 371c of the first history memory 371 is read and added by 1. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 371a. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after 1 addition is overwritten in the pointer area 371c as pointer information to be newly written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 371c is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

After that, after the clearing process of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 is executed, the second cumulative total is determined by determining whether or not the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA has reached 15,000. It is determined whether or not it is a waiting period (step S5706). In the present embodiment, the clear signal is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when the clear process of the main RAM 65 is executed, and the management IC 66 receives the clear signal from the main CPU 63. 1 Clear processing of the history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 is executed. By executing the clearing process, the history areas 371a and 372a of the history memories 371 and 372 are all cleared to "0", and the pointer areas 371c and 372c of the history memories 371 and 372 are set to "0". It will be cleared. Then, when an opportunity to write the history information occurs after that, only the first history memory 371 is updated until the number of discharged pieces reaches 15,000, and after the number of discharged pieces reaches 15,000, the history information is stored. Each time a write trigger occurs, both the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 are updated.

If a negative determination is made in step S5706, a write process to the second history memory 372 is executed (step S5707). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 372a currently being written is specified by referring to the pointer area 372c of the second history memory 372, and the pointer information to be written is used. The RTC information read in step S5703 is written in the history information storage area 372b of the corresponding history area 372a. Further, the correspondence relation information is read from the correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter, and the correspondence relation information is written in the history information storage area 372b corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, when the correspondence information is any one of the information indicating that the open / close execution mode is set, the information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set, and the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is used, the above Not only the correspondence information but also the start information or the end information is written in the history information storage area 372b corresponding to the pointer information to be written.

After that, the target pointer update process is executed (step S5708). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 372c of the second history memory 372 is read and added by 1. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 372a. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after 1 addition is overwritten in the pointer area 372c as pointer information to be newly written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 372c is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

When a negative determination is made in step S5702, an affirmative determination is made in step S5706, or the process of step S5708 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S5709). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S5710). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S5710: NO), the processing after step S5702 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the value of the new confirmation target counter. When the value of the confirmation target counter is "0" (step S5710: YES), the target switching process is executed (step S5711).

FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the target switching process.

First, it is determined whether or not the ejection of the gaming ball from the gaming area PA has occurred (step S5801). When the game ball is ejected (step S5801: YES), the addition process of the total ejected number counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is executed (step S5802). In the addition process, the value of the number of game balls ejected this time from the game area PA is added to the total ejected number counter. After that, in step S5803, it is determined whether or not the value of the total emission number counter is 15000 × 2n (n is an integer of 1 or more). When the value of the total number of discharged pieces counter is 15000 × 2n, it means that one management target period using the first history memory 371 has ended. For example, when 30,000 game balls are ejected after the clearing process of the first history memory 371 is executed, when 60,000 game balls are ejected, when 90,000 game balls are ejected, and so on. It means that one management target period using the first history memory 371 has expired.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5803, the calculation process using the first history memory 371 is executed (step S5804). In the calculation process, various parameters are calculated using the history information stored in the first history memory 371. The content of the calculation of these various parameters is the same as that of steps S1402 to S1418 of the power failure response process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment. Then, various parameters of the calculation result are written in the calculation result memory 131. In this case, if the calculation result memory 131 already stores information on other calculation results, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. conduct. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

After that, the clearing process of the first history memory 371 is executed (step S5805). As a result, the history area 371a of the first history memory 371 is all cleared to "0", and the pointer area 371c of the first history memory 371 is cleared to "0".

When a negative determination is made in step S5803, it is determined whether or not the value of the total emission number counter is 15000 × (2n + 1) (n is an integer of 1 or more) (step S5806). When the value of the total number of discharged pieces counter is 15000 × (2n + 1), it means that one management target period using the second history memory 372 has ended. For example, when 45,000 game balls are ejected, 75,000 game balls are ejected, 105,000 game balls are ejected, and the like after the clearing process of the second history memory 372 is executed. It means that one management target period using the second history memory 372 has expired.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5806, the calculation process using the second history memory 372 is executed (step S5807). In the calculation process, various parameters are calculated using the history information stored in the second history memory 372. The content of the calculation of these various parameters is the same as that of steps S1402 to S1418 of the power failure response process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment. Then, various parameters of the calculation result are written in the calculation result memory 131. In this case, if the calculation result memory 131 already stores information on other calculation results, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. conduct. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

After that, the process of clearing the second history memory 372 is executed (step S5808). As a result, the history area 372a of the second history memory 372 is all cleared to "0", and the pointer area 372c of the second history memory 372 is cleared to "0".

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A first history memory 371 and a second history memory 372 are provided, and the period until 30,000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA is managed by using the first history memory 371, and the first is 2 The history memory 372 is used to manage the period until 30,000 game balls are ejected from the game area PA, and the first history memory 371 is used to manage the period (hereinafter referred to as the first). The period (also referred to as one period) and the period managed by using the second history memory 372 (hereinafter, also referred to as the second period) partially overlap. This makes it possible to derive various parameters corresponding to the management results in the first period in the middle of one second period, and various parameters corresponding to the management results in the second period in the middle of one first period. It is possible to derive the parameters. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of deriving various parameters while guaranteeing the first period and the second period as the period for which management is performed. Furthermore, even if the storage capacities of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 are not excessively increased, various types of management are performed while guaranteeing the first period and the second period. It is possible to increase the frequency of deriving parameters.

Since both the first period and the second period end when 30,000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA, the end conditions of the period are the same. As a result, it is possible to derive various parameters corresponding to a certain period even in a configuration in which management is performed using each of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372.

When one first period ends, a new first period is started following the first period, and when one second period ends, a new second period is started following the second period. Furthermore, the difference between the first period and the second period is constant. This makes it possible to derive various parameters corresponding to each of the first period and the second period while ensuring a state in which a certain deviation is caused.

When one first period ends, the first history memory 371 is cleared by "0", and when one second period ends, the second history memory 372 is cleared by "0". As a result, the first history memory 371 has a sufficient capacity to store the game history corresponding to the first period, and the second history memory 372 stores the game history corresponding to the second period. The capacity that can be used is sufficient. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while suppressing the capacities of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372.

<Another form of the 19th embodiment>
The number of history memories 371 and 372 used for calculating various parameters in the period until 30,000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA is the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372. The number is not limited to two, and may be three, four, or five or more. If there are three, both the start and end of the period managed by each history memory will be off by 10,000, and if there are four, the start and end of the period managed by each history memory will be offset. If the number is 5, the start and end of the period managed by each history memory will be off by 6000.

The period subject to one management by the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 is not limited to the period until 30,000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA, such as 20,000. The number may be less than 30,000, or more than 30,000, such as 40,000. Further, the number is not limited to the number divisible by the number of history memories 371,372 such as 30,000, and may be the number not divisible by the number of history memories 371 and 372 such as 30001. If the number is not divisible, the number of discharges to be managed by each history memory 371,372 is A (specifically, 30001), and the number of history memories 371,372 is B (specifically, 2). In the case of (pieces), both the start and end of the period to be managed may be shifted by the number of quotients by A / B (specifically, 15,000), and 1 is added to the quotient by A / B. The configuration may be such that both the start and end of the period to be managed are shifted by the number (specifically, 15001).

A counter such as the first cumulative buffer 363 and the second cumulative buffer 364 in the eighteenth embodiment may be used instead of the history memories 371 and 372. Then, the counter corresponding to the first history memory 371 and the counter corresponding to the second history memory 372 each store the number of balls entered into each ball entry unit, and the stored number of balls entered is used. The configuration is such that various parameters are calculated as in the 19th embodiment. Even with this configuration, it is possible to calculate various parameters while partially overlapping each of the first period and the second period, which are the periods until 30,000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA. Become.

The configuration is not limited to the configuration using a plurality of history memories such as the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372, and the history information over a long period as in the third embodiment, for example. Using one history area that can store, extract the history information corresponding to the first period from the history information stored in the history area, calculate various parameters, and calculate the relevant parameters. The history information corresponding to the second period in which a part of the first period overlaps may be extracted and various parameters may be calculated. In this case, the history area has a capacity capable of sufficiently storing the history information in the period until 45,000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA, so that each of the first period and the second period can be stored. It is possible to extract the history information corresponding to.

-When writing history information to the history memory 371, 372, after writing the history information to the area corresponding to the pointer information shown in the pointer areas 371c and 372c, the pointer information in the pointer areas 371c and 372c is updated. The area for writing new history information is always fixed, and the information stored in each area may be sequentially shifted when new history information is written. For example, when the first area to the fifth area exist, the area for writing new history information is always the first area, and when it becomes an opportunity to write new history information, the fourth area → the fifth area. After shifting each information such as area, third area → fourth area, second area → third area, first area → second area, new history information may be written in the first area.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the description is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

(1) In the first embodiment or the like, all of the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are the targets for storing history information (or ball entry history). However, the configuration is not limited to this, and only a part of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is history information. It may be a configuration that is a storage target of. For example, the configuration may be such that only the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the second operating port 34 are the storage targets of the history information, and only the general winning opening 31 is the storage target of the history information. Good. Even in this case, it is possible to grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball in a predetermined period for the ball entry portion for which the history information is stored.

(2) In the first embodiment or the like, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and the third winning opening detection sensor 44a are associated with each other to correspond to the entry result of the game ball. The configuration is such that the signal paths 118a to 118c for transmitting information are set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the information corresponding to the entry result for the same type of entry portion is the same type. Even if there are a plurality of ball entry portions and a plurality of ball entry detection sensors are present in accordance with the presence of a plurality of ball entry portions, the configuration may be such that one type of information is transmitted. This makes it possible to reduce the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66.

(3) In the first embodiment or the like, correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the correspondence information may be stored in advance in the management IC 66. In this case, it is not necessary to execute the process for causing the management IC 66 to recognize the correspondence information, so that the processing load of the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

(4) In the first embodiment or the like, transmission of correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the configuration is such that the operation power is supplied to the main CPU 63 at the start of supply, but the present invention is not limited to this. When a signal requesting transmission of the relational information is received, the correspondence relational information may be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. In this case, the correspondence memory 116 is provided as a non-volatile memory and is used for both reading and writing, and the correspondence information provided from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after the shipment of the pachinko machine 10 is sent to the main CPU 63. Even if the supply of operating power is stopped, it is configured to be stored and held in the corresponding memory 116. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which correspondence information is transmitted.

(5) In the first embodiment or the like, transmission of correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the configuration is such that the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting the detection result information of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a are used, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the correspondence-related information is mainly used. A configuration may be provided in which a dedicated signal path for transmission from the side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is provided. As a result, the management IC 66 can grasp which type of information is being received from the main CPU 63 by the type of the buffers 122a to 122o that receive the information.

(6) In the first embodiment or the like, information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, but information is not transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63, but the configuration is limited to this. Instead, information may be transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. For example, various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 based on the history information may be transmitted to the main side CPU 63. In this case, the main CPU 63 may be configured to directly execute the notification control of the notification means as in the eleventh embodiment, in order to perform notification corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters. By transmitting a command corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters to the voice emission control device 81, the main CPU 63 uses the display light emission unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 to change the contents of the various parameters. It may be configured so that the corresponding notification is executed.

(7) When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, various parameters are calculated by the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, and the calculation is performed. The contents of various parameters may be notified by using the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, the symbol display device 41, and the like. In this case, it is possible to confirm whether or not the ball entering mode of the game ball in the game area PA on the immediately preceding business day is normal at the start of business of the game hall.

(8) If various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 are abnormal results, the pachinko machine 10 cannot start the game until the prohibition release operation is performed. May be. The configuration for preventing the start of the game may be, for example, a configuration in which the launch of the game ball is prohibited, a configuration in which the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a are disabled, and a first operating port. Even if a prize is won in the 33 or the second operating port 34, the winning / failing determination process may not be executed. Further, the prohibition release operation may be an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again with the RAM erasing switch turned on, and can be operated when the game machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. It may be the operation of the operation means. This makes it possible to prevent the game from being played as it is in a situation where the ball entering mode of the game ball in the game area PA is an abnormal mode.

(9) Although the history information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the history memory 117, the calculation of various parameters using the history information is performed by either the main CPU 63 or the management side CPU 112. May not be executed. In this case, the history information is read by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and the operator of the reading operation executes operations of various parameters using the read history information. Often, the reading device may be configured to execute operations of various parameters using the read history information. In this case, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

(10) The management IC 66 may not be provided, and the main CPU 63 may have a function of executing storage processing of history information and a function of calculating various parameters in each of the above embodiments, and the payout side may be provided. The configuration may be provided by the CPU 92, or may be the configuration provided by the voice emission control device 81. When the payout side CPU 92 or the voice emission control device 81 is provided with these functions, information on the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the control subject having the functions. It will be.

(11) The management IC 66 is provided with a power supply separate from the main CPU 63, and even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management IC 66 calculates various parameters using the history information. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that history information or information of various parameters can be output. As a result, the history information and various parameters can be read by the reading device even when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped.

(12) The reading terminal 102 used for reading a program from the main ROM 64 is configured to be also used as a terminal used for reading history information or various parameters by a reading device, but the configuration is limited to this. The terminal used for reading the history information or various parameters by the reading device may be provided separately from the reading terminal 102 for reading the program from the main ROM 64. In this case, the terminal used for reading the history information or various parameters may be provided on the MPU 62, or may be provided at a position different from the MPU 62 on the main control board 61.

(13) The correspondence-related memory 116, the history memory 117, and the calculation result memory 131 in each of the above embodiments are not limited to the configuration provided as the non-volatile storage means such as the flash memory, and are not limited to these memories, for example. One of 116, 117, and 131 is provided as a volatile storage means that requires power supply to store and retain information, and by supplying backup power to the memory, operating power to the main CPU 63 is provided. The information may be stored and retained even if the supply of the device is stopped. In this case, a backup power device dedicated to the memory may be provided, or the backup power may be supplied to the memory from the power supply / emission control device 78 that supplies the backup power to the main RAM 65. May be good.

(14) The game ball is not limited to the configuration in which various parameters are calculated using the history information, and the history information is not stored and retained, and the game ball can be played by any of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. The configuration may be such that various parameters are calculated and updated each time a new detection is made. In this case, although the calculation frequency of various parameters is high, it is possible to extract various parameters at arbitrary timings.

(15) The management IC 66 is not limited to a configuration in which the management side CPU 112 is provided as a general-purpose CPU, and history information storage processing and various parameter calculation processing are executed based on the programs and data stored in the management side ROM 113. A hardware circuit designed to have these functions may be formed in the management IC 66. Specifically, for example, in the case of the first embodiment, the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 63 indicating that the game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a. , The correspondence information corresponding to the buffer that received the signal is stored in the history memory 117 from the correspondence memory 116, and the information of the RTC 115 at that time is stored in the history memory 117. do. Further, for example, in the case of the ninth embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 63 indicating that the game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a, the hardware circuit receives the signal. The value of the counter corresponding to the buffer is incremented by 1. Further, when the calculation trigger in the first embodiment or the like occurs, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters by using the history information at that time. Further, when an external output trigger to the reading terminal 102 occurs, the hardware circuit externally outputs various parameters as calculation results and externally outputs history information.

(16) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the detection result information of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored as history information, the configuration in which the transition to the open / close execution mode is stored as history information is also possible. Often, the configuration may be such that the transition timing and the end timing to the open / close execution mode are stored as history information, or the transition to the high frequency support mode may be stored as history information, and a predetermined abnormality may be obtained. It may be configured that the occurrence of is stored as history information. Further, the configuration may be such that the transition probability to the open / close execution mode is calculated by using the history information as described above, or the transition probability to the high frequency support mode may be calculated. The configuration may be such that the frequency of occurrence is calculated. Then, the history information and various parameters may be read by a reading device.

(17) The main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be provided as separate chips, may be provided as separate boards, or may be provided as separate control devices.

(18) In the first embodiment or the like, the number of balls entered into the out port 24a is measured, while the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the first operating port 33 are measured. With respect to the payout of the prize ball of the game ball such as the second operating port 34 and the entry into the privilege trigger entry section that triggers the winning / failing determination process, the history information including the RTC information may be stored. This makes it possible to extract the entry history of the game ball into the privilege-triggered ball section, and calculate the frequency of the game ball entering each privilege-triggered ball section with respect to the total number of game balls discharged. Become.

(19) The configuration may include items other than those in each of the above embodiments as targets to be left as history information. For example, at least one of the timing when the lower plate 56a is full, the timing when the full tank is started, and the timing when the full tank is released may be stored as history information, and the tank 75 may be stored. At least one of the timing when the ball-free state is started, the timing when the ball-free state is released, and the timing when the ball-free state is released may be stored as history information, and the payout device 76 is in an abnormal state. That is, at least one of the timing at which the abnormal state of the payout device 76 is started and the timing at which the abnormal state of the payout device 76 is released may be stored as history information. In this case, it is possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of these events.

(20) In the first embodiment or the like, the configuration is set in advance at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 on the management side I / F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fact that the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal is also recognized by the management IC 66 by transmitting the type identification command from the main CPU 63. It may be configured. In this case, it is not necessary to set in advance the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122p and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p in the management IC 66.

(21) The number of balls entered into a predetermined ball entry portion generated in a situation where the front door frame 14 is open is stored as history information, and the number of balls entered by using the history information is stored. May be configured to be output externally to the reader. As a result, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined entry portion in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state, and it is possible to grasp the presence or absence of fraud. Further, the number of balls entering a predetermined ball entering portion generated in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is calculated when a predetermined calculation trigger occurs, and the calculated number of balls entered is an abnormal number. In that case, the abnormality notification may be executed. This makes it possible to deal with fraudulent acts in which the front door frame 14 is illegally opened to allow a game ball to enter a predetermined entry portion.

(22) The management IC 66 may be configured to transmit a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when it is operating normally. In this case, it is possible for the main CPU 63 to monitor whether or not the management IC 66 is operating normally.

(23) In the first embodiment or the like, the order in which the confirmation processes of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are executed by the management side CPU 112 may be opposite to that in the first embodiment or the like. In this case, the order in which the main CPU 63 executes the change processing of the output state of each signal and the order in which the management side CPU 112 executes the confirmation processing of the buffers 122a to 122o are the same.

(24) When the information stored in the main ROM 64 is output to the outside by using the reading terminal 102, one of the program and the data may be selectively output to the outside, and a predetermined program may be used. It may be configured so that only can be output to the outside. In this case, the information to be analyzed can be selectively read by the reading device. As a configuration for selectively outputting information to the outside, the main CPU 63 selects information to be externally output from the selection information received from the reading device through the reading terminal 102, and outputs the selected information to the outside. Can be considered.

(25) The other information of the target to be externally output through the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program stored in the main ROM 64 is not limited to the history information and various parameters, for example, when an abnormality occurs. May be configured to store the history information of the abnormality occurrence and output the stored history information to the outside through the reading terminal 102.

(26) Detection sensors 42a to 48a are individually provided for each of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, and the detection sensors 42a to 48a are provided. By summing up the number of game balls detected in the above, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is grasped, but the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, all discharged from the game area PA. There may be a configuration in which a passage area through which the game balls of the above are passed one by one is provided, and an discharge detection sensor for detecting the game balls passing through the passage area is provided. In this case, it is possible to grasp the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA by using the detection result of the discharge detection sensor. Further, in the same configuration as in each of the above embodiments, a detection sensor for detecting the number of balls entered in each of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34. By providing 42a to 47a, it is possible to calculate the ratio of the number of game balls entered into each entry portion to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA.

(27) Display control based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60 instead of the configuration in which the display control device 82 is controlled by the voice emission control device 81 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. The device 82 may be configured to control the voice emission control device 81. Further, instead of the configuration in which the voice emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are separately provided, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of the two control devices may be provided. May be integrated in the main control device 60, and both functions of both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 60. Further, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the voice emission control device 81 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 81 to the display control device 82 are also arbitrary.

(28) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, which is a big hit when a right is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. Or, after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as paying out a medal is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the main body of the gaming machine, which is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, is equipped with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start rotation of a reel.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, for example, the result of a lottery process of a winning combination executed when one game is started based on the operation of a start lever is historical information. It may be configured to calculate the actual winning probability of each role by using the history information, and when a transition to a special gaming state such as a bonus game occurs, it is stored as history information and the history is stored. The information may be used to calculate the actual transition probability to the special gaming state, or the ratio of the number of staying games in the special gaming state to the total number of digested games may be calculated. Then, the history information and various parameters may be read by a reading device, or the gaming machine itself may be notified of the calculation results of the various parameters.

(29) The characteristic configurations of the first to nineteenth embodiments may be applied to each other in any combination. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the sixth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the twelfth embodiment may be combined, and the second embodiment may be combined. The characteristic configuration of the embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the fourth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the eighth embodiment may be combined. Further, the characteristic configuration of the 16th embodiment and the characteristic configuration of the 17th embodiment may be combined. Further, the characteristic configuration of the 18th embodiment and the characteristic configuration of the 19th embodiment may be combined. Further, the configuration of another embodiment may be applied in any combination to the configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to 17th embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the specific storage execution means (main side CPU 63) executes the ball entry detection process so that the corresponding information is stored in the specific storage means (main side RAM 65). Function) and
A privilege to execute a process for giving a privilege to a player based on the information corresponding to the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means is stored in the specific storage means. Granting means (a function of executing the process of step S217 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing the process of step S408 in the payout side CPU 92), and
In a gaming machine equipped with
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding to the storage is stored in the predetermined storage means (history memory 117, tenth embodiment in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments). Then, the predetermined information (first) is executed in the main RAM 65) so that the number or frequency of the game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means can be specified by the game machine or a device outside the game machine. Predetermined storage execution means (first) for storing history information in the eighth and twelfth embodiments and numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments in the predetermined storage means. 9. In the ninth, eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112, and in the tenth embodiment, step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, in the main CPU 63. A gaming machine comprising a function of executing the processes of steps S2320 and S2323).

According to the feature A1, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the corresponding information is stored in the specific storage means, and when the information is stored in the specific storage means, the player is given a privilege. Will be done. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry means. In this configuration, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the number or frequency of the game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means. The predetermined information that can be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or the device outside the gaming machine is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store information for managing the number or frequency of balls entered into the predetermined ball entry means in the gaming machine, and by using this managed information, the predetermined information is used. It becomes possible to appropriately manage the mode of entering the game ball into the ball entry means. Further, since the predetermined information is stored and retained by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the predetermined information does not trigger execution of a process for granting a privilege to the player.

According to the feature A2, the purpose is to appropriately manage the mode of entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means because the predetermined information does not trigger the execution of the process for granting the privilege to the player. It is possible to store and retain predetermined information in the form of information.

Feature A3. It is provided with specific entry means (out port 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
The predetermined storage executing means causes the predetermined storage means to execute the storage of information corresponding to the case where the game ball enters the specific entry means, and the game ball enters the specific entry means. Specific information that enables the number of balls to be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments). The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the measured numerical information) is stored in the predetermined storage means.

According to the feature A3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball entry means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball entry means is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it is possible to manage not only the mode of entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means but also the mode of entering the game ball into the specific ball entry means. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of the ball entry frequency between the predetermined ball entry means and the specific ball entry means.

Feature A4. All the ball-entry means for discharging the entered game ball from the game area, including the predetermined ball-entry means, are to be stored in the predetermined storage means for the information corresponding to the occurrence of the game ball's entry. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, which is characterized by being a ball entry means.

According to the feature A4, all the ball entry means for ejecting the game ball from the game area are subject to management using the information stored in the predetermined storage means, so that the ball entry frequency for any ball entry means is reached. Can be managed by using the information stored in the predetermined storage means. Further, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of balls entered into the predetermined ball entry means to the number of game balls ejected from the game area by using the information stored in the predetermined storage means.

Feature A5. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the predetermined information includes information corresponding to the timing at which the gaming ball enters the predetermined ball entry means.

According to the feature A5, since the predetermined information includes the information corresponding to the timing when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the predetermined information can be used to obtain the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means. It is possible to grasp the entry history in detail.

Feature A6. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the predetermined information is counting information of the number of gaming balls that have entered the predetermined ball entry means.

According to the feature A6, since the predetermined information is the counting information of the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball entry means, the mode of entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means while suppressing the information capacity of the predetermined information. Can be managed.

Feature A7. The predetermined storage executing means is a means (first) for storing information that makes it possible to specify whether or not a game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means in a predetermined situation. In the first to seventh embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S804 and S809 in the management side CPU 112, in the eighth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2104 in the management side CPU 112, and in the ninth embodiment, management. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S2203 in the side CPU 112).

According to the feature A7, it is possible to manage the ball entry mode of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not the situation is predetermined.

Feature A8. Any of the features A1 to A7 characterized by having an external output means (a function of executing an external output process in the management side CPU 112) that outputs information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the feature A8, the information stored in the predetermined storage means can be read from the gaming machine, and the read information can be used to analyze the entry mode of the game ball into the predetermined entry means.

Feature A9. It is equipped with a program output means (a function of executing the process of step S903 in the main CPU 63) that outputs a control program to a device outside the gaming machine by using the information output unit (reading terminal 102).
The gaming machine according to feature A8, wherein the external output means uses the information output unit to output information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine.

According to the feature A9, it is possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage means by using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program. This makes it possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage means while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature A10. A means (mainly) for identifying which of the information stored in the predetermined storage means and the control program is the information to be output from the information output unit, and outputting the information corresponding to the specific result. The gaming machine according to feature A9, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S902 in the side CPU 63).

According to the feature A10, in the configuration in which the information stored in the predetermined storage means is externally output by using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program, the information to be externally output is the control program and the predetermined information. Which of the information stored in the storage means is specified on the game machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. This makes it possible to read only necessary information even in a configuration in which the information output unit is also used.

Feature A11. The first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means, and
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A10, characterized in that

According to the feature A11, the processing load of the first control means is extremely increased because the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the specific storage execution means has the predetermined storage execution means. It is possible to achieve the excellent effect as already explained while avoiding it.

Feature A12. The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to the feature A12, since the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip, unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means can be performed. It will be possible to prevent it.

Feature A13. It is provided with specific entry means (out port 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
When the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, the predetermined memory execution means stores the information corresponding to the game ball into the specific ball entry means so that the predetermined storage means can execute the game. Specific information that enables the number or frequency of balls to be entered to be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, ninth to ninth). In the eleventh embodiment, the numerical information measured by the counter) is stored in the predetermined storage means.
The first control means is
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the first transmission means (the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) that transmits the first information to the second control means using the first signal path. Function to output either) and
When the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, the second transmission means (the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) that transmits the second information to the second control means by using the second signal path. Function to output either) and
The gaming machine according to the feature A11 or A12, which comprises the above-mentioned feature A11 or A12.

According to the feature A13, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball entry means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball entry means is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it is possible to manage not only the mode of entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means but also the mode of entering the game ball into the specific ball entry means. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of the ball entry frequency between the predetermined ball entry means and the specific ball entry means.

Further, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when the game ball enters the specific entry means. The second information is transmitted to the second control means using the second signal path. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted and the signal path correspond to each other, and it is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing each type of information by the second control means.

Feature A14. The first control means is a third transmission means that transmits identification information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not it is a predetermined situation to the second control means using a third path. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the signal in the open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63, The gaming machine according to feature A13, which is characterized by having a function of outputting either a high-frequency support mode signal or a door-opening signal).

According to the feature A14, it is possible to manage the mode of entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means and the mode of entering the game ball into the specific ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not the situation is predetermined. Further, since the identification information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the situation is predetermined is transmitted to the second control means using the third path, the second control means transfers the identification information to the first information and the first information. 2 It is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing from other information such as information.

Feature A15. The first control means uses the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball entry means to the second control means. The gaming machine according to feature A13 or A14, which comprises a means for transmitting identification information to be transmitted (a function of executing recognition processing in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature A15, the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball entry means is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. Therefore, it is not necessary to store the correspondence of these information in advance in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature A16. The gaming machine according to feature A15, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to the feature A16, when the supply of the operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, so that the predetermined ball entry means and the specific ball entry means. In a situation where a game ball may enter the ball, it is possible to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means by the second control means. Become.

Feature A17. The feature A15 or A16, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means by using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. Game machine.

According to the feature A17, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a configuration dedicated to transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication as compared with.

Feature A18. When the identification information is received, the second control means can specify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball entry means. One of the features A15 to A17, which is characterized by having a means (a function of executing a correspondence setting process in the management side CPU 112) for storing the correspondence information to be stored in the correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116). The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature A18, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means is stored in the second control means. As a result, information that enables the second control means to specify the ball entry means corresponding to the information to be transmitted is provided to the second control means each time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. You don't have to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the first information and the second information.

Feature A19. The first control means is a third transmission means that transmits third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not the situation is predetermined to the second control means using a third path. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the signal in the open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63, Equipped with a function to output either the high frequency support mode signal or the door open signal)
The feature A15 is characterized in that the second control means can recognize that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present, even if the identification information is not received. The gaming machine according to any one of A18.

According to the feature A19, it is possible to manage the mode of entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means and the mode of entering the game ball into the specific ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not the situation is predetermined. Further, the information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the third information is in a predetermined situation can be specified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. .. This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature A20. The second control means has more information than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means as a receiving unit capable of receiving information from the first control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A19, characterized in that a large number of receiving units (buffers 122a to 122p) are provided.

According to the feature A20, the second control means is provided with a number of receiving units larger than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, so that the model of the gaming machine can be used. Even if the number of types of the information increases or decreases accordingly, it is possible to deal with it without changing the configuration of the receiving unit. Therefore, it is possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature A21. A first external output means (management) that outputs information of a combination of the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means and information that makes it recognizable corresponding to the predetermined ball entry means to a device outside the gaming machine. (Function to execute external output processing in the side CPU 112) and
A second external output means (management) that outputs information of a combination of the specific information stored in the predetermined storage means and information that makes it recognizable to correspond to the specific ball entry means to a device outside the gaming machine. (Function to execute external output processing in the side CPU 112) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A13 to A20, which comprises the above-mentioned feature A13 to A20.

According to the feature A21, the information stored in the predetermined storage means is read from the gaming machine, and the read information is used to enter the game ball into the predetermined entry means and the game ball into the specific entry means. It is possible to specify the ball entry mode. Further, when the external output is performed, the information of the combination of the predetermined information and the information that makes it recognizable that the predetermined ball entry means is supported is output externally, and the specific information and the specific ball entry means are supported. Information in combination with information that makes it recognizable is output externally. This makes it possible to specify each ball entry mode by using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

Feature A22. Information calculation means (1st, 2nd, 6th, 8th, 9th, 9th) for calculating the aspect information corresponding to the entry mode of the game ball in the game area by using the predetermined information. 10. In the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1008, step S1013 and step S1017 in the management side CPU 112 is executed, and in the third embodiment, the processing of step S1408, step S1413 and step S1417 in the management side CPU 112 is executed. A function, a function of executing the process of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and a function in the management side CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A21, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S2005, and a function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment). ..

According to the feature A22, the game machine calculates the mode information corresponding to the entry mode of the game ball by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it is possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the entering mode of the gaming ball, or it is possible to externally output the aspect information which is the result of calculation using predetermined information. ..

Feature A23. The predetermined storage executing means is a means (first) for making information that can specify whether or not the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entry means is in a predetermined situation in the predetermined storage means. In the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S804 and S809 in the management side CPU 112, in the eighth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2104 in the management side CPU 112, and in the ninth embodiment, the management side. A function of executing the process of step S2203 in the CPU 112) is provided.
The information calculation means is a means (first, second, second) for calculating the aspect information by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means in the predetermined situation. In the sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processes of step S1008, step S1013, and step S1017 in the management side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, step S1408 in the management side CPU 112, A function of executing the processes of steps S1413 and S1417, a function of executing the process of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment. The feature A22 is characterized in that the seventh embodiment has a function of executing the process of step S2005 in the management side CPU 112, and the eleventh embodiment has a function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 63). The described gaming machine.

According to the feature A23, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation and calculate the aspect information corresponding to the entry mode of the game ball.

Feature A24. When the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, twelfth implementation). The feature A22 or A23 is characterized by having a function of executing the process of step S1019 in the management side CPU 112 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S1605 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment). Game machine.

According to the feature A24, when the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, so that the event that the predetermined information exceeds the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means is unlikely to occur. It is possible to make it.

Feature A25. Even if the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is maintained in a state of being stored in the predetermined storage means A22. Or the gaming machine according to A23.

According to the feature A25, even if the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is stored and held in the predetermined storage means, so that the aspect information is read out and the game ball enters the ball. When analyzing the aspect, it is possible to refer not only to the aspect information but also to the predetermined information which is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information.

Feature A26. The information calculation means is when the supply of the operating power to the control means having the specific storage execution means is stopped, or when the supply of the operating power to the control means having the specific storage execution means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A25, which comprises calculating the aspect information.

According to the feature A26, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is stopped, the mode information is calculated in units of each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

Feature A27. The information calculation means is characterized in that the aspect information is calculated when an operation trigger that can be repeatedly generated occurs in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means having the specific storage execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of A26.

According to the feature A27, since the mode information is calculated every time a calculation trigger that repeatedly occurs in the situation where the operating power is supplied to the control means, the mode information is managed in detail within one business day. Is possible.

Feature A28. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) becomes a predetermined period.
The period measuring means stops the measurement of the period when the game is not executed, and restarts the measurement of the period from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the measurement of the period is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A22 to A27.

According to the feature A28, since the aspect information is calculated every time the predetermined period elapses, the calculation frequency of the aspect information can be easily adjusted only by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, in the situation where the game is not executed, the measurement for the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not executed from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the aspect information in the situation in which the game is being executed.

Feature A29. Features A22 to A28 characterized by having an external output means (a function of executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112) that outputs the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the feature A29, since the aspect information is output to a device outside the gaming machine, it is possible to easily grasp the entering aspect of the gaming ball.

Feature A30. The gaming machine according to feature A29, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the gaming machine when the aspect information is output to the device outside the gaming machine.

According to the feature A30, when not only the aspect information but also the predetermined information is output to the device outside the gaming machine to read the aspect information and analyze the entering mode of the game ball, not only the aspect information but also the aspect information thereof. It is possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information.

Feature A31. The first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means,
Equipped with
The feature A29 or the external output means is characterized in that when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means, the external output means outputs the aspect information to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to A30.

According to the feature A31, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the external output means separately from the first control means, the embodiment is based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible to output the information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature A32. The information calculation means calculates the mode information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs, and the information calculation means calculates the mode information.
The result storage execution means (in the third embodiment, steps S1410, S1414 and step S1418 in the management side CPU 112) sequentially store the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131). The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A31, which comprises a function of executing the process of the above, and a function of executing the process of step S1604 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment).

According to the feature A32, the aspect information can be accumulated in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to collectively read out a plurality of mode information when managing the entering mode of the game ball.

Feature A33. The result storage execution means is
A means for determining whether or not the aspect information is storage target information (a function of executing the process of step S1603 in the management side CPU 112) and
When the aspect information is the storage target information, a means for storing the aspect information in the calculation result storage means (a function of executing the process of step S1604 in the management side CPU 112) and
The gaming machine according to the feature A32, characterized in that the machine is provided with.

According to the feature A33, when the aspect information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the aspect information is stored in the calculation result storage means. As a result, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required for the calculation result storage means.

Feature A34. The game according to feature A32 or A33, wherein the result storage executing means stores information that enables the time when the aspect information is calculated to be attached to the aspect information and stores the result storage means in the calculation result storage means. Machine.

According to the feature A34, the information that makes it possible to specify the time when the aspect information is calculated is attached to the aspect information. This makes it possible to analyze each aspect information while grasping the time when each aspect information is calculated.

Feature A35. The first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means, and
Equipped with
The information calculation means according to any one of the features A22 to A34, wherein the information calculation means calculates the aspect information when the second control means receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. Game machine.

According to the feature A35, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the embodiment is based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible to make the information calculated by the second control means.

Feature A36. It is provided with a notification control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2605, S2607 and S2608 in the main CPU 63) that controls the notification means (notifying light emitting unit 151) so as to notify the content corresponding to the aspect information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A35, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature A36, the content corresponding to the aspect information is notified by the gaming machine itself. As a result, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the entry mode of the game ball without reading the mode information from the game machine.

Feature A37. The control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is housed in the board box.
The gaming machine according to feature A36, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

According to the feature A37, it is possible to make it difficult to perform unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature A38. The first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means, and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature A36 or A37, wherein the first control means includes the information calculation means and the notification control means.

According to the feature A38, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating the aspect information and the calculation result thereof. It is possible to consolidate the functions for executing the notification corresponding to the first control means.

Feature A39. The notification control means controls the notification means so that the first notification is executed when the mode information is the information in the first range, and when the mode information is the information in the second range, the notification control means controls the notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A36 to A38, characterized in that the notification means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

According to the feature A39, the aspect information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range including the aspect information is notified. This makes it possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature A40. A1 to the feature A1 to be characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function of executing the process of step S218 in the main CPU 63) to externally output the corresponding information when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means. The gaming machine according to any one of A39.

According to the feature A40, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means in the configuration in which the corresponding information corresponding to the game ball is externally output when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means. As a result, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means can be used for predetermined entry while simply grasping the number of balls and the frequency of entry of the game ball into the predetermined entry means by using the corresponding information. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of game balls entering the ball means and the frequency of entry.

Feature A41. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A40, wherein the predetermined storage executing means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature A41, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features A1 to A41, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, the storage of the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth, eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and the main side in the tenth embodiment. By making it executed in the RAM 65), predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is predetermined. Predetermined storage execution means to be stored in the storage means (a function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and a main CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment). (Functions for executing the processes of step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320 and step S2323) in
The information calculation means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, twelfth embodiment) which calculates mode information corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period by using the predetermined information. In the third embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S1008, S1013 and S1017 in the management side CPU 112, the function of executing the processes of steps S1408, step S1413 and step S1417 in the management side CPU 112, and the fourth embodiment. The function of executing the process of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112, the function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step S2005 in the management side CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment. The function, in the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 63),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature B1, when a predetermined event occurs, the storage of the corresponding information is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store information for managing the number or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is appropriate to manage the mode of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing and retaining the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the game machine calculates the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period. As a result, for example, it is possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period, or it is possible to externally output mode information which is the result of calculation using the predetermined information. Become.

Feature B2. The predetermined storage executing means is a means (in the first to seventh embodiments) for causing information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation to be the predetermined storage means. The function of executing the processing of steps S804 and S809 in the management side CPU 112, the function of executing the processing of step S2104 in the management side CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and the processing of step S2203 in the management side CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment. Has a function to execute)
The information calculation means is a means for calculating the aspect information (first, second, sixth, eighth, eighth) by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation. 9. In the tenth and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processes of steps S1008, S1013 and S1017 in the management side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, the processing of steps S1408, step S1413 and step S1417 in the management side CPU 112. The function of executing the process of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and the management in the seventh embodiment. The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized in that it has a function of executing the process of step S2005 in the side CPU 112, and a function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment).

According to the feature B2, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the situation is predetermined, and to calculate the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period.

Feature B3. When the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, twelfth implementation). The feature B1 or B2 is characterized by having a function of executing the process of step S1019 in the management side CPU 112 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S1605 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment). Game machine.

According to the feature B3, when the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, so that the event that the predetermined information exceeds the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means is unlikely to occur. It is possible to make it.

Feature B4. Feature B1 characterized in that even if the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the state in which the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is stored in the predetermined storage means is maintained. Or the gaming machine described in B2.

According to the feature B4, even if the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is stored and held in the predetermined storage means, so that the aspect information is read out and the game is played in a predetermined period. When analyzing the result of the above, it is possible to refer not only to the aspect information but also to the predetermined information which is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information.

Feature B5. The information calculation means is characterized in that the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control means (MPU62) is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of B4.

According to the feature B5, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started, the mode information is calculated in units of each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

Feature B6. Any of the features B1 to B5, wherein the information calculation means calculates the mode information when a calculation trigger that can be repeatedly generated occurs in a situation where the control means (MPU62) is supplied with operating power. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature B6, since the mode information is calculated every time a calculation trigger that repeatedly occurs in the situation where the operating power is supplied to the control means, the mode information is managed in detail within one business day. Is possible.

Feature B7. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) becomes a predetermined period.
The period measuring means stops the measurement of the period when the game is not executed, and restarts the measurement of the period from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the measurement of the period is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6.

According to the feature B7, since the aspect information is calculated every time the predetermined period elapses, the calculation frequency of the aspect information can be easily adjusted only by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, in the situation where the game is not executed, the measurement for the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not executed from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the aspect information in the situation in which the game is being executed.

Feature B8. Features B1 to B7 characterized by having an external output means (a function of executing an external output process in the management side CPU 112) that outputs the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the feature B8, since the aspect information is output to a device outside the gaming machine, it is possible to easily grasp the entering aspect of the gaming ball.

Feature B9. The gaming machine according to feature B8, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the gaming machine when the aspect information is output to the device outside the gaming machine.

According to the feature B9, when not only the aspect information but also the predetermined information is output to the device outside the gaming machine to read the aspect information and analyze the entering mode of the game ball, not only the aspect information but also the aspect information thereof. It is possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information.

Feature B10. The first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means,
Equipped with
The feature B8 or the external output means is characterized in that when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means, the external output means outputs the aspect information to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine described in B9.

According to the feature B10, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the external output means separately from the first control means, the embodiment is based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible to output the information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature B11. The information calculation means calculates the mode information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs, and the information calculation means calculates the mode information.
The result storage execution means (in the third embodiment, steps S1410, S1414 and step S1418 in the management side CPU 112) sequentially store the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131). The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, which comprises a function of executing the process of the above, and a function of executing the process of step S1604 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment).

According to the feature B11, the aspect information can be accumulated in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to collectively read out a plurality of mode information when managing the mode of the result of the game in a predetermined period.

Feature B12. The result storage execution means includes means for storing the mode information in the calculation result storage means (a function of executing the process of step S1604 in the management side CPU 112) when the mode information is the storage target information. The gaming machine according to feature B11.

According to the feature B12, when the aspect information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the aspect information is stored in the calculation result storage means. As a result, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required for the calculation result storage means.

Feature B13. The game according to feature B11 or B12, wherein the result storage executing means stores information that enables the time when the aspect information is calculated to be attached to the aspect information and stores the result storage means in the calculation result storage means. Machine.

According to the feature B13, the information that makes it possible to specify the time when the aspect information is calculated is attached to the aspect information. This makes it possible to analyze each aspect information while grasping the time when each aspect information is calculated.

Feature B14. The first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means, and
Equipped with
Described in any one of features B1 to B13, wherein the information calculation means calculates the aspect information when the second control means receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. Game machine.

According to the feature B14, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the embodiment is based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible to make the information calculated by the second control means.

Feature B15. It is provided with a notification control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2605, S2607 and S2608 in the main CPU 63) that controls the notification means (notifying light emitting unit 151) so as to notify the content corresponding to the aspect information. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B14, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature B15, the content corresponding to the aspect information is notified by the gaming machine itself. As a result, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the game in a predetermined period without reading the mode information from the game machine.

Feature B16. The control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is housed in the board box.
The gaming machine according to feature B15, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

According to the feature B16, it is possible to make it difficult to perform unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature B17. A first control means (main side CPU 63) having the information calculation means and the notification control means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means, and
The gaming machine according to the feature B15 or B16, which comprises the above-mentioned feature B15 or B16.

According to the feature B17, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating the aspect information and the calculation result thereof. It is possible to consolidate the functions for executing the notification corresponding to the first control means.

Feature B18. The notification control means controls the notification means so that the first notification is executed when the mode information is the information in the first range, and when the mode information is the information in the second range, the notification control means controls the notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B15 to B17, characterized in that the notification means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

According to the feature B18, the aspect information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range including the aspect information is notified. This makes it possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature B19. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the information corresponding to the storage is stored in the predetermined storage means (in the first to ninth, eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the history memory 117 and the tenth embodiment). Then, by making it executed in the main RAM 65), predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments). Is stored in the predetermined storage means (a function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112 in the first to ninth, eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and in the tenth embodiment). (Functions for executing the processes of step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320, and step S2323) in the main CPU 63).
Information calculation means (1st, 2nd, 6th, 8th, 9th, 9th) for calculating the aspect information corresponding to the entry mode of the game ball in the game area by using the predetermined information. 10. In the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1008, step S1013 and step S1017 in the management side CPU 112 is executed, and in the third embodiment, the processing of step S1408, step S1413 and step S1417 in the management side CPU 112 is executed. A function, a function of executing the process of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and a function in the management side CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment. A function of executing the process of step S2005, a function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature B19, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the storage process of the corresponding information is executed for the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Become. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store information for managing the number or frequency of balls entered into the predetermined ball entry means in the gaming machine, and by using this managed information, the predetermined information is used. It becomes possible to appropriately manage the mode of entering the game ball into the ball entry means. Further, by storing and retaining the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

In addition, the game machine calculates the mode information corresponding to the entry mode of the game ball by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it is possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the entering mode of the gaming ball, or it is possible to externally output the aspect information which is the result of calculation using predetermined information. ..

Feature B20. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B19, wherein the predetermined storage executing means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature B20, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features B1 to B20, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Features C1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, the storage of the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth, eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and the main side in the tenth embodiment. By making it executed in the RAM 65), predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is predetermined. Predetermined storage execution means to be stored in the storage means (a function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and a main CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment). (Functions for executing the processes of step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320 and step S2323) in
Information calculation means (first, second, sixth, eighth) for calculating mode information corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period by using the predetermined information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs. In the ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processes of step S1008, step S1013, and step S1017 in the management side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, step S1408, step S1413, and step S1417 in the management side CPU 112. The function of executing the process of step S1602 in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, the seventh embodiment. Then, the function of executing the process of step S2005 in the management side CPU 112, and the function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main side CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment).
The result storage execution means (in the third embodiment, steps S1410, S1414 and step S1418 in the management side CPU 112) sequentially store the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131). The function of executing the process of step S1604 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature C1, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. .. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store information for managing the number or frequency of balls entered into the predetermined ball entry means in the gaming machine, and by using this managed information, the predetermined information is used. It becomes possible to appropriately manage the mode of entering the game ball into the ball entry means. Further, by storing and retaining the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the game machine calculates the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period. As a result, for example, it is possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period, or it is possible to externally output mode information which is the result of calculation using the predetermined information. Become.

In addition, it becomes possible to accumulate the aspect information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to collectively read out a plurality of mode information when managing the mode of the result of the game in a predetermined period.

Feature C2. The result storage execution means includes means for storing the mode information in the calculation result storage means (a function of executing the process of step S1604 in the management side CPU 112) when the mode information is the storage target information. The gaming machine according to the feature C1.

According to the feature C2, when the aspect information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the aspect information is stored in the calculation result storage means. As a result, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required for the calculation result storage means.

Feature C3. The game according to feature C1 or C2, wherein the result storage executing means stores information that enables the time when the aspect information is calculated to be attached to the aspect information and stores the result storage means in the calculation result storage means. Machine.

According to the feature C3, the information that makes it possible to specify the time when the aspect information is calculated is attached to the aspect information. This makes it possible to analyze each aspect information while grasping the time when each aspect information is calculated.

Feature C4. The predetermined storage executing means is a means (in the first to seventh embodiments) for causing information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation to be the predetermined storage means. The function of executing the processing of steps S804 and S809 in the management side CPU 112, the function of executing the processing of step S2104 in the management side CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and the processing of step S2203 in the management side CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment. Has a function to execute)
The information calculation means is a means for calculating the aspect information (first, second, sixth, eighth, eighth) by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation. 9. In the tenth and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processes of steps S1008, S1013 and S1017 in the management side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, the processing of steps S1408, step S1413 and step S1417 in the management side CPU 112. The function of executing the process of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and the management in the seventh embodiment. Described in any one of features C1 to C3, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S2005 in the side CPU 112, and a function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment). Game machine.

According to the feature C4, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the situation is predetermined, and to calculate the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period.

Feature C5. When the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, twelfth implementation). One of the features C1 to C4, characterized in that the embodiment has a function of executing the process of step S1019 in the management side CPU 112, and a fourth embodiment has a function of executing the process of step S1605 in the management side CPU 112. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature C5, when the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, so that the event that the predetermined information exceeds the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means is unlikely to occur. It is possible to make it.

Feature C6. Even if the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is maintained in a state of being stored in the predetermined storage means. C1 The gaming machine according to any one of C5.

According to the feature C6, even if the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information used when the aspect information is calculated is stored and held in the predetermined storage means, so that the aspect information is read out and the game is played in a predetermined period. When analyzing the result of the above, it is possible to refer not only to the aspect information but also to the predetermined information which is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information.

Feature C7. The information calculation means is characterized in that the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control means (MPU62) is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of C6.

According to the feature C7, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started, the mode information is calculated in units of each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

Feature C8. The information calculation means is any one of the features C1 to C7, characterized in that the mode information is calculated when a calculation trigger that can be repeatedly generated occurs in a situation where the control means (MPU62) is supplied with operating power. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature C8, since the mode information is calculated every time a calculation trigger that repeatedly occurs in the situation where the operating power is supplied to the control means, the mode information is managed in detail within one business day. Is possible.

Feature C9. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) becomes a predetermined period.
The period measuring means stops the measurement of the period when the game is not executed, and restarts the measurement of the period from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the measurement of the period is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8.

According to the feature C9, since the aspect information is calculated every time the predetermined period elapses, the calculation frequency of the aspect information can be easily adjusted only by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, in the situation where the game is not executed, the measurement for the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not executed from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the aspect information in the situation in which the game is being executed.

Feature C10. Features C1 to C9 characterized by having an external output means (a function of executing an external output process in the management side CPU 112) that outputs the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the feature C10, since the aspect information is output to a device outside the gaming machine, it is possible to easily grasp the entering aspect of the gaming ball.

Feature C11. The gaming machine according to feature C10, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the gaming machine when the aspect information is output to the device outside the gaming machine.

According to the feature C11, when not only the aspect information but also the predetermined information is output to the device outside the gaming machine to read the aspect information and analyze the entering mode of the game ball, not only the aspect information but also the aspect information thereof. It is possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information.

Feature C12. The first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means,
Equipped with
The feature C10 or the external output means is characterized in that when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means, the external output means outputs the aspect information to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to C11.

According to the feature C12, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the external output means separately from the first control means, the embodiment is based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible to output the information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature C13. The first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means, and
Equipped with
Described in any one of features C1 to C12, wherein the information calculation means calculates the aspect information when the second control means receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. Game machine.

According to the feature C13, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the embodiment is based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible to make the information calculated by the second control means.

Feature C14. It is provided with a notification control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2605, S2607 and S2608 in the main CPU 63) that controls the notification means (notifying light emitting unit 151) so as to notify the content corresponding to the aspect information. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C13, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature C14, the content corresponding to the aspect information is notified by the gaming machine itself. As a result, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the game in a predetermined period without reading the mode information from the game machine.

Feature C15. The control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is housed in the board box.
The gaming machine according to feature C14, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

According to the feature C15, it is possible to make it difficult to perform unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature C16. The first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means, and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature C14 or C15, wherein the first control means includes the information calculation means and the notification control means.

According to the feature C16, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating the aspect information and the calculation result thereof. It is possible to consolidate the functions for executing the notification corresponding to the first control means.

Feature C17. The notification control means controls the notification means so that the first notification is executed when the mode information is the information in the first range, and when the mode information is the information in the second range, the notification control means controls the notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C14 to C16, characterized in that the notification means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

According to the feature C17, the aspect information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range including the aspect information is notified. This makes it possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature C18. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the storage of the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means (in the first to ninth, eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the history memory 117 and the tenth embodiment). Then, by making it executed in the main RAM 65), predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments). Is stored in the predetermined storage means (a function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112 in the first to ninth, eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and in the tenth embodiment). (Functions for executing the processes of step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320, and step S2323) in the main CPU 63).
Information calculation means (first, first) for calculating mode information corresponding to the entry mode of a game ball in the game area in a predetermined period by using the predetermined information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs. 2. In the sixth, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processes of step S1008, step S1013, and step S1017 in the management side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, the step in the management side CPU 112. The function of executing the processing of S1408, step S1413 and step S1417, the function of executing the processing of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, and the processing of step S1802 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment. The function, in the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2005 in the management side CPU 112, and in the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main side CPU 63).
The result storage execution means (in the third embodiment, steps S1410, S1414 and step S1418 in the management side CPU 112) sequentially store the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131). The function of executing the process of step S1604 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature C18, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the storage process of the corresponding information is executed for the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Become. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store information for managing the number or frequency of balls entered into the predetermined ball entry means in the gaming machine, and by using this managed information, the predetermined information is used. It becomes possible to appropriately manage the mode of entering the game ball into the ball entry means. Further, by storing and retaining the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

In addition, the game machine calculates the mode information corresponding to the entry mode of the game ball by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it is possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the entering mode of the gaming ball, or it is possible to externally output the aspect information which is the result of calculation using predetermined information. ..

In addition, it becomes possible to accumulate the aspect information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to collectively read out a plurality of mode information when managing the mode of the result of the game in a predetermined period.

Feature C19. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C18, wherein the predetermined storage executing means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature C19, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C19, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to 1 One or a plurality of configurations of H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic D group>
Feature D1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, the storage of the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth, eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and the main side in the tenth embodiment. By making it executed in the RAM 65), predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is predetermined. First storage execution means to be stored in storage means (a function of executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and a main side in the tenth embodiment. A function of executing the processes of step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320, and step S2323 in the CPU 63).
When a specific event occurs as a result of the game, the storage of the corresponding information is executed in the predetermined storage means, so that the specific information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, the first In the second embodiment (first to ninth, eleventh to twelfth embodiments), the second storage executing means (numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is stored in the predetermined storage means. A function to execute the history setting process in the management side CPU 112, and in the tenth embodiment, a function to execute the processes of step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320 and step S2323 in the main side CPU 63). ,
A first external output means (management side CPU 112) that outputs the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine so that the predetermined information can be recognized as corresponding to the predetermined event. (Function to execute processing for external output) and
A second external output means (management side CPU 112) that outputs the specific information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine so that the specific information can be recognized as corresponding to the specific event. (Function to execute processing for external output) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature D1, the information stored in the predetermined storage means can be read from the gaming machine, and the read information can be used to specify the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event. In addition, when the external output is performed, the predetermined information is output externally so that it can be recognized that the predetermined information corresponds to the predetermined event, and the specific information corresponds to the specific event. The specific information is output to the outside so that the information can be recognized. As a result, even if the information is not processed by the second control means, it is possible to specify the occurrence mode of each event by using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, characterized in that it includes means for externally outputting corresponding information when the predetermined event occurs (a function of executing the process of step S218 in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature D2, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means in the configuration in which the corresponding information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event is externally output. As a result, the number of occurrences and frequency of occurrence of predetermined events can be easily grasped by using the correspondence information, and the number and frequency of occurrence of predetermined events can be accurately grasped by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. It becomes possible to grasp.

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein the predetermined information is information on the number of times the predetermined event has occurred, and the specific information is information on the number of times the specific event has occurred.

According to the feature D3, the predetermined information is the counting information of the number of times the predetermined event has occurred, and the specific information is the counting information of the number of times the specific event has occurred, so that the information capacity of the predetermined information and the specific information is suppressed. It is possible to manage the mode of occurrence of a predetermined event and the mode of occurrence of a specific event.

Feature D4. It is equipped with a program output means (a function of executing the process of step S903 in the main CPU 63) that outputs a control program to a device outside the gaming machine by using the information output unit (reading terminal 102).
The first external output means and the second external output means use the information output unit to output the information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of D3.

According to the feature D4, it is possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage means by using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program. This makes it possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage means while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature D5. A selection means (selection means for specifying which of the information stored in the predetermined storage means and the control program is the information to be output from the information output unit and outputting the information corresponding to the specific result. The gaming machine according to feature D4, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S902 in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature D5, in the configuration in which the information stored in the predetermined storage means is externally output by using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program, the information to be externally output is the control program and the predetermined information. Which of the information stored in the storage means is specified on the game machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. As a result, it is possible to read only necessary information even in a configuration in which the information output unit is also used.

Feature D6. Based on the information received from the external device electrically connected to the information output unit, the selection means stores the information to be output from the information output unit in the predetermined storage means and the control program. The gaming machine according to feature D5, which is characterized by specifying which of them is.

According to the feature D6, it is specified which information should be output from the information output unit based on the information received from the external device electrically connected to the information output unit. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration regarding the selection of information to be output from becoming complicated.

Feature D7. A chip (MPU62) having a program storage means (main side ROM 64) for storing the control program in advance is characterized by having the information output unit, the first external output means, and the second external output means. The gaming machine according to any one of D4 to D6.

According to the feature D7, the signal path for the information output unit can be integrated in the chip. This makes it possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above while making it difficult for unauthorized access to the signal path to the information output unit.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D7, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to 1 One or a plurality of configurations of H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic E group>
Features E1. A program output means (a function of executing the process of step S903 in the main CPU 63) for outputting a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102), and
An information output means (a function for executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112) that outputs special information using the information output unit, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature E1, it is possible to output the special information to the outside by using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside. This makes it possible to output special information to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature E2. A selection means (step S902 in the main CPU 63) for identifying which of the special information and the control program the information to be output from the information output unit is, and outputting the information corresponding to the specific result. The gaming machine according to feature E1, which is characterized by having a function of executing the processing of the above.

According to the feature E2, in the configuration in which the special information is output externally by using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program, the information to be output externally is either the control program or the special information. The program is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. As a result, it is possible to read only necessary information even in a configuration in which the information output unit is also used.

Feature E3. The selection means determines whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the special information or the control program based on the information received from the external device electrically connected to the information output unit. The gaming machine according to feature E2, which is characterized by specifying.

According to the feature E3, it is specified which information should be output from the information output unit based on the information received from the external device electrically connected to the information output unit. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration regarding the selection of information to be output from becoming complicated.

Feature E4. One of the features E1 to E3, wherein the chip (MPU62) having the program storage means (main side ROM 64) for storing the control program in advance has the information output unit and the information output means. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature E4, the signal path for the information output unit can be integrated in the chip. This makes it possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above while making it difficult for unauthorized access to the signal path to the information output unit.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features E1 to E4, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. A first control means (main side CPU 63) and a second control means (management side CPU 112) are provided.
The first control means is
A privilege granting means (a function of executing the process of step S217 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing the process of step S408 in the payout side CPU 92) for granting the privilege to the player when a predetermined event occurs, and
An information transmission means (a function for executing management output processing in the main CPU 63) for transmitting predetermined event information corresponding to the predetermined event when the predetermined event occurs, and
Equipped with
When the predetermined event information is received, the second control means stores the information corresponding to the predetermined event information (in the first to ninth, eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the history memories 117 and tenth. In the embodiment, the predetermined information (first to eighth) that enables the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of the predetermined event to be specified by the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine by executing the execution in the main RAM 65). , The predetermined storage executing means (1st to 9th) so that the history information in the twelfth embodiment and the numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments are stored in the predetermined storage means. In the eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the function for executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112, and in the tenth embodiment, steps S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320 and the like in the main CPU 63. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing the process of step S2323).

According to the feature F1, a privilege is given to the player when a predetermined event occurs. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting that a predetermined event occurs. In this configuration, when a predetermined event occurs, the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the number or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be specified by the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine. The predetermined information to be stored will be stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store information for managing the number or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is appropriate to manage the mode of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing and retaining the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, since the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the privilege granting means has the predetermined storage execution means, the processing load of the first control means does not increase extremely. However, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as already explained.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to the feature F2, since the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip, unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means can be performed. It will be possible to prevent it.

Feature F3. When a specific event occurs, the predetermined storage executing means executes a storage process of information corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event in the predetermined storage means, so that the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the specific event can be determined by the gaming machine or outside the gaming machine. Specific information that can be specified by the apparatus (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is stored in the predetermined storage means. To be done
The first control means is
A function of outputting one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63 to transmit the first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the predetermined event occurs. )When,
A function of outputting one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63 to transmit the second information to the second control means using the second signal path when the specific event occurs. )When,
The gaming machine according to the feature F1 or F2, which comprises the above-mentioned feature F1 or F2.

According to the feature F3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined event but also the specific information corresponding to the specific event is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to manage not only the mode of occurrence of a predetermined event but also the mode of occurrence of a specific event. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of the frequency of occurrence between the predetermined event and the specific event.

Further, when a predetermined event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when a specific event occurs, the second information is transmitted using the second signal path. It is transmitted to the second control means. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted and the signal path correspond to each other, and it is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing each type of information by the second control means.

Features F4. The first control means is a third transmission means that transmits identification information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not it is a predetermined situation to the second control means using a third path. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the signal in the open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63, The gaming machine according to feature F3, which is characterized by having a function of outputting either a high-frequency support mode signal or a door-opening signal).

According to the feature F4, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of a predetermined event and the occurrence mode of a specific event by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation. Further, since the identification information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the situation is predetermined is transmitted to the second control means using the third path, the second control means transfers the identification information to the first information and the first information. 2 It is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing from other information such as information.

Feature F5. The first control means transmits identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event to the second control means. The gaming machine according to feature F3 or F4, which comprises a transmission means (a function of executing recognition processing in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature F5, the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to a predetermined event and the second information corresponds to a specific event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. It is not necessary to store the correspondence of these information in advance in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature F6. The gaming machine according to feature F5, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to the feature F6, when the supply of the operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, so that a predetermined event and a specific event may occur. In the situation, it is possible to make it possible for the second control means to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means.

Feature F7. 5. The feature F5 or F6, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means by using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. Game machine.

According to the feature F7, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a configuration dedicated to transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication as compared with.

Feature F8. When the second control means receives the identification information, the second control means can specify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event. 1 Game machine.

According to the feature F8, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the type of event is stored in the second control means. As a result, information that enables the second control means to specify the type of event corresponding to the information to be transmitted is provided to the second control means each time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. You don't have to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the first information and the second information.

Features F9. The first control means is a third transmission means that transmits third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not the situation is predetermined to the second control means using a third path. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the signal in the open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63, Equipped with a function to output either the high frequency support mode signal or the door open signal)
The feature F5 is characterized in that the second control means can recognize that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present, even if the identification information is not received. The gaming machine according to any one of F8.

According to the feature F9, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of a predetermined event and the occurrence mode of a specific event by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation. Further, the information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the third information is in a predetermined situation can be specified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. .. This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature F10. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature F10, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described above in the configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F10, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to 1 One or a plurality of configurations of H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions relating to the feature A group, the feature B group, the feature C group, the feature D group, the feature E group, and the feature F group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing a game ball given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game ball stored in the dish storage section is guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage unit and a lower plate storage unit as a plate storage unit is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the game balls surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to manage the gaming machine preferably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. The first control means (main CPU 63) and
A second control means (management side CPU 112) that receives information transmitted from the first control means, and
Equipped with
The first control means is
A function of outputting one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63 to transmit the first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the first event occurs. )When,
A function of outputting one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63 to transmit the second information to the second control means using the second signal path when the second event occurs. )When,
The identification information transmitting means (main side) that transmits the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event to the second control means. (Function to execute recognition processing in CPU 63) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature G1, when the first event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when the second event occurs, the second signal path is used. Then, the second information is transmitted to the second control means. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted and the signal path correspond to each other, and it is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing each type of information by the second control means.

Further, since the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, these information It is not necessary to store the correspondence between the above in the second control means in advance. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to the feature G2, when the supply of the operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, so that the predetermined ball entry means and the specific ball entry means In a situation where a game ball can enter the ball, it is possible to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means by the second control means. Become.

Feature G3. The feature G1 or G2, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means by using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. Game machine.

According to the feature G3, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication as compared with.

Features G4. When the identification information is received, the second control means makes it possible to identify that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event. One of the features G1 to G3, which is characterized by having a means (a function of executing a correspondence relation setting process in the management side CPU 112) for storing the relation information in the correspondence relation storage means (correspondence relation memory 116). The described gaming machine.

According to the feature G4, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means is stored in the second control means. As a result, it is necessary to provide the second control means with information that enables the second control means to specify the event corresponding to the information to be transmitted, each time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. Is gone. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the first information and the second information.

Feature G5. The first control means is a third transmission means that transmits third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not the situation is predetermined to the second control means using a third path. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the signal in the open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63, Equipped with a function to output either the high frequency support mode signal or the door open signal)
The feature G1 is characterized in that the second control means can recognize that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present, even if the identification information is not received. The gaming machine according to any one of G4.

According to the feature G5, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the first event and the occurrence mode of the second event by distinguishing whether or not the situation is predetermined. Further, the information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the third information is in a predetermined situation can be specified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. .. This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature G6. As a signal path capable of transmitting information from the first control means to the second control means, a number larger than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, characterized in that a signal path is provided.

According to the feature G6, since the number of signal paths provided is larger than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, the information can be obtained according to the model of the gaming machine. Even if the number of types increases or decreases, it is possible to deal with it without changing the configuration related to the signal path. Therefore, it is possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature G7. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature G7, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described above in the configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features G1 to G7, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to 1 One or a plurality of configurations of H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the above-mentioned feature G group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing a game ball given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game ball stored in the dish storage section is guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage unit and a lower plate storage unit as a plate storage unit is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the game balls surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to make a configuration related to communication suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, the information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the predetermined storage means (normal counter area 171 in the thirteenth embodiment, open / close execution mode counter area 172, and high frequency support mode counter area 173). ), Predetermined information (numerical information measured in each of the counters 171a to 171e, 172a to 172e, 173a to 173e in the thirteenth embodiment) is stored in the predetermined storage means. Predetermined storage execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3204 to S3205 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) and
Information derivation means (a function of executing the process of step S3504 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) for deriving the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period by using the predetermined information.
In the situation where the mode information is derived by the information deriving means, the processing of the limiting means (steps S3404 to S3407 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) is executed so that the progress of the game is restricted. The function, the function of executing the process of step S3809 of the main CPU 63 in the 14th embodiment), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature H1, when a predetermined event occurs, the storage of the corresponding information is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store information for managing the number or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is appropriate to manage the mode of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing and retaining the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived by the gaming machine. As a result, for example, the gaming machine itself can perform processing corresponding to the result of the gaming in a predetermined period.

Further, in the situation where the aspect information is derived, the progress of the game is restricted. This makes it possible to derive the aspect information in a situation different from the situation in which a normal game is performed. Therefore, it is not necessary to parallel the progress of the normal game and the derivation of the mode information, and it is possible to reduce the processing load.

Feature H2. The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the limiting means limits the execution of at least a part of the processes for advancing the game.

According to the feature H2, the execution of at least a part of the processes for advancing the game is restricted in the situation where the aspect information is derived, so that the processing per unit time is performed in the situation where the aspect information is derived. It is possible to prevent the number from increasing extremely.

Feature H3. The gaming machine according to feature H1 or H2, wherein the information deriving means derives the aspect information after the progress of the game is restricted by the limiting means.

According to the feature H3, since the mode information is derived after the progress of the game is restricted, it is possible to derive the mode information in a situation where a predetermined event does not newly occur with the progress of the game.

Features H4. Launch means (game ball launch mechanism 27) that launches a game ball toward the game area, and
Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
Equipped with
The predetermined storage executing means is such that when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means as the predetermined event, the storage of the corresponding information is executed in the predetermined storage means. The information is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the information is stored in the predetermined storage means.
The gaming machine according to feature H3, wherein the limiting means limits the launching of a gaming ball by the launching means.

According to the feature H4, since the aspect information is derived after the launch of the game ball is restricted, the aspect information is restricted in the situation where the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means that triggers the variation of the aspect information is restricted. Can be derived.

Feature H5. The information deriving means derives the aspect information after a predetermined period has elapsed after the launching of the game ball by the launching means is restricted by the limiting means.
The feature H4 is characterized in that the predetermined period is set to a longer period than the longest period assumed as the period required for the gaming ball launched from the launching means to enter the predetermined ball entering means. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature H5, when the aspect information is derived, it is assumed as the period required from the restriction of the launch of the game ball to the time when the game ball launched from the launching means enters the predetermined ball entry means. The aspect information is derived after a period longer than the longest period has elapsed. As a result, it becomes possible to derive the aspect information in a situation in which the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means that triggers the variation of the aspect information does not surely occur.

Feature H6. The limiting means limits the progress of the game based on the occurrence of the trigger for deriving the mode information, and the trigger for deriving the mode information occurs in a situation where a specific operation is performed in the game machine. The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H5, characterized in that the progress of the game is not restricted even if the game is played.

According to the feature H6, in the situation where the specific operation is performed in the gaming machine, the progress of the gaming is not restricted even if the trigger for deriving the mode information occurs. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the specific operation from being hindered by the occurrence of the trigger for deriving the mode information.

Feature H7. The limiting means is characterized in that when the trigger for deriving the aspect information occurs in a situation where the specific operation is being performed in the game machine, the progress of the game is restricted after the end of the specific operation. Feature The gaming machine described in H6.

According to the feature H7, when the trigger for deriving the mode information occurs in the situation where the specific motion is performed in the gaming machine, the progress of the game is restricted after the end of the specific motion, so that the execution of the specific motion is hindered. It is possible to derive the mode information in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted in response to the occurrence of the trigger for deriving the mode information.

Feature H8. A lottery processing execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S3003 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) that executes the lottery processing when the lottery conditions are satisfied.
Game round control means (thirteenth implementation) in which the game round operation is performed for a predetermined continuation period and the game round execution means (special figure display unit 37a) is controlled so as to be in a state corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery process. The function of executing the processes of steps S2808 to S2810 of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment) and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature H6 or H7, wherein the situation in which the specific operation is performed includes a situation in which the game rotation operation is performed by the game rotation executing means.

According to the feature H8, the progress of the game is not restricted even if the trigger for deriving the mode information occurs in the situation where the game rotation operation is performed. This makes it possible to derive the mode information in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted while not interrupting the game rotation operation.

Feature H9. Equipped with a variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) capable of opening a game ball flowing down the game area so that the ball can enter.
The gaming machine according to any one of features H6 to H8, wherein the situation in which the specific operation is performed includes a situation in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state.

According to the feature H9, in the situation where the variable ball entry means is in the open state, the progress of the game is not restricted even if the trigger for deriving the mode information occurs. This makes it possible to derive the mode information in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted while not interrupting the open state of the variable ball entry means.

Feature H10. Information storage means (main side RAM 65) in which information necessary for controlling the progress of the game is written in the control means (main side CPU 63), and
An initialization execution means (a function of executing the process of step S3709 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) that executes initialization of the information storage means when an initialization opportunity occurs.
When the information is set so that the progress of the game is restricted by the limiting means, the means for preventing the initialization of the information storage means by the initialization executing means (main in the thirteenth embodiment). (Function to execute the process of step S3704 of the side CPU 63) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H9.

According to the feature H10, when the information is set so that the progress of the game is restricted by the limiting means, the initialization of the information storage means is prevented in response to the occurrence of the initialization trigger. As a result, when the progress of the game is restricted in the situation where the mode information is derived, even if an operation that erroneously generates an initialization trigger in an attempt to release the restricted situation is performed, information is given to it. It is possible to prevent the initialization of the storage means from being executed.

Features H11. Another execution means for executing the initialization of the information storage means when another trigger different from the initialization trigger occurs (a function of executing the processes of steps S3706 to S3708 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment). Equipped with
Even when the information setting for limiting the progress of the game is performed by the limiting means, the initialization of the information storage means by the other executing means is executed. Features The gaming machine according to H10.

According to the feature H11, even if the information is set so that the progress of the game is restricted by the limiting means, the information storage means is initialized when another opportunity occurs. .. As a result, even when the progress of the game is restricted in the situation where the aspect information is derived, it is possible to leave room for the initialization of the information storage means to be executed.

Feature H12. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H11, wherein the state in which the progress of the game is restricted by the limiting means is released when the restricted period elapses.

According to the feature H12, the state in which the progress of the game is restricted in the situation where the mode information is derived is released after the restriction period elapses, so that the state in which the progress of the game is restricted is left as it is. It is possible to prevent an event from occurring.

Feature H13. The effect control means (sound / light side CPU 163, display control device 82) for controlling the effect execution means (symbol display device 41) so that the effect is executed is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H12, wherein the effect control means is such that the execution of the effect is continued even if the restriction means limits the progress of the game. ..

According to the feature H13, even if the progress of the game is restricted in the situation where the aspect information is derived, the execution of the effect in the effect execution means is continued. As a result, even if a player has an opportunity to derive mode information during the game and the progress of the game is restricted, it is possible to prevent the production from ending immediately. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused when the progress of the game is restricted.

Feature H14. The effect control means is a series of effect control means (13th) that controls the effect execution means so that a series of effects (effects for game rounds) is executed over a predetermined effect period when a predetermined start trigger occurs. The display control device 82) is provided with a function of executing the processing of steps S295 to S2907 of the sound light side CPU 163 in the embodiment of the above.
The series of effect control means is a control for ending the series of effects even if the predetermined effect period has elapsed when the restriction means limits the progress of the game in the situation where the series of effects is being executed. The gaming machine according to the feature H13, which is characterized in that the above is not executed.

According to the feature H14, when the progress of the game is restricted due to the trigger for deriving the mode information in the situation where the series of effects is executed by the effect execution means, the predetermined trigger is originally the trigger for ending the series of effects. Even if the effect period has elapsed, the control for ending the series of effects is not executed. As a result, it is possible to make a series of effects continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted, and even if the progress of the game is restricted in a situation where the mode information is derived, the effect can be executed. It is possible to make the player think that it is being continued.

Feature H15. The first control means (main side CPU 63) having the limiting means and
A second control means (sound / light side CPU 163, display control device 82) having the effect control means,
Equipped with
The effect control means controls the effect execution means so that a new effect is started when the second control means receives start trigger information from the first control means.
The series of effect control means ends the series of effects even if the predetermined effect period elapses due to the restriction on the progress of the game by the limiting means in the situation where the series of effects is being executed. The gaming machine according to feature H14, wherein the situation in which the control for performing the game is not executed is released when the second control means receives the start trigger information from the first control means.

According to the feature H15, the state in which the series of effects is continued in the situation where the progress of the game is restricted in order to derive the aspect information is started from the first control means to the second control means in order to start a new effect. It is canceled when the trigger information is sent. As a result, it is not necessary to transmit the dedicated information for canceling the state in which such a series of effects is continued from the first control means to the second control means.

Feature H16. As the series of effects, the effect execution means performs variable display of the pattern, and when the series of effects ends, the pattern is stopped in the standby area after the standby display is performed. It is the configuration to be displayed
The series of effect control means is characterized in that when the restriction means limits the progress of the game in a situation where the series of effects is being executed, the standby display is continued even after the predetermined effect period has elapsed. The gaming machine according to the feature H14 or H15.

According to the feature H16, when the series of effects is continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted in order to derive the mode information, the standby display in the stage before the pattern is stopped and displayed when the series of effects is terminated is continued. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to continue a series of productions in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted while making the player aware of the stop result of the pattern. Further, when the restriction on the progress of the game is released and the series of effects is terminated, it is only necessary to switch from the standby display to the stop display at the timing when the restriction on the progress of the game is released. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly and quickly end the series of effects against the release of the restriction on the progress of the game.

Feature H17. The effect control means allows the execution of the effect to be continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted by the restriction means, but the notification corresponding to the restriction is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features H13 to H16.

According to the feature H17, when the series of effects is continued in the situation where the progress of the game is restricted in order to derive the mode information, the corresponding notification is also executed, so that the series of effects is longer than expected. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused about what is going on.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features H1 to H17, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to 1 One or a plurality of configurations of H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic I group>
Features I1. The effect control means (sound / light side CPU 163, display control device 82) that controls the effect execution means (design display device 41) so that the effect is executed, and
A limiting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3404 to S3407 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) for limiting the progress of the game based on the occurrence of the limiting trigger, and
Equipped with
The effect control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the execution of the effect is continued even if the restriction means limits the progress of the game.

According to the feature I1, the progress of the game is restricted based on the occurrence of the restriction opportunity, so that the game machine can be appropriately managed. In this case, even if the progress of the game is restricted, the execution of the effect in the effect execution means is continued. This makes it possible to prevent the production from ending immediately even if a restriction trigger occurs while the player is playing the game and the progress of the game is restricted, and the progress of the game is restricted. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused when the above occurs.

Feature I2. The effect control means is a series of effect control means (13th) that controls the effect execution means so that a series of effects (effects for game rounds) is executed over a predetermined effect period when a predetermined start trigger occurs. The display control device 82) is provided with a function of executing the processing of steps S295 to S2907 of the sound light side CPU 163 in the embodiment of the above.
The series of effect control means is a control for ending the series of effects even if the predetermined effect period has elapsed when the restriction means limits the progress of the game in the situation where the series of effects is being executed. The gaming machine according to feature I1, which is characterized in that it does not execute.

According to the feature I2, when a restriction trigger occurs and the progress of the game is restricted in a situation where the series of effects is being executed by the effect execution means, a predetermined effect period that normally triggers the end of the series of effects has elapsed. Even if this is done, the control for ending the series of effects is not executed. As a result, it is possible to make a series of effects continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted, and the player states that the execution of the effects is continued even when the progress of the game is restricted. It becomes possible to make you think.

Feature I3. The first control means (main side CPU 63) having the limiting means and
A second control means (sound / light side CPU 163, display control device 82) having the effect control means,
Equipped with
The effect control means controls the effect execution means so that a new effect is started when the second control means receives start trigger information from the first control means.
The series of effect control means ends the series of effects even if the predetermined effect period elapses due to the restriction on the progress of the game by the limiting means in the situation where the series of effects is being executed. The gaming machine according to feature I2, wherein the situation in which the control for the purpose is not executed is released when the second control means receives the start trigger information from the first control means.

According to the feature I3, in the state where the series of effects is continued in the situation where the progress of the game is restricted, the start trigger information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means in order to start a new effect. Will be released. As a result, it is not necessary to transmit the dedicated information for canceling the state in which such a series of effects is continued from the first control means to the second control means.

Feature I4. As the series of effects, the effect execution means performs variable display of the pattern, and when the series of effects ends, the pattern is stopped in the standby area after the standby display is performed. It is the configuration to be displayed
The series of effect control means is characterized in that when the restriction means limits the progress of the game in a situation where the series of effects is being executed, the standby display is continued even after the predetermined effect period has elapsed. The gaming machine according to the feature I2 or I3.

According to the feature I4, when the series of effects is continued in the situation where the progress of the game is restricted, the standby display in the stage before the pattern is stopped and displayed when the series of effects is terminated is continued. As a result, it is possible to continue a series of productions in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted while making the player aware of the stop result of the pattern. Further, when the restriction on the progress of the game is released and the series of effects is terminated, it is only necessary to switch from the standby display to the stop display at the timing when the restriction on the progress of the game is released. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly and quickly end the series of effects against the release of the restriction on the progress of the game.

Feature I5. The effect control means allows the execution of the effect to be continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted by the restriction means, but the notification corresponding to the restriction is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features I1 to I4.

According to the feature I5, when the series of effects is continued in the situation where the progress of the game is restricted, the corresponding notification is also executed, so that the series of effects continues longer than expected. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features I1 to I5, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic J group>
Features J1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means by executing the storage of the corresponding information in the predetermined storage means (advantageous game number counter 344b). Predetermined storage execution means (a function of executing the process of step S5001 of the main MPU 342 in the 16th embodiment) and
An information derivation means (a function of executing the process of step S5103 of the main MPU 342 in the 17th embodiment) for deriving the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period by using the predetermined information.
Constraint means that constrain the progress of the game based on the aspect information derived by the information deriving means (in step S5107 to step S5113 of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment). Function to execute processing) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature J1, when a predetermined event occurs, the storage of the corresponding information is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Then, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived by using the predetermined information, and when the derived mode information is the information corresponding to the regulation, the progress of the game is restricted. .. This makes it possible to restrict the progress of the game according to the mode in which the predetermined event occurs, and if the mode in which the predetermined event occurs does not match the mode assumed at the design stage of the gaming machine, it is dealt with. It becomes possible to do. From the above, it becomes possible to suitably manage the gaming machine.

Feature J2. The constraint means is characterized in that it imparts a constraint that makes it possible to prevent the aspect information from becoming the regulation-compliant information based on the aspect information being the regulation-compliant information. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature J2, even if the aspect information becomes the regulation-compliant information, a restriction is given so that the aspect information does not become the regulation-compliant information. As a result, even if the aspect information becomes the information corresponding to the regulation, it is possible to make the aspect information the information within the range assumed at the design stage of the gaming machine.

Feature J3. A state transition means for shifting the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (a function of executing the processes of steps S4906 to S4911 of the main MPU 342 in the 17th embodiment) and
A predetermined end means (a function of executing the process of step S5009 of the main MPU 342 in the 17th embodiment) for terminating the predetermined game state when a predetermined end opportunity occurs.
Equipped with
The limiting means is described in the feature J1 or J2 characterized in that the predetermined gaming state is terminated even if the predetermined termination trigger has not occurred, based on the aspect information being the information corresponding to the regulation. Game machine.

According to the feature J3, when the aspect information is the information corresponding to the regulation, the predetermined gaming state is terminated even if the predetermined termination trigger has not occurred. As a result, it is possible to forcibly terminate the predetermined gaming state according to the occurrence mode of the predetermined event, and when the occurrence mode of the predetermined event does not match the mode assumed at the design stage of the gaming machine. It is possible to give restrictions to the execution mode of the gaming state.

Features J4. The gaming machine according to feature J3, wherein the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

According to the feature J4, when the mode in which a predetermined event occurs does not match the mode assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine, it is possible to limit the advantage.

Feature J5. The gaming machine according to feature J3 or J4, wherein the predetermined event is an event that occurs in the predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature J5, when the occurrence mode of the predetermined event that occurs in the predetermined gaming state does not match the mode assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine, the predetermined gaming state is forcibly terminated. This makes it possible to prevent the execution mode of the predetermined gaming state from remaining different from the mode assumed at the design stage of the gaming machine.

Features J6. The predetermined period is configured to elapse when the number of games is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference number.
The gaming machine according to feature J5, wherein the predetermined reference number of times is larger than the number of continuous games of the predetermined gaming state that can be set when the predetermined gaming state is newly started.

According to the feature J6, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the predetermined gaming state is forcibly terminated in relation to the occurrence mode of the predetermined event from occurring in each predetermined gaming state.

Feature J7. The gaming machine according to any one of features J3 to J6, wherein the condition for generating the predetermined end trigger is not notified in the predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature J7, the condition for the predetermined end trigger to occur in the predetermined game state is not notified, so that the player feels uncomfortable even if the predetermined game state is forcibly terminated in relation to the occurrence mode of the predetermined event. It is possible not to give.

Features J8. A state transition means for shifting the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (a function of executing the processes of steps S4906 to S4911 of the main MPU 342 in the 17th embodiment) and
A predetermined end means (a function of executing the process of step S5009 of the main MPU 342 in the 17th embodiment) for terminating the predetermined game state when a predetermined end opportunity occurs.
Equipped with
The restricting means is any one of the features J1 to J7, which regulates the subsequent transition to the predetermined gaming state based on the mode information being the information corresponding to the regulation. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature J8, when the aspect information is the information corresponding to the regulation, it is regulated that the transition to the predetermined gaming state occurs. As a result, it is possible to forcibly prevent the transition to the predetermined gaming state according to the occurrence mode of the predetermined event, and the occurrence mode of the predetermined event does not match the mode assumed at the design stage of the gaming machine. In some cases, it is possible to restrict the execution mode of the gaming state.

Features J9. The gaming machine according to feature J8, wherein the restricting means changes a period in which the transition to the predetermined gaming state is restricted after that, depending on the aspect information.

According to the feature J9, since the period in which the transition to the predetermined gaming state is restricted varies depending on the mode information, the restriction on the transition to the predetermined gaming state is underestimated regardless of the mode information. Alternatively, it is possible to prevent it from being set excessively.

Features J10. The state transition means is a transition determination means (the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment) that executes a transition determination process for determining whether or not to shift to the predetermined gaming state based on the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity. A function to execute the processes of steps S4903 to S4905) is provided.
In the present gaming machine, when the predetermined opportunity occurs in a situation where the transition to the predetermined gaming state is restricted by the restricting means, the present gaming machine grants an alternative privilege instead of executing the transition determination process. The gaming machine according to feature J8 or J9, which comprises a privilege granting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4912 to S4914 of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment).

According to the feature J10, in order to determine whether or not to shift to the predetermined gaming state when a predetermined opportunity occurs in a situation where the transition to the predetermined gaming state is forcibly prevented in relation to the aspect information. Although the migration decision process of is not executed, the alternative privilege is given. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that it was useless when a predetermined opportunity occurs in a situation where the transition to the predetermined gaming state is forcibly prevented.

Features J11. In the alternative privilege granting means, the more the number of times the predetermined opportunity occurs in the situation where the transition to the predetermined gaming state is restricted by the restricting means, the more advantageous the content of the alternative privilege is. The gaming machine according to the feature J10, characterized in that the content of the alternative privilege is likely to be advantageous.

According to the feature J11, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation that a predetermined opportunity will occur even in a situation where the transition to the predetermined gaming state is forcibly prevented.

Features J12. The gaming machine according to feature J10 or J11, which comprises means for notifying that the alternative privilege has been granted.

According to the feature J12, by notifying that the alternative privilege is given, the player's motivation to continue the game is lost even in the situation where the transition to the predetermined gaming state is forcibly prevented. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

Feature J13. When the alternative privilege is given, the transition to the predetermined gaming state is likely to occur after the situation in which the transition to the predetermined gaming state is restricted by the restricting means is released. Characteristic Feature The gaming machine according to any one of J10 to J12.

According to the feature J13, it is possible to associate the granting of the alternative privilege with the transition to the predetermined gaming state. As a result, even if a predetermined opportunity occurs in a situation where the transition to the predetermined gaming state is forcibly prevented, the player can expect the transition to the predetermined gaming state. ..

Feature J14. The gaming machine according to any one of features J8 to J13, wherein the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

According to the feature J14, when the mode in which a predetermined event occurs does not match the mode assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine, it is possible to limit the advantage.

Feature J15. The gaming machine according to any one of features J8 to J14, wherein the predetermined event is an event that occurs in the predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature J15, when the occurrence mode of the predetermined event that occurs in the predetermined gaming state does not match the mode assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine, the transition to the predetermined gaming state is forcibly prevented. To. This makes it possible to prevent the execution mode of the predetermined gaming state from remaining different from the mode assumed at the design stage of the gaming machine.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features J1 to J15, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to 1 One or a plurality of configurations of H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. An opening and closing body (front door 312) that can be opened and closed,
A predetermined device (main control device 340) provided in a predetermined area exposed when the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing body is performed, and
Lighting means (illumination devices 349a, 349b) capable of illuminating at least a part of the predetermined device by being in a lighting state, and
Lighting control means (a function of executing lighting processing in the main MPU 342) that adjusts the control state of the lighting means according to the position of the opening / closing body, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature K1, in a configuration in which the opening / closing operation is performed when confirming the presence or absence of an abnormality in the predetermined device, a lighting means for illuminating at least a part of the predetermined device is provided. It becomes easier to make the confirmation. In this case, the control state of the lighting means is adjusted according to the position of the opening / closing body. This makes it possible to illuminate by the illuminating means in a preferable manner according to the position of the opening / closing body. Therefore, it is possible to suitably manage the gaming machine.

Feature K2. The lighting control means controls the lighting means so as to be in a non-lighting state when the opening / closing body is closed and to be in a lighting state based on the opening operation of the opening / closing body. The gaming machine according to the feature K1.

According to the feature K2, when the opening / closing body is closed, the lighting means is in a non-lighting state. This makes it possible to prevent the lighting means from being in a meaningless lighting state in a situation where the predetermined device is not confirmed. Further, when the opening / closing operation is performed, the lighting means is naturally in the lighting state. This makes it easier to check the predetermined device because it is not necessary to separately perform an operation for setting the lighting means to the lighting state.

Feature K3. The gaming machine according to feature K1 or K2, wherein the lighting means is provided in the predetermined area.

According to the feature K3, since the lighting means is provided in the predetermined area, it becomes easy to illuminate the predetermined device by the lighting means according to the opening operation of the opening / closing body.

Features K4. The opening / closing body can be displaced within a predetermined displacement range from the closed position to the maximum open position.
The lighting control means controls the lighting means so that the lighting state is set when the opening / closing body is present in a part of the predetermined displacement range in the lighting corresponding range, and the opening / closing body is opened. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, characterized in that the lighting means is controlled so as to be in a non-lighting state when the lighting means is not present in the lighting corresponding range.

According to the feature K4, the illuminating means is not in the illuminating state regardless of which open position the opening / closing body is arranged, but the illuminating means is selectively in the illuminating state in some open positions. .. As a result, it is possible to put the lighting means in the illuminated state only in a preferable situation when checking the predetermined device, and to put the lighting means in the non-lighting state in the situation where it is difficult to check the predetermined device instead when the lighting means is in the lighting state. Become.

Feature K5. The maximum open position is not included in the illumination range, and the maximum open position is not included.
The gaming machine according to feature K4, wherein the lighting control means controls the lighting means so as to be in the non-lighting state when the opening / closing body is present at the maximum open position.

According to the feature K5, when the opening / closing body is present in the maximum open position, the lighting means is in a non-lighting state. As a result, in a situation where the predetermined device is sufficiently brightly illuminated by the lighting of the game hall, the lighting means is in a non-lighting state, so that there is no inconvenience that it becomes difficult to check the predetermined device by the lighting by the lighting means. It becomes possible to do so.

Features K6. The predetermined device is any one of the features K1 to K5, which is a control device having a control board (main control board 341) and a transparent box (board box 345) for accommodating the control board. The described gaming machine.

According to the feature K6, since the control device is illuminated by the lighting means in response to the opening operation of the opening / closing body, it becomes easy to confirm the control board and the board box of the control device.

Feature K7. Equipped with a box body (housing 311) that is open toward the front of the gaming machine,
When the opening / closing body is closed, the front opening of the box body is closed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K6, wherein the predetermined region exists in the internal space of the box body.

According to the feature K7, it is possible to illuminate a predetermined device provided inside the box body with the opening operation of the opening / closing body.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features K1 to K7, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to 1 One or a plurality of configurations of H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic L group>
Feature L1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, the storage of the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means (the first cumulative buffer 363 and the second cumulative buffer 364 in the eighteenth embodiment, and the first in the nineteenth embodiment. Predetermined storage execution means (in the eighteenth embodiment, in the main MPU 342) so that predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means by being executed in the history memory 371 and the second history memory 372). A function to execute the game management process, a function to execute the history setting process in the management side CPU 112 in the 19th embodiment), and
Information calculation means for calculating mode information corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period using the predetermined information (in the eighteenth embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S5503 and S5508 in the main MPU 342, the first In the 19th embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S5804 and S5807 in the management side CPU 112) and
Equipped with
As the predetermined storage means, a first storage means (first cumulative buffer 363 in the eighteenth embodiment, a first history memory 371 in the nineteenth embodiment) and a second storage means (in the eighteenth embodiment). The second cumulative buffer 364 and, in the nineteenth embodiment, the second history memory 372) are provided at least.
The predetermined storage execution means is
When the predetermined event occurs in the first period as the predetermined period, the predetermined information is stored in the first storage means by causing the first storage means to store the information corresponding to the event. First predetermined storage execution means (in the eighteenth embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S5404, S5409 and S5414 in the main MPU 342, and in the nineteenth embodiment, the process of step S5704 in the management side CPU 112. Function to execute) and
When the predetermined event occurs in the second period as the predetermined period, the predetermined information is stored in the second storage means by causing the second storage means to store the information corresponding to the event. A second predetermined storage execution means (in the eighteenth embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S5406, S5411, and S5416 in the main MPU 342, and in the nineteenth embodiment, the process of step S5707 in the management side CPU 112). Function to execute) and
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that a part of the first period and the second period of one overlap.

According to the feature L1, when a predetermined event occurs, the storage of the corresponding information is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store information for managing the number or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is appropriate to manage the mode of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing and retaining the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the game machine calculates the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period. As a result, for example, it is possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period, or it is possible to externally output mode information which is the result of calculation using the predetermined information. Become.

Further, a first storage means and a second storage means are provided as predetermined storage means, and the first storage means is used to perform management in the first period as a predetermined period, and the second storage means is used to perform predetermined storage means. The management is performed in the second period as the period, and the first period and the second period are partially overlapped. This makes it possible to derive the mode information corresponding to the management result in the first period in the middle of one second period, and also to correspond to the management result in the second period in the middle of one first period. Information can be derived. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of deriving the mode information while guaranteeing the first period and the second period as the period for which the management is performed. Furthermore, even if the storage capacities of the first storage means and the second storage means are not excessively increased, the mode information is derived while guaranteeing the first period and the second period as the period for which the management is performed. It is possible to increase the frequency.

Feature L2. The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein the first period and the second period have the same end conditions.

According to the feature L2, it is possible to derive mode information corresponding to a certain period even in a configuration in which management is performed by using each of the first storage means and the second storage means.

Feature L3. The first predetermined storage execution means starts a new first period following the first period when one of the first periods ends.
The second predetermined storage execution means starts a new second period following the second period when one of the second periods ends.
The gaming machine according to feature L1 or L2, wherein the difference between the first period and the second period is constant.

According to the feature L3, it is possible to derive the mode information corresponding to each of the first period and the second period while guaranteeing the state in which a certain deviation is caused.

Feature L4. The first predetermined storage execution means starts a new first period following the first period when the first period ends, and the first period ends. When the aspect information in the first period is calculated by the information calculation means, the first storage means is initialized or the order of the storage areas to be stored in the first storage means is set in the first order. death,
The second predetermined storage execution means starts a new second period following the second period when the second period ends, and the second period ends. When the aspect information in the second period is calculated by the information calculation means, the second storage means is initialized or the order of the storage areas to be stored in the second storage means is set in the first order. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L3.

According to the feature L4, the capacity of the first storage means capable of storing the predetermined information corresponding to the first period is sufficient, and the second storage means can store the predetermined information corresponding to the second period. Possible capacity is sufficient. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while suppressing the capacities of the first storage means and the second storage means.

Feature L5. When the first period elapses, the content corresponding to the aspect information in the first period calculated by the information calculation means is notified, and when the second period elapses, the information calculation means causes the information calculation means. It is characterized in that it is provided with means for notifying the content corresponding to the aspect information in the second period calculated (in the eighteenth embodiment, a function of executing a management process in the main MPU 342). The gaming machine according to any one of L1 to L4.

According to the feature L5, the content corresponding to the aspect information is notified with the lapse of each of the first period and the second period, so that the content corresponding to the aspect information in a situation relatively close to the current situation is notified. It becomes possible to do.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features L1 to L5, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions relating to the feature H group, the feature I group, the feature J group, the feature K group, and the feature L group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing a game ball given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game ball stored in the dish storage section is guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage unit and a lower plate storage unit as a plate storage unit is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the game balls surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to manage the gaming machine preferably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The following shows the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or is applied to each feature.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and grants a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a picture display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

10 ... pachinko machine, 24a ... out port, 31 ... general winning port, 32 ... special electric winning device, 33 ... first operating port, 34 ... second operating port, 41 ... symbol display device, 61 ... main control board, 62 ... MPU, 63 ... main CPU, 65 ... main RAM, 82 ... display control device, 92 ... payout side CPU, 102 ... reading terminal, 112 ... management side CPU, 116 ... correspondence memory, 131 ... for calculation results Memory, 151 ... Notification light emitting unit, 163 ... Sound / light side CPU, 171 ... Normal counter area, 171a to 171e ... Counter, 172 ... Counter area for open / close execution mode, 172a to 172e ... Counter, 173 ... High frequency support mode Counter area, 173a to 173e ... counter, 311 ... housing, 312 ... front door, 340 ... main control unit, 341 ... main control board, 342 ... main side MPU, 344b ... advantageous game number counter, 345 ... board box, 349a, 349b ... Lighting device.

Claims (1)

Predetermined detection means to detect the game ball,
A game value-adding means that is electrically connected to the predetermined detection means and executes a process for adding a game value to the game.
A processing execution means that is electrically connected to the game value-adding means and executes a predetermined process,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game value-adding means is
A first reference information storage means for storing reference information, which is information used in the process for imparting the game value and is information referred to for the detection of the predetermined detection means.
The reference stored in the first reference information storage means after the predetermined supply of power to the game machine is started and before the execution of the predetermined process for advancing the game is started. A first transmission means for transmitting a reference information signal corresponding to the information to the processing execution means, and
A second transmission means for transmitting a predetermined information signal based on the ball entry information, which is information acquired based on the detection by the predetermined detection means, to the processing execution means.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

Images